MASTER SPECIFICATIONS Division 26 - ELECTRICAL

MASTER SPECIFICATIONS

Division 26 - ELECTRICAL

Release 2.0 R2 Oct 2015 Released by: Cleveland Clinic Facilities and Construction 9500 Euclid Ave. Cleveland OH 44195

All information within this Document is considered CONFIDENTIAL and PROPRIETARY. By receipt and use of this Document, the recipient agrees not to divulge any of the information herein and attached hereto to persons other than those within the recipients’ organization that have specific need to know for the purposes of reviewing and referencing this information. Recipient also agrees not to use this information in any manner detrimental to the interests of Cleveland Clinic.

Cleveland Clinic

Master Specifications

Copyright © 2015

By the Cleveland Clinic

These Specifications, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form without

the permission of the Cleveland Clinic.

Cleveland Clinic Master Specifications

Copyright © 2015 By the Cleveland Clinic

These Specifications, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form without the permission of the Cleveland Clinic.

Cleveland Clinic Master Specifications: Division 26 - Electrical

This document contains the Master Specifications for the design and construction of new and renovated facilities for all domestic Cleveland Clinic locations. It is be used by A/E firms in the preparation of Construction Documents for all facility types. The general purpose of each Specification is to provide minimum criteria for construction materials at Cleveland Clinic facilities regarding Code and FM Global compliance, warranty, approved products, execution and uniformity. The Specifications are used to prepare specific project Contract Specifications. They are intended to be used to address system design aspects of equipment that Cleveland Clinic desires to standardize among facilities, and identify prohibited materials and construction practices. Use of these Specifications will help A/E’s meet the Cleveland Clinic’s primary goal of providing a safe, reliable, and energy efficient installations and ultimately successful patient outcomes. The use of these Specifications is mandatory for all design or maintenance projects. Deviations are discouraged. If project conditions arise which require a deviation, it should be thoroughly documented by the user and submitted to the Cleveland Clinic for review and approval using the Design Standards Revision Request document. Additionally, all Cleveland Clinic staff, architects, engineers, and contractors are encouraged to participate in the ongoing development of these guidelines by communicating any suggestions by use of the Revision Request document. USER NOTE: throughout the specifications, bracketed, bold text indicates optional requirements which may be deleted if project conditions permit.

*****

MASTER SPECIFICATIONS: DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

SECTION # TITLE ____________________________ 260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260513 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES 260519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260523 CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL CABLES 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS 260548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260573 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573.1 ELECTRICAL STUDIES 260913 ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260933 CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS 260936 MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS 260943 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 261116 SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS 261200 MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 261300 MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 262011 ISOLATED POWER CENTER 262200 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262300 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 262313 PARALLELING LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 262413 SWITCHBOARDS 262416 PANELBOARDS 262417 ROLL UP GENERATOR TERMINATION CABINET 262419 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS 262500 ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES 262600 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS 262713 ELECTRICITY METERING 262726 WIRING DEVICES 262813 FUSES 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262913 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 263213 ENGINE GENERATORS 263323 CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEMS 263353 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 263533 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION 263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES 264113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION 264313 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

** End of List **

PROJECT NAME FOR: CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB # ISSUED: 00/00/20XX

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 1

SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. It is intended this facility obtain a minimum LEED Silver rating. LEED criteria will be followed for the installation of building systems. This Contractor shall be responsible for the following items to ensure the Facility achieves LEED certification: 1. SS credit 8 – Light Pollution Reduction. 2. EA prerequisite 2 – Minimum Energy Performance. 3. EA credit 1 – Optimize Energy Performance. 4. MR credit 2 – Construction Waste Management. 5. IEQ credit 4.1 – Low Emitting Materials: Adhesives and Sealants 6. IEQ credit 4.2 – Low Emitting Materials: Paints and Coatings. 7. IEQ credit 6.1 – Controllability of Systems: Lighting.

B. Section Includes: 1. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. N/A.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 N/A.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.

B. Comply with NECA, NFPA, and OSHA requirements.

C. All work shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner in accordance with ANSI/NECA 1 – [2011].

D. All materials and equipment provided under this contract shall be new (except where otherwise noted) and shall be listed, labeled or certified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

E. All equipment of the same type and capacity shall be by the same manufacturer.


COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 2

F. Where any device or part of equipment is referred to in these specifications in the singular number (e.g., "the switch"), this reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation as shown on the drawings.

G. During construction the contractor shall at all times maintain electrical utilities of the building without interruption. Should it be necessary to interrupt any electrical service or utility, the contractor shall secure permission in writing from the Cleveland Clinic for such interruption at least seven days in advance. Any interruption shall be made with minimum amount of inconvenience to the Cleveland Clinic and any shut-down time shall have to be on a premium time basis and such time to be included in the contractor's bid. Arrange to provide and pay for temporary power source if required by project conditions.

H. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounted items.

I. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

J. Working clearance around equipment shall not be less than that specified in the N.E.C. for all voltages specified.

K. The locations of switches, receptacles, lights, motors, etc. outlets shown are approximate. The contractor shall use good judgment in placing the preceding items to eliminate all interference with ducts, piping, etc. The contractor shall check all door swings so that light switches are not located behind doors. Relocate switches as required, with approval from the Design Professional.

L. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity. Normal maintenance shall not require the removal of protective guards from adjacent equipment. Install equipment as close as practical to the locations shown on the Drawings.

1. Where the Cleveland Clinic determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not conveniently accessible for operations and maintenance, the equipment shall be removed and reinstalled as directed at no additional cost to the Cleveland Clinic.

2. “Conveniently Accessible’ is defined as being capable of being reached without use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling over or under obstacles such as motors, pumps, belt guards, transformers, racks, piping, ductwork, raceways or similar.

M. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

N. Owner furnished equipment: Equipment furnished by the Cleveland Clinic shall be received, stored, uncrated, protected, and installed by the Contractor with all appurtenances required to place the equipment in operation, ready for use. The Contractor shall be responsible for the equipment as if he had purchased the equipment himself.

END OF SECTION 260500


MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES 260513 - 1

SECTION 260513 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes medium voltage shielded power cables, sizes 1/0 through 2000 kcmil, related splices, terminations, and accessories for medium-voltage electrical distribution systems, 5 kV through 35 kV.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NETA ATS: National Electrical Testing Association Acceptance Testing Specification.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each size and type of cable indicated.

B. Samples: 16-inch (400-mm) lengths of each type of cable indicated.

C. Include data sheets for the following additional items: 1. Splices and terminations. 2. Separable connectors. 3. Cable accessories. 4. Pulling compounds. 5. Strand dynamometer.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Resumes of cable splicer(s).

B. Material Certificates: For each cable and accessory type, signed by manufacturers.

C. Cable pulling tension calculations and recorded values.

D. Source quality-control test reports.

E. Field quality-control test reports.



1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer: Engage a cable splicer, trained and certified by splice material manufacturer, to install, splice, and terminate medium-voltage cable. Cable splicer shall have a minimum of 2000 hours experience with terminating and installing medium voltage cable. Furnish satisfactory proof of such experience for each employee who splices or terminates the cables. Persons listed by the Contractor may be required to perform a dummy or practice splice and termination in the presence of the Cleveland Clinic representative or Engineer before being approved as a qualified installer of medium-voltage cables.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain cables and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with IEEE C2 and NFPA 70.

E. Comply with ASTM B3 and B8.

F. Comply with UL requirements.

G. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS [DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED]

A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by the Cleveland Clinic or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Cleveland Clinic no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Cleveland Clinic’s permission.

3. Cleveland Clinic Lock-out/Tag-out procedures shall be used with Contractor controlled locks and tags.

4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cables: a. General Cable Technologies Corporation. b. Okonite Company (The).



c. Southwire Company.

2. Cable Splicing and Terminating Products and Accessories: a. Raychem Corp.; Tyco International Ltd. b. Thomas & Betts Corporation/Elastimold. c. 3M; Electrical Products Division.

2.2 CABLES

A. Cable Type: Single conductor [Three conductor (AIA only)], UL type MV105 approved for N.E.C. applications.

B. Comply with UL 1072, AEIC CS 8, ICEA S-93-639/NEMA WC74, and ICEA S-97-682.

C. Conductor: Annealed, soft drawn Copper.

D. Conductor Stranding: Compact round, concentric lay, Class B.

E. Conductor Insulation: discharge free, no lead, Ethylene-Propylene Rubber (EPR), color contrasted with strand and insulation shields.

1. Voltage Rating: [5] [8] [15] [25] [35] kV. 2. Insulation Thickness: 133 percent insulation level.

F. Strand Shielding: Black extruded semi-conducting thermoset copolymer applied directly over the conductor.

G. Insulation Shield: Black extruded semiconducting thermoset copolymer applied directly over the insulation.

H. Shielding: [Copper tape, 5 mils thick, helically applied with 25% overlap, over semiconducting insulation shield,] or [six solid copper corrugated drain wires embedded longitudinally in composite layers of semi conducting thermoset copolymer and CPE].

I. [Cable Armor: Aluminum Interlocked Armor (AIA) applied over cable with overall PVC jacket] [ FOR CABLE TRAY/TUNNEL INSTALLATIONS ] 1. Listings: cables shall be UL listed “For CT Use”. 2. Jacket shall be color coded for voltage identification.

J. Cable Jacket: Chlorinated Polyethylene, CPE per ICEA and UL 1072.

K. Identification: The following minimum legend shall be printed on the jacket and repeated at not more than two foot intervals. 1. Manufacturer/plant no. 2. Conductor size (awg or kcmil). 3. CU. 4. EPR. 5. SHLD. 6. Voltage (kV). 7. Insulation level (133%). 8. Insulation thickness (mils), MV-105.



2.3 SPLICE KITS

A. Connectors and Splice Kits: Comply with IEEE 404; type as recommended by cable or splicing kit manufacturer for the application.

B. Splicing Products: As recommended, in writing, by splicing kit manufacturer for specific sizes, ratings, and configurations of cable conductors. Include all components required for complete splice, with detailed instructions. 1. Heat-shrink splicing kit of uniform, cross-section, polymeric construction with outer

heat-shrink jacket. 2. Pre-molded, cold-shrink-rubber, in-line splicing kit.

2.4 SOLID TERMINATIONS

A. Multi-conductor Cable Sheath Seals: Type recommended by seal manufacturer for type of cable and installation conditions, including orientation.

1. Compound-filled, cast-metal body, metal-clad cable terminator for metal-clad cable with external plastic jacket.

2. Cold-shrink sheath seal kit with preformed sleeve openings sized for cable and insulated conductors.

3. Heat-shrink sheath seal kit with phase- and ground-conductor re-jacketing tubes, cable-end sealing boot, and sealing plugs for unused ground-wire openings in boot.

B. Shielded-Cable Terminations: Comply with the following classes of IEEE 48. Insulation class is equivalent to that of cable. Include shield ground strap for shielded cable terminations.

1. Class 1 Terminations: Modular type, furnished as a kit, with stress-relief tube; multiple, molded-silicone rubber, insulator modules; shield ground strap; and compression-type connector.

2. Class 1 Terminations: Heat-shrink type with heat-shrink inner stress control and outer non-tracking tubes; multiple, molded, non-tracking skirt modules; and compression-type connector.

3. Class 2 Terminations, Indoors: Kit with stress-relief tube, non-tracking insulator tube, shield ground strap, and compression-type connector. Include silicone-rubber tape, cold-shrink-rubber sleeve, or heat-shrink plastic-sleeve moisture seal for end of insulation whether or not supplied with kits.

4. Medium voltage cable terminations and splices: long barrel, 2-hole hydraulic crimp lugs.

2.5 SEPARABLE INSULATED CONNECTORS

A. Description: Modular system, complying with IEEE 386, with disconnecting, single-pole, cable terminators and with matching, stationary, plug-in, dead-front terminals designed for cable voltage and for sealing against moisture.

B. Terminations at Distribution Points: Modular type, consisting of terminators installed on cables and modular, dead-front, terminal junctions for interconnecting cables.



C. Load-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type units with 200-A load make/break and continuous-current rating; coordinated with insulation diameter, conductor size, and material of cable being terminated. Include test point on terminator body that is capacitance coupled.

D. Dead-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type unit with 600-A continuous-current rating; designed for de-energized disconnecting and connecting; coordinated with insulation diameter, conductor size, and material of cable being terminated. Include test point on terminator body that is capacitance coupled.

E. Dead-Front Terminal Junctions: Modular bracket-mounted groups of dead-front stationary terminals that mate and match with above cable terminators. Two-, three-, or four-terminal units as indicated, with fully rated, insulated, watertight conductor connection between terminals and complete with grounding lug, manufacturer's standard accessory stands, stainless-steel mounting brackets, and attaching hardware.

1. Protective Cap: Insulating, electrostatic-shielding, water-sealing cap with drain wire. 2. Portable Feed-Through Accessory: Two-terminal, dead-front junction arranged for

removable mounting on accessory stand of stationary terminal junction. 3. Grounding Kit: Jumpered elbows, portable feed-through accessory units, protective caps,

test rods suitable for concurrently grounding three phases of feeders, and carrying case. 4. Standoff Insulator: Portable, single dead-front terminal for removable mounting on

accessory stand of stationary terminal junction. Insulators suitable for fully insulated isolation of energized cable-elbow terminator.

F. Tool Set: Shotgun hot stick with energized terminal indicator, and carrying case.

G. Ground Bails: Heavy duty grounding bails shall be provided to accommodate portable grounding equipment.

2.6 ARC-PROOFING MATERIALS

A. Tape for First Course on Metal Objects: Scotch 88, 10-mil- (250-micrometer-) thick, corrosion-protective, moisture-resistant, PVC pipe-wrapping tape.

B. Arc-Proofing Tape: Scotch 77, fireproof tape, flexible, conformable, and intumescent to 0.3 inch (8 mm) thick, compatible with cable jacket.

C. Self-fusing Silicon Tape: Scotch 70, high temperature, arc and track resistant tape composed of self-fusing, inorganic silicone rubber.

D. Glass-Cloth Tape: Scotch 69, Pressure-sensitive adhesive type, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect cables according to ICEA S-97-682 before shipping.

B. Test strand-filled cables for water-penetration resistance according to ICEA T-31-610, using a test pressure of 5 psig (35 kPa).



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Minimum cable size shall be #1/0 awg.

B. Install cables according to IEEE 576.

C. Pull Conductors: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values for single or multi-conductor cables. 1. A strand dynamometer/tension meter shall be used during the cable installation, readings

shall be recorded and a report submitted for each cable pull. 2. Where necessary, use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant that will not

deteriorate conductor or insulation. 3. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave cable grips that

will not damage cables and raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to cable.

4. Provide cable lengths with liberal allowances of slack for terminations. 5. Cable ends shall be moisture proofed at all times until terminations are installed.

D. Install exposed cables in tunnels in suitable cable trays, cables shall be secured with UL listed tie wrap materials.

E. Install underground cables in Sch. 40 PVC conduits in concrete encased ductbanks, comply with Section 260543.

F. In buildings and at road crossings, install cables in Rigid Galvanized Conduit (Heavy-wall).

G. Provide an insulated, stranded copper ground conductor in each conduit with phase conductors.

H. Medium voltage cables shall not be direct buried.

I. Install permanent markers at ends of cable runs, changes in direction, and splices.

J. Install "buried-cable" detectable, warning tape above ductbanks. Comply with Sections 260543 and 260553.

K. Outdoor splices and terminations shall be performed in dry conditions only.

L. In manholes, hand holes, pull boxes, junction boxes, and cable vaults, train cables around walls by the longest route from entry to exit and support cables with suitable UL listed non-metallic racks, located at intervals adequate to prevent sag.

M. Pull all cables in continuous lengths, splices shall be avoided unless necessitated by the length of the run. Locations of all splices shall be approved by the Facilities Engineering representative in writing.

N. Install separable insulated-connector components as follows:

1. Protective Cap: At each terminal junction, with one on each terminal to which no feeder is indicated to be connected.



2. Portable Feed-Through Accessory: Three. 3. Standoff Insulator: Three.

O. Arc Proofing: Unless otherwise indicated, arc proof medium-voltage cable at locations not protected by conduit, cable tray, or termination materials such as transformers, switchgear, and manholes. In addition to arc-proofing tape manufacturer's written instructions, apply arc proofing as follows:

1. Clean cable sheath. 2. Wrap metallic cable components with 10-mil (250-micrometer) pipe-wrapping tape. 3. Smooth surface contours with electrical insulation putty. 4. Apply arc-proofing tape in one half-lapped layer with coated side toward cable. 5. Band arc-proofing tape with 1-inch- (25-mm-) wide bands of half-lapped, adhesive,

glass-cloth tape 2 inches (50 mm) O.C.

P. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Sections and Cleveland Clinic Fire Protection Group. 1. All penetrations shall be under constant visual surveillance until firestopping is applied

unless an approved “ILSM” is in place for each location. 2. Products: Specified Technologies, Inc.

Q. Ground shields of shielded cable at terminations, splices, and separable insulated connectors. Ground metal bodies of terminators, splices, cable and separable insulated-connector fittings, and hardware.

R. Identify cables according to Division 26 Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify individual phases at termination points. 2. In manholes, cables shall be identified where cables enter and leave the manhole. Identify

circuit number and voltage. 3. Use embossed brass tags tie wrapped to cable.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. After installing medium-voltage cables and terminations but before electrical circuitry has been connected to busses or switchgear and energized, test for compliance with requirements, including but not limited to DC high potential testing according to IEEE 400 and insulation resistance testing.

B. Remove and replace non-compliant cable or terminations and retest as specified above.



LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 – 1

SECTION 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 27 Sections for cabling used for voice and data circuits.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by UL and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with ASTM.

C. Comply with UL 44, 83, and 486.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Comply with NFPA 99.

F. Comply with FM Global requirements.

G. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Include data sheets for the following additional items: 1. Splices and terminations. 2. Pulling compounds. 3. Cable accessories.



C. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by the Cleveland Clinic or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:


2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Cleveland Clinic’s permission.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. General Cable Corporation. 2. Okonite. 3. Southwire Company.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

1. Aluminum conductors shall not be used under any circumstances.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN, XHHW-2 and SO.

1. Voltage rating: 600 Volts for 480/277V and 208/120V.

D. Multi-conductor Cable type MC and AC: Use of MC or medical grade AC cable is not permitted under any circumstances unless specifically approved in writing by the Senior Director of Facilities.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Burndy, Thomas & Betts. 2. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 3. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 4. Ilsco.



B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. 1. Aboveground Circuits (No. 10 AWG and smaller):

a. Connectors: Solderless, screw-on, reusable pressure cable type, rated 600 V, 90˚ C, with integral insulation, approved for copper conductors.

b. The integral insulator shall have a skirt to completely cover the stripped wires. c. The number, size, and combination of conductors, as listed on the manufacturer's

packaging, shall be strictly followed. 2. Aboveground Circuits (No. 8 AWG and larger):

a. Cable termination lugs shall be made of high conductivity and corrosion-resistant material, electro-tin plated, listed for use with copper conductors only, rated for 600 V. Lugs shall be color coded by size.

b. Cable termination lugs shall be indent type, long barrel with chamfered entry, 2 – hole, compression type for 250 kcmil and above, 1 – hole for less than 250 kcmil.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Soft annealed Copper stranded, class B compressed.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 16 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 14 AWG and larger.

C. Minimum Wire Size: #12 awg for power and lighting circuits, #14 awg for control circuits. In the case of “homeruns” over 125 feet in length, no conductor smaller than a No. 10 wire shall be used. The tap conductor from the J-box in the ceiling to the receptacle may be No. 12. Each 120-volt phase conductor shall have a neutral conductor of the same size. The sizing of all wire except remote control wire shall be accomplished in the case of both feeder and branch circuits by conforming to the following provisions. Only lighting circuits may share grounding conductors. All lighting circuits with shared grounding conductors shall be #10 AWG minimum.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTI-CONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW, or type THHN/THWN up to and including 600 kcmil.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type XHHW for #2 awg and larger, or type THHN/THWN for all sizes up to and including 600 kcmil, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type XHHW for #2 awg and larger, or type THHN/THWN for all sizes up to and including 600 kcmil, single conductors in raceway.



D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and underground: Type XHHW for #2 awg and larger, or type THHN/THWN for all sizes up to and including 600 kcmil, single conductors in raceway.

E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions for Isolated Power Panel (IPP) Systems in Operating Rooms, ICU or CCU: Type XHHW or XHHW-2, low leakage, with a dielectric constant of 3.5 or less, single conductors in raceway.

H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

I. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, and strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

J. Recessed or Semi-recessed Lighting Fixture Whips: Type THHN-THWN (90 deg C), single conductors in FMC in lengths not to exceed six (6) feet.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Splices in feeder circuits shall be avoided unless necessitated by the length of the run. Locations of all splices shall be approved by the Office of Facilities.

B. Conductors may be run parallel from sizes 250 kcmil up to and including 600 kcmil provided all paralleled conductors are of the same size, manufacturer, length and type of insulation.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" for secondary service, feeders and branch circuits.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.



B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Sections and Cleveland Clinic Fire Protection Group. 1. All penetrations shall be under constant visual surveillance until firestopping is applied



A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements.

a. Generator, UPS, Isolated Power Panel, Fire Pump.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

D. Remove and replace non-compliant cables or wires and retest as specified above.


PROJECT NAME CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #

FOR: ISSUED: 00/00/20XX

CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 1

SECTION 260523 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. See Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards for Telecommunications Cabling requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Low-voltage control cabling. 2. Control-circuit conductors. 3. Identification products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment used for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.




A. Source quality-control reports.

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For wire and cable to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.




1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PATHWAYS

A. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 3 inches (75 mm) high, and 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) deep.

2.2 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE

A. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.

1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors. 2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.

B. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.

1. One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned-copper conductors. 2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. Plastic jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.

2.3 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, complying with UL 83.

B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, complying with UL 83.

C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or Type TF, complying with UL 83.




2.4 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for installation of conduits and wireways.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain un-terminated elements. Make

terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and panels. 2. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support open cables at intervals not exceeding 30

inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, and terminals.

3. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

4. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before de-reeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

C. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors:

1. Install wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

3.3 REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Remove abandoned conductors and cables.

3.4 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Minimum Conductor Sizes:

1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG. 2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG. 3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits, No. 12 AWG.




3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Sections and Cleveland Clinic Fire Protection Group. 1. All penetrations shall be under constant visual surveillance until firestopping is applied


3.6 GROUNDING

A. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Perform continuity tests and checks.

B. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.




GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards for Electronic equipment, voice and data systems grounding requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment.

B. Section includes grounding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. Underground distribution grounding. 2. Ground bonding common with lightning protection system.




A. Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Test wells. 2. Ground rods. 3. Ground rings. 4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. 5. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:




1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells, ground rings, and grounding connections for separately derived systems based on NFPA 70B.

a. Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not.

b. Include recommended testing intervals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.


E. Comply with FM Global requirements.

F. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V with green colored insulation, UL 44 or UL 83 listed, unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in

diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches (6.3 by 100 mm) in cross section, provided with standard NEMA bolt hole sizing and spacing for the type of connectors to be used. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in




switchboards, 600 V, Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. Provide clear Lexan cover over connections.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solder-less compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) in diameter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade. 2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank as part of

duct-bank installation. Bury detectable warning tape approximately 6 inches (150 mm) above grounding conductors. Warning tape shall comply with Section 260553.

C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.




1. Install bus on insulated spacers 2 inches (50 mm) minimum from wall, 12 inches (300 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down to specified height above floor; connect to horizontal bus.

E. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Exothermic welded connectors except at test wells and as

otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Exothermic welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm) below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, non-shrink grout.

C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring around the pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2/0 for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 12 inches (300 mm) from the foundation.

3.3 UTILITY GROUNDING

A. Provide grounding and bonding at Utility Company’s metering equipment in accordance with Utility Company’s requirements.

3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.




1. Conduit shall not be used as the ground conductor. 2. In Healthcare facilities, metallic conduit may be used as the additional means of

grounding where the raceway system qualifies as a grounding conductor in accordance with NEC 250.118.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored cable runs. 8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from

grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway.

9. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power-distribution units.

10. X-Ray/Imaging Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in circuits supplying x-ray/imaging equipment.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Anti-frost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

E. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

F. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

G. Special Grounding: For patient care area electrical power system grounding, conform to NFPA 99 and N.E.C.

H. Panelboard Bonding in Patient Care Areas: The equipment grounding terminal buses of the normal and essential branch circuit panel boards serving the same individual patient vicinity




shall be bonded together with an insulated continuous copper conductor not less than No. 10 AWG installed in rigid metal conduit.

I. Cable trays shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with N.E.C. requirements and Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards.

J. Raised floors: Provide bonding of all raised floor components.

K. Signal, Data, and Communication Equipment: Comply with requirements in Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards.

L. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.

M. Outdoor metallic fences around electrical equipment shall be grounded.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

1. Where ground conductors are subject to physical damage, install in raceway.

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 12 inches (100 mm) below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.

D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through bottom of handhole. Handholes are specified in Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and shall be at least 12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover.

1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor.

E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.




1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

F. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

G. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

H. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m) apart.

I. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure ground rod and to each steel column, extending around the perimeter of building.

1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 4/0 AWG for ground ring and for taps to building steel.

2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches (600 mm) from building's foundation.

J. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a minimum of 20 feet (6 m) of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG.

1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet (6 m) long, coil excess conductor within base of foundation.

2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete.

3.6 LABELING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" Article for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green.





A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.


1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and less: 10 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. 4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s). 5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. 6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.

F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.




HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.


A. Product Data: For the following:




1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 4. Equipment supports.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. All products shall be UL labeled for their intended use.


D. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation.




d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c., in at least 1 surface. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items.

3. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel.

4. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.

C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.




3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Sections for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps or single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.




D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

E. Fire pump feeders that are run exposed shall have conduit supported every five feet from a two hour rated structure with UL listed components.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate[ by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements].

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Sections for site-fabricated metal supports.




B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit and four inches high, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. Edges shall be chamfered.

B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa) 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Concrete Sections.

C. Install dowel rods to connect concrete bases to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of base.

D. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 Painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A-780.


PROJECT NAME

CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #


RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards for raceways and cable trays for Telecommunications cabling.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

5. Surface raceways.

6. Poke Thru Assemblies.

7. Trench Duct.

8. Boxes, floor boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for

exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.

2. Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards for pathways for Electronic Safety, Communications and

Security Systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover

enclosures, and cabinets.

B. LEED Submittals:

PROJECT NAME




1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers,

documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For solvent cements and adhesive primers,

documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements

of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of

Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental

Chambers."

C. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and

attachment details.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT

CONDITIONS]

A. [Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their

mounting provisions, include those for internal components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual

test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and

locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is

based and their installation requirements.

4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the

certification is based and their installation requirements.]


A. All products shall be UL labeled for their intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.




A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.

2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

B. Source quality-control reports.

PROJECT NAME




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products of all manufacturers are

acceptable provided they have a smooth interior, are UL listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70 for the intended location and application and are electro-galvanized steel (EMT) or

hot dipped galvanized steel inside and out (GRC). Conduit and fittings shall be obtained from

the same manufacturer:

B. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

C. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.

D. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

E. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

F. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

H. Multi-conductor Cable type MC and AC: Use of MC or medical grade AC cable is not

permitted under any circumstances unless specifically approved in writing by the Senior Director of Facilities. Deleted 8 August 2015.

I. Electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT or “blue tube’) and liquid-tight flexible nonmetallic conduit

(LFNC) are not acceptable for use on any Project.

J. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and

NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel.

b. Type: Set Screw – indoors; compression - outdoors.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated

for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding

jumper.

K. Joint Compound for IMC, ARC, or GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities

having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and

protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

PROJECT NAME




2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products of all manufacturers are

acceptable provided they are sunlight resistant and UL listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70

and marked for intended location and application. Conduit and fittings shall be obtained from

the same manufacturer.

B. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

D. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less,

respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

E. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements

of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile

Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

2. Hoffman; a Pentair company.

3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise

indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,

hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for

complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS


following:


2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

PROJECT NAME




B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be UL listed and

labeled as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location and application.

C. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on

cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners.

D. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down

straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete

system.

E. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less,

respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements

of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile

Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways shall be UL listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70

and marked for intended location and application.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5.

Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect. Provide dividers as

required to separate systems of different voltages.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Panduit Corp.

b. Wiremold / Legrand.

C. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and

manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's

standard colors. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing

characteristics. Provide dividers as required to separate systems of different voltages.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division.

b. Panduit Corp.

c. Wiremold / Legrand.

2.6 MEDICAL GRADE TRENCH DUCT

A. Trench-type medical grade, under floor raceways used for routing of power, data, and signal

cables in CT, X – Ray, MRI rooms and similar rooms.

PROJECT NAME




B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Square D; Schneider Electric.

2. Thomas & Betts Corporation; Steel City Division.

3. Raceway Solutions, Inc.

4. Walker Systems, Inc.; a Wiremold company.

C. Trench: Include the following features:

1. UL listed.

2. Galvanized steel, 14 gauge factory welded.

3. Non-Ferrous Metal Raceways for use in MRI scan rooms or similar: Aluminum.

4. Slab Depth Adjustment: Minimum of minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) to plus 5/8 inch (16 mm)

before and during concrete placement.

5. Cover Supports: Height adjustable, with leveling screws to rigidly support cover

assembly.

6. Screed Strip: Extruded aluminum along both edges at proper elevation without requiring

shim material.

7. Trim Strip: Select to accommodate floor finish material.

8. Partitions: Arranged to separate channels and isolate wiring of different systems.

9. Grommeted openings in service raceways.

10. Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant finish, applied after fabrication.

D. Cover Plates: Removable, steel plates, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, with full gasket attached to side

units. Fabricate covers with appropriate depth recess to receive indicated floor finish.

E. Dimensions: coordinate with Medical Equipment Supplier’s approved site installation drawings.

2.7 POKE THRU ASSEMBLIES


following:

1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.

2. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories.

3. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

4. Wiremold Company (The).

B. Poke-Thru Assemblies:

1. Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with multi-

channeled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service

outlet assembly.

2. Poke-thru box fittings shall maintain a minimum two-hour fire rating.

3. Comply with UL 514 scrub water exclusion requirements.

4. Service Outlet Assembly: Flush type with services indicated.

5. Selected to fit nominal 4-inch (100-mm) cored holes in floor and matched to floor

thickness.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456817877&mf=04&src=wd



PROJECT NAME




2.8 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


following:

1. Adalet.

2. Cooper Crouse-Hinds.

3. EGS/Appleton Electric.

4. FSR Inc.


6. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division.

7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.

8. RACO; a Hubbell Company.

9. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.

10. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

11. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets

installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with

gasketed cover.

E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

F. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Sheet metal, 11 gauge.

2. Type: Flush. Cover with 0.25”square aluminum flange rated for carpet/tile installations.

Provide pour pan accessory for on grade installations.

3. Shape: Rectangular.

4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled UL 514A.

5. Manufacturers: FSR FL-500P.

G. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, rectangular.

1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

H. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb

(23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg)

shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

I. Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes 100 cu. in. and smaller: NEMA OS 1.

J. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773,

galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

PROJECT NAME




K. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as

recessed box.

L. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge

cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.

3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

M. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable

front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Key latch to match panelboards.

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC, IMC, or RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: IMC, EMT, or RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC.

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried or concrete encased as

indicated.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.

2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.

3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet

locations.

6. Feeders over 600 V: GRC.

7. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC or IMC.

8. Tunnels: GRC.

9. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless

steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size.

PROJECT NAME




D. Mixing different types of conduits indiscriminately in the same system is prohibited.

E. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. EMT: Use setscrew (indoors) or compression (outdoors), steel fittings. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.10.

3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

F. MRI scan rooms: non-ferrous or non-magnetic raceway, boxes, fittings and hardware. Where

aluminum raceways (ARC) are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in

nonmetallic sleeve.

G. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

H. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

I. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49 deg C).

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements

on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.

Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and

number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-

water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Installation of all new conduits must be minimum 12 inches from ceiling grid except where

approved by Cleveland Clinic.

D. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

E. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical

Systems" for hangers and supports.

F. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

G. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for

control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300

mm) of changes in direction.

H. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

I. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached.

PROJECT NAME




J. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab

support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum10-foot (3-m) intervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion

fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover in all

directions.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location. Fittings shall be concrete tight.

K. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT for raceways.

2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

L. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply

listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound

manufacturer's written instructions.

M. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings

to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

N. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes

or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm) trade size and insulated

throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with

locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

O. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install

locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

P. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in

the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

Q. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use

roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not

less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end

of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in

use.

S. Surface Raceways:

1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) radius control at bend points.

2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight raceway

section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape

and glue are not acceptable support methods.

PROJECT NAME




3. Non-metallic surface raceways shall not be installed in patient care areas.

T. Trench Duct:

1. Trench duct shall be Aluminum in MRI rooms, galvanized steel in CT and X- Ray rooms.

2. Coordinate with Medical Equipment Supplier’s approved site installation drawings.

3. Obtain approval of medical equipment supplier’s field representative prior to purchase

and installation of all materials.

4. Provide necessary accessories to accommodate medical equipment cabling.

U. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with

listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a

blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway

sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

V. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or

boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all

raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.

3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

W. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

X. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature

change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25

feet (7.6 m). Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located

where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C) and that has

straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet (30 m).

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each

of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C)

temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature

change.

c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

(70 deg C) temperature change.

d. Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot

of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C)

of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and

contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F

(0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for

metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure

expansion joints.

PROJECT NAME




5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected

according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time

of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

Y. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches

(1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires, equipment subject to

vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

3. Use a maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of FMC for recessed and semi-recessed

luminaires.

4. Final connections to motors or equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or

movement shall use FMC not exceeding four feet in length.

5. Short lengths of FMC shall be used for final primary and secondary connections to Low

Voltage transformers (<600V).

Z. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not

individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured

to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

AA. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,

and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a

raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

BB. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide minimum 6-inch separation in non-fire-

rated walls. Provide minimum 24-inch horizontal separation in acoustic-rated walls.

CC. Boxes shall be secured between two studs. Boxes connected to one stud are not permitted.

DD. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

EE. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing

members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

FF. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by

conduits.

GG. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

HH. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply

with requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways

and Cabling."

PROJECT NAME




3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore

original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Sections and Cleveland

Clinic Fire Protection Group.

1. All penetrations shall be under constant visual surveillance until firestopping is applied

unless an approved “ILSM” is in place for each location.

2. Products: Specified Technologies, Inc.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Junction boxes of different systems shall be identified by colors indicated below. Box and cover

shall be colored prior to attaching identification labels.

B. Provide permanent nameplates for all pull and junction boxes identifying circuits, voltage, and

source.

C. Raceways and couplers, fittings, J-boxes, enclosures of different systems shall be identified by

color below, at least every ten feet. Do not color complete conduit or raceway systems.

D. Colors: System:

1. Red: Fire Alarm. (color complete raceway)

2. Yellow: Critical Branch.

3. Purple: Life Safety.

4. Brown: Emergency Standby

5. Orange: Equipment Emergency Branch.

6. Green: Normal power.

7. Blue: Communications.

8. Black: Low Voltage.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended

by manufacturer.




UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543 - 1

SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards for Telecommunications pathway requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Conduit, ducts, and duct accessories for direct-buried and concrete-encased duct banks, and in single duct runs.

2. Handholes and boxes. 3. Manholes.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.



1. Duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components. 2. Ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends, fittings, and

solvent cement. 3. Accessories for manholes, handholes, boxes, and other utility structures. 4. Warning tape.

B. Shop Drawings for Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures: Shop drawings shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories, including the following:

1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 2. Reinforcement details. 3. Frame and cover design and manhole frame support rings. 4. Ladder details. 5. Grounding details. 6. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons, and sumps. 7. Joint details.




C. Shop Drawings for Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete: Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details, including the following:

1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 2. Cover design. 3. Grounding details. 4. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons.


A. Duct-Bank Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and underground structures.

1. Include plans and sections, drawn to scale, and show bends and locations of expansion fittings.

B. Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete manholes and handholes, as required by ASTM C 858.

C. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.





B. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards, including ITD Standards for Low Voltage systems pathways.

C. Comply with ANSI C2.


1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent bending, warping, and deforming.

B. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Cleveland Clinic or others unless permitted under the following conditions and




then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Cleveland Clinic no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Cleveland Clinic’s written permission.



1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field.

B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by the Cleveland Clinic.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.

2.2 NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products of all manufacturers are acceptable provided they are sunlight resistant and UL listed for the intended installation. Conduit and fittings shall be provided from the same manufacturer whenever possible.

B. Duct Accessories:

1. Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and sizes of ducts with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacings indicated while supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling.

2. Warning Tape: Underground-line warning tape specified in Division 26 Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."




2.3 HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.

1. Color: Gray. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have [open] or [closed]

bottom, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, as indicated for each service. 6. Direct-Buried Wiring Entrance Provisions: Knockouts equipped with insulated bushings

or end-bell fittings, selected to suit box material, sized for wiring indicated, and arranged for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

7. Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

8. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long (300 mm wide by 600 mm long) and larger shall have factory-installed inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons.

B. Polymer Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Highline Products c. Quazite, Hubbell Power Systems.

2.4 PRECAST MANHOLES


1. Lindsey Concrete Products. 2. Mack Industries. 3. Norwalk Concrete Industries. 4. Oldcastle Precast, Inc.

B. Comply with ASTM C 858, with structural design loading as specified in Part 3 "Underground Enclosure Application" Article and with interlocking mating sections, complete with accessories, hardware, and features.

1. Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of approaching ducts and duct banks plus an additional 12 inches (300 mm) vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations.

a. Windows shall be located no less than 6 inches (150 mm) from interior surfaces of walls, floors, or roofs of manholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking of cables on walls.




b. Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded wire fabric reinforcement for field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks.

c. Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional No. 4 steel reinforcing bars in concrete around each opening.

C. Concrete Knockout Panels: 1-1/2 to 2 inches (38 to 50 mm) thick, for future conduit entrance and sleeve for ground rod.

D. Joint Sealant: Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with the ground-water level at grade.

2.5 UTILITY STRUCTURE ACCESSORIES


1. Bilco Company (The). 2. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. 3. McKinley Iron Works, Inc. 4. Neenah Foundry Company. 5. Pennsylvania Insert Corporation. 6. Underground Devices, Inc.

B. Manhole Frames, Covers, and Chimney Components: Comply with structural design loading specified for manhole.

1. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof, gray cast iron complying with ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30B with milled cover-to-frame bearing surfaces; diameter, 29 inches (737 mm).

a. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. b. Special Covers: Recess in face of cover designed to accept finish material in

paved areas. c. Covers shall have locking provisions.

2. Cover Legend: Cast in. Selected to suit system.

a. Legend: "ELECTRIC-LV" for duct systems with power wires and cables for systems operating at 600 V and less.

b. Legend: "ELECTRIC-HV" for duct systems with medium-voltage cables. c. Legend: "SIGNAL" for communications, data, and telephone duct systems.

3. Manhole Chimney Components: Precast concrete rings with dimensions matched to those of roof opening.

a. Mortar for Chimney Ring and Frame and Cover Joints: Comply with ASTM C 270, Type M, except for quantities less than 2.0 cu. ft. (60 L) where packaged mix complying with ASTM C 387, Type M, may be used.

C. Manhole Sump Frame and Grate: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30B, gray cast iron.




D. Pulling Eyes in Concrete Walls: Eyebolt with reinforcing-bar fastening insert, 2-inch- (50-mm-) diameter eye, and 1-by-4-inch (25-by-100-mm) bolt.

1. Working Load Embedded in 6-Inch (150-mm), 4000-psi (27.6-MPa) Concrete: 13,000-lbf (58-kN) minimum tension.

E. Pulling-In and Lifting Irons in Concrete Floors: 7/8-inch- (22-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized, bent steel rod; stress relieved after forming; and fastened to reinforcing rod. Exposed triangular opening.

1. Ultimate Yield Strength: 40,000-lbf (180-kN) shear and 60,000-lbf (270-kN) tension.

F. Bolting Inserts for Concrete Utility Structure Cable Racks and Other Attachments: Flared, threaded inserts of noncorrosive, chemical-resistant, nonconductive thermoplastic material; 1/2-inch (13-mm) ID by 2-3/4 inches (69 mm) deep, flared to 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) minimum at base.

1. Tested Ultimate Pullout Strength: 12,000 lbf (53 kN) minimum.

G. Cable Rack Assembly: Nonmetallic. Components fabricated from nonconductive, fiberglass-reinforced polymer.

1. Stanchions: Nominal 36 inches (900 mm) high by 4 inches (100 mm) wide, with minimum of 9 holes for arm attachment.

2. Arms: Arranged for secure, drop-in attachment in horizontal position at any location on cable stanchions, and capable of being locked in position. Arms shall be available in lengths ranging from 3 inches (75 mm) with 450-lb (204-kg) minimum capacity to 20 inches (508 mm) with 250-lb (114-kg) minimum capacity. Top of arm shall be nominally 4 inches (100 mm) wide, and arm shall have slots along full length for cable ties.

H. Duct-Sealing Compound: Non-hardening, safe for contact with human skin, not deleterious to cable insulation, and workable at temperatures as low as 35 deg F (2 deg C). Capable of withstanding temperature of 300 deg F (150 deg C) without slump and adhering to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and common metals.

I. Fixed Manhole Ladders: Arranged for attachment to roof or wall and floor of manhole. Ladder and mounting brackets and braces shall be fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel.

J. Cover Hooks: Heavy duty, designed for lifts 60 lbf (270 N). Two required.


A. Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C 1037.

B. Non-concrete Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of manholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.




1. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or the manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

2. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION

A. Minimum conduit/duct size for underground installations shall be one inch.

B. Ducts for Electrical Cables over 600 V: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40 PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40 PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40 PVC, in direct-buried duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40 PVC, in direct-buried duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Underground Ducts for Telephone, Communications, or Data Utility Service Cables: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40 PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Underground Ducts Crossing Paved Paths, Walks, Driveways and Roadways: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40 PVC, encased in reinforced concrete.

H. A nylon pull cord shall be installed and tied off in each duct, including spares. The nylon pull cord shall have a minimum tensile strength of 200 pounds.

3.2 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION

A. Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less, Including Telephone, Communications, and Data Wiring:

1. Units in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths: Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating.

2. Units in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Non-deliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Precast concrete, AASHTO HB 17, H-20; Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating.

3. Units in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Non-deliberate Loading by Vehicles: Precast concrete, AASHTO HB 17, H-10, Polymer concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.

B. Manholes: Precast concrete.




1. Units Located in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-20 structural load rating according to AASHTO HB 17.

2. Units Not Located in Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-10 load rating according to AASHTO HB 17.

3.3 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with earth moving sections in Division 31 Specifications, but do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.

B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.

C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary top-soiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. Comply with plantings Sections in Division 32 Specifications.

D. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground ducts and utility structures according to appropriate Division 01 Sections.

3.4 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes to drain in both directions. 1. Water intrusion into buildings through ducts is not acceptable. 2. This Contractor shall be fully responsible for corrective action necessary to insure water

infiltration is eliminated.

B. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of [SELECT] [48 inches (1220 mm)] [12.5 feet (4 m)] [25 feet (7.5 m)], both horizontally and vertically, at other locations, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane.

D. Duct Entrances to Manholes and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced approximately 10 inches (250 mm) O.C. for 5-inch (125-mm) ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.

1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet (3 m) from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line.

2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole.

3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.




E. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at least 10 feet (3 m) outside the building wall without reducing duct line slope away from the building, and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition. Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

F. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig (1.03-MPa) hydrostatic pressure.

G. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators.

1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than 5 spacers per 20 feet (6 m) of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches (150 mm) between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

2. Concrete: 3000 psi (20 kPa), 28-day strength, complying with Division 03 Concrete Sections.

3. Concreting Sequence: Place each run of concrete envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation.

a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of ducts as their temperature changes during and after the concrete placement. Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage.

b. If more than one concrete placement is necessary, terminate each in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch (19-mm) reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches (450 mm) into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope.

4. Placing Concrete: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down sides of bank assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application. Red dye shall be added to the top of the concrete during the placement.

5. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth, road crossings and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

6. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be placed without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms.

7. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches (75 mm) between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 2 inches (50 mm) between ducts for like services, and 12 inches (300 mm) between power and signal ducts.

8. Depth: Depth: Install top of duct bank at 36 inches (900 mm) below finished grade, unless otherwise indicated.

9. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured PVC elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated for circuit conductors




smaller than No. 1/0 AWG and under 600 volts. Extend concrete encasement throughout the length of the elbow.

10. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor for all circuit conductors over 600 volts and circuits under 600 volts with conductor size No. 1/0 AWG or larger.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete.

b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

11. Warning Tape: Comply with Section 260553. Bury detectable warning tape approximately 18 inches (450 mm) above all concrete-encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches (75 mm) of the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch (300-mm) increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches (450 mm). Space additional tapes 12 inches (300 mm) apart, horizontally.

H. Direct-Buried Duct Banks:

1. Support ducts on duct separators coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor temperature.

2. Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than 5 spacers per 20 feet (6 m) of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent displacement during backfill and yet permit linear duct movement due to expansion and contraction as temperature changes. Stagger spacers approximately 6 inches (150 mm) between tiers.

3. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank. Prepare trench bottoms as specified in earth moving sections in Division 31 Specifications for pipes less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter.

4. Install backfill as specified in earth moving sections in Division 31 Specifications. 5. After installing first tier of ducts, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work

toward end of duct run, leaving ducts at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Repeat procedure after placing each tier. After placing last tier, hand-place backfill to 4 inches (100 mm) over ducts and hand tamp. Firmly tamp backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct connections at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in earth moving sections in Division 31 Specifications.

6. Install ducts with a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) between ducts for like services and 12 inches (300 mm) between power and signal ducts.

7. Depth: Install top of duct bank at 36 inches (900 mm) below finished grade, unless otherwise indicated.

8. Set elevation of bottom of duct bank below the frost line. 9. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building

entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow.

10. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor.




a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete.

b. For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

11. Warning Tapes: Comply with Section 260553. Bury detectable warning tape approximately 18 inches (450 mm) above all duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches (75 mm) of the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch (300-mm) increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches (450 mm). Space additional tapes 12 inches (300 mm) apart, horizontally.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND BOXES

A. Precast Concrete Handhole and Manhole Installation:

1. Comply with ASTM C 891, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install unit level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting

ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel,

graded from 1-inch (25-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

B. Elevations:

1. Manhole Roof: Install with rooftop at least 18 inches (450 mm) below finished grade. 2. Manhole Frame: In paved areas and traffic-ways, set frames flush with finished grade.

Set other manhole frames 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. 3. Install handholes with bottom below the frost line, <Insert depth of frost line below

grade at Project site> below grade. 4. Handhole Covers: In paved areas and traffic-ways, set surface flush with finished grade.

Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. 5. Where indicated, cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure.

C. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of manholes where indicated. Coordinate with drainage provisions indicated.

D. Manhole Access: Circular opening in manhole roof; sized to match cover size.

1. Manholes with Fixed Ladders: Offset access opening from manhole centerlines to align with ladder.

2. Install chimney, constructed of precast concrete collars and rings to support frame and cover and to connect cover with manhole roof opening. Provide moisture-tight masonry joints and waterproof grouting for cast-iron frame to chimney.

E. Waterproofing: Apply waterproofing to exterior surfaces of manholes and handholes after concrete has cured at least three days. Waterproofing materials and installation are specified in Division 07. After ducts have been connected and grouted, and before backfilling, waterproof joints and connections and touch up abrasions and scars. Waterproof exterior of manhole




chimneys after mortar has cured at least three days. Joint between manhole and chimney shall be sealed with a flexible epoxy or EPDM rubber seal.

F. Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, and cable arms as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated.

G. Fixed Manhole Ladders: Arrange to provide for safe entry with maximum clearance from cables and other items in manholes.

H. Field-Installed Bolting Anchors in Manholes and Concrete Handholes: Do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 inches (98 mm) for manholes and 2 inches (50 mm) for handholes, for anchor bolts installed in the field. Use a minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion.

I. Warning Sign: Install "Confined Space Hazard" warning sign on the inside surface of each manhole cover.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box extension if required to match depths of ducts, and seal joint between box and extension as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas and traffic-ways, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.

D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line, <Insert depth of frost line below grade at Project site> below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure.

F. Field-cut openings for ducts and conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

G. For enclosures installed in asphalt paving and concrete and subject to occasional, non-deliberate, heavy-vehicle loading, form and pour a concrete ring encircling, and in contact with, enclosure and with top surface screeded to top of box cover frame. Bottom of ring shall rest on compacted earth.

1. Concrete: 3000 psi (20 kPa), 28-day strength, complying with Division 03 Concrete Sections with a troweled finish.

2. Dimensions: 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep (250 mm wide by 300 mm deep).




3.7 GROUNDING

A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures.

2. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for out-of-round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.

3. Test manhole and handhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts.

B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.


PROJECT NAME



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

260544 - 1

SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND

CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.

2. Sleeve-seal systems.

3. Sleeve-seal fittings.

4. Grout.

5. Silicone sealants.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Comply with Division 07 Sections for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-

rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating

items.



B. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design and Fire Protection Standards.

C. Comply with FM Global requirements.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed statement

of VOC content.

PROJECT NAME




260544 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves: [Select 1. or 2.]

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated,

plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure

pipe, with plain ends and integral water-stop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel

sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal

joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel.

2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and

with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3

mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one

or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5

mm).

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between

sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:

a. Pipeline Seal & Insulator, Inc. (Link Seal).

2. Sealing Elements: [EPDM] [Nitrile] rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of

pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: [Carbon steel] [Composite] [Stainless steel].

4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: [Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating,]

[Stainless steel] of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, water-stop assembly made for embedding in

concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber water-stop collar with center opening to

match piping OD.

PROJECT NAME




260544 - 3

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:

a. Pipeline Seal & Insulator, Inc. (Link Seal).

2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Non-shrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-

rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of

grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal

surfaces that are not fire rated.

2. Sealant shall have VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS


B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit

Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in

Division 07 Sections for joint sealants

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly

between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth;

protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

PROJECT NAME




260544 - 4

3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and

raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed [or unless seismic criteria require

different clearance].

4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are

used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush

with both surfaces of walls. De-burr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 3 inches (75 mm)

above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved

opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board

assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible

boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using cast-iron pipe sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space

between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves

to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for

installing sleeve-seal system.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway

entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or

cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical

sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts

against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and

walls. Position water-stop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.




VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 1

SECTION 260548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT CONDITIONS, OTHERWISE DELETE THIS SECTION]

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Isolation pads. 2. Spring isolators. 3. Restrained spring isolators. 4. Channel support systems. 5. Restraint cables. 6. Hanger rod stiffeners. 7. Anchorage bushings and washers.


1. Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used electrical supports and installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.


A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: [A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F]. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: [I] [II] [III].

a. Component Importance Factor: [1.0] [1.5]. b. Component Response Modification Factor: [1.5] [2.5] [3.5] [5.0]. c. Component Amplification Factor: [1.0] [2.5].




3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second) : <Insert percent>.

4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: <Insert percent>.



1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by [an evaluation service member of ICC-ES] [OSHPD] [an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction].

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

3. Restrained-Isolation Devices: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For [vibration isolation and ]seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic restraints.

a. Coordinate design calculations with wind-load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 26 Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

2. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and anchorage devices.

3. Field-fabricated supports. 4. Seismic-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacing. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events.[ Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.]

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By [an evaluation service member of ICC-ES] [OSHPD] [an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction], showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).





A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.

B. Qualification Data: For [professional engineer] [and] [testing agency].

C. Welding certificates.

D. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.


E. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Isolation Technology, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control. 3. Mason Industries. 4. Vibration Isolation.

B. Pads: Arrange in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant [neoprene] [rubber].




C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-)

thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa).

6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.

D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Seismic or limit-stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Hilti Inc. 3. Mason Industries. 4. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 5. Vibration Isolation.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application requirements shall be as defined in reports by [an evaluation service member of ICC-ES] [OSHPD] [an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction].

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building




structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

D. Restraint Cables: [ASTM A 603 galvanized] [ASTM A 492 stainless]-steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: [Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections] [Reinforcing steel angle clamped] to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods.

F. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs.

G. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices.

H. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

I. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

J. Adhesive Anchor: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

2.3 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanized metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate

capacity range.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive [vibration isolation and] seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by [an evaluation service member of ICC-ES] [OSHPD] [an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction].

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:

1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment. 2. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance

between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). 3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by [an evaluation service

member of ICC-ES] [OSHPD] [an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction] providing required submittals for component.

B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

D. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are




encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid pre-stressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.




1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with Cleveland Clinic, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless post-connection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. Verify snubber minimum clearances. 9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory

results are achieved.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.





3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.




IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.



D. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

E. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.


G. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at more than 600 V:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch-(75-mm-)

high letters.

C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less and conduits larger than two inches:

1. Black letters on a white field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

E. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less and conduits larger than two inches: Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less and conduits two inches and less:

1. Factory applied color finish, comply with Section 260533.

2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker

recommended by printer manufacturer.

2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tapes not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.




B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

D. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker

recommended by printer manufacturer.

2.4 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

2.5 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when

exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. 4. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid

aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.

5. Overall Thickness: 5 mils (0.125 mm). 6. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mils (0.00889 mm). 7. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft. (13.7 kg/100 sq. m). 8. 3-Inch (75-mm) Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf (311.3 N), and 4600 psi

(31.7 MPa).

B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE. 3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.

2.6 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:




1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).

C. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, non-fading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).

D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 48 INCHES (1220 MM)."

3. Flash Protection Field Marking: All panelboards, switchgear, switchboards, panelboards motor control centers, motor control panels and electrical control panels shall be provided with a black on yellow warning sign per ANSI Z535.4 and ISO 3864. The sign shall read: “DANGER! ARC FLASH and SHOCK HAZARD. FOLLOW ALL REQUIREMENTS IN NFPA70E FOR SAFE WORK PRACTICES and PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT.” The sign shall be prominently mounted on the front of the equipment and readily visible. If the equipment has multiple removable front covers, a sign shall be mounted on each cover. For flush mounted panelboards in finished spaces, the sign shall be mounted on the inside of the door or inside cover. Manufacturers’ standard labels are not acceptable.

2.7 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

2.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES

A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Nameplate: Minimum letter height shall be ½ inch (13 mm). Refer to Drawings for Nameplate Detail.




B. Fasteners for nameplates: stainless steel screws that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure, adhesive labels shall not be used.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

D. Attach signs and plastic labels with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

E. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Larger than Two Inches: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle conduit. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 30-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and within six inches of pull or junction boxes.

F. System Identification Labels for Raceways carrying circuits above 600V: Locate labels at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 30-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and within six inches of pull or junction boxes.

G. System Identification Labels for Raceways carrying circuits 600V and less: Locate labels at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 30-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and within six inches of pull or junction boxes.

H. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 18 inches overall. Comply with Section 260543.

I. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.




3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend, system voltage, and panel/circuit number. System legends shall comply with Section 260533 – 3.5.D. 1. Normal power. 2. Critical branch power. 3. Life safety power. 4. Equipment branch power. 5. UPS.

B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: .For conductors in vaults pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow.

d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

e. For new work in existing buildings, the existing identification method shall be used for new conductors provided it meets all requirements of this Section and the NEC.

C. Install instructional sign including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

D. Emergency Sources: A sign shall be placed at the service entrance equipment indicating the type and location of on-site emergency power sources per NEC Art. 700.

E. Elevator Disconnects: Provide “Fed From” signs indicating the location of the supply side OCPD for each elevator power source.

F. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.




G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

H. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in

raceway.

I. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

J. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Baked-enamel warning signs or Metal-backed, butyrate warning signs.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. c. Other equipment as indicated on the Drawings.

K. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

L. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer and load shedding.

M. Equipment Identification Nameplates: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation nameplate that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply nameplates to Switchgears, Switchboards, Distribution Panels, Panelboards, Motor Control Centers, Transformers, Individual Starters, Contactors, Disconnect Switches, Transfer Switches, Control Panels and Similar Equipment. Systems include power, lighting, and control systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Colors for equipment nameplates: a. NORMAL power system: black letters on white background. b. CRITICAL EMERGENCY power system: white letters on red background.




c. LIFE SAFETY power system: white letters on red background. d. EQUIPMENT EMERGENCY power system: white letters on red background. e. STANDBY EMERGENCY power system: (dead bus under normal conditions)

black letters on yellow background.

2. Labeling Instructions: a. Identify the piece of equipment, the source, voltage characteristics, and the load

served b. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine nameplate. Unless

otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

c. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine nameplate. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with one-inch- (26-mm-) high letters on 3-inch- (76-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 4 inches (100 mm) high.

d. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of nameplates and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

e. Fasten nameplates with appropriate stainless steel screws that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. Stick-on or adhesives are not acceptable unless the NEMA enclosure rating is compromised, then only epoxy adhesive shall be used to attach nameplates.




OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 1

SECTION 260573 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current studies, overcurrent protective device coordination studies, and arc-flash analysis. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective device coordination study.

1. Use of Series rated equipment is strictly prohibited


A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval process for system protective devices has been completed.

1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 2. Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports. 3. Coordination-Study Report. 4. System One Line Diagram.


A. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.

B. Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.

B. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.




1. Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be responsible for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of engineer.

C. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.

D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. EDSA Micro Corporation. 2. ESA Inc. 3. EZ Power. 4. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with IEEE 399.

B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.

1. Optional Features:

a. Arcing faults. b. Simultaneous faults. c. Explicit negative sequence. d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.




1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study.

3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 26 Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Impedance of utility service entrance. 3. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats,

showing the following:

a. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types. b. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios. c. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, and X/R ratios. d. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance. e. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material,

insulation, and length. f. Busway ampacity and impedance. g. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.

4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:

a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and stopping.

b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush current, and overload capability.

c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of start, and thermal-damage curve.

d. Generator thermal-damage curve. e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices. f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility

company. g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated. h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes RMS symmetrical,

ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.

i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.

j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting rating in amperes RMS symmetrical.




3.3 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY

A. Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes RMS symmetrical at circuit-breaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a current immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted short circuit at each of the following:

1. Utility’s supply termination point. 2. Incoming Medium-voltage switchgear. 3. Medium-voltage controllers. 4. Unit substation primary and secondary terminals. 5. Low voltage switchgear and switchboards. 6. Motor-control centers. 7. Distribution panelboards. 8. Branch circuit panelboard. 9. Generators and automatic transfer switches.

B. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

C. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.

D. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with IEEE 241 and IEEE 242.

1. Transformers:

a. ANSI C57.12.10. b. ANSI C57.12.22. c. ANSI C57.12.40. d. IEEE C57.12.00. e. IEEE C57.96.

2. Medium-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE C37.010. 3. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1. 4. Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.

E. Study Report:

1. Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents on electrical distribution system diagram.

2. Show interrupting (5-cycle) and time-delayed currents (6 cycles and above) on medium- and high-voltage breakers as needed to set relays and assess the sensitivity of overcurrent relays.

F. Equipment Evaluation Report:

1. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.




2. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

3. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents; verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

3.4 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

A. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a written report using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399.

1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents. 2. Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds) short-

circuits currents. 3. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.

B. Comply with IEEE 242 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.

C. Comply with NEC Article 700 requirements for selective coordination of overcurrent protective devices in the supply side of emergency system.

D. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:

a. Inrush current when first energized. b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is

specified for that transformer. c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by

unusual loading or emergency conditions.

2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents.

E. Motors served by voltages more than 600 V shall be protected according to IEEE 620.

F. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.

G. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of coordination study:

1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:

a. Device tag.




b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-pickup values.

c. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous settings.

d. Fuse-current rating and type. e. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.

2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation. Show the following information:

a. Device tag. b. Voltage and current ratio for curves. c. Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer. d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for medium and low voltage fuses. e. Cable damage curves. f. Transformer inrush points. g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point. h. Medium voltage equipment relays.

H. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.

3.5 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A. Perform analysis using approved computer software program. The worst case operating scenario shall be the basis for the calculations. Prepare a written report in conjunction with results of fault-current study.

B. Submit results in tabular form, include bus/device name, fault current levels, flash protection boundary distances, PPE classes and AFIE levels.

C. Provide equipment labels to identify AIFE and appropriate PPE levels.

3.6 COORDINATION OF WORK

A. The Division 26 Contractor shall be responsible to ensure proper AIC ratings for protection of electrical equipment. Adjustment of protective device equipment to meet the approved coordination study submittal shall be the responsibility of the Division 26 Contractor at no additional cost to the Cleveland Clinic.




ELECTRICAL STUDIES 260573.1 - 1

SECTION 260573.1 – ELECTRICAL STUDIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes computer-based, electrical studies such as Harmonic studies; Load Flow studies, Large Motor Starting studies, Power Factor studies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. The final Study/ analysis, in the form of hard copy and electronic media, shall be submitted to the Cleveland Clinic. The electronic copy shall be demonstrated and validated to the Cleveland Clinic on Cleveland Clinic computers.


A. Qualification Data: For Engineer performing the work.

B. Product Certificates: For computer software programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.

B. Electrical Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.

1. Professional Engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be responsible for the work. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of engineer.

C. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available vendors offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited the following: 1. EDSA Micro Corporation. 2. ESA Inc. 3. EZ Power. 4. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with IEEE 399.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HARMONIC STUDIES

A. The harmonics study shall include all indicated portions of the electrical distribution system, from the normal and alternate sources of power down to each load shown on the one-line diagram. The harmonics study shall consider operation during normal conditions, alternate operational configurations, emergency power conditions and any other operations which could result in harmonic distortion exceeding proscribed standards.

1. The study shall include the “worst case” situation that is likely to be produced. The worst case is defined as that combination of equipment which is deemed most likely to create the highest level of total harmonic voltage distortion and total current demand distortion at a given point.

3.2 LOAD FLOW STUDIES

A. Load flow studies shall be performed using computer software to simulate actual steady-state power system operating conditions, enabling the evaluation of bus voltage profiles, real and reactive power flow, and losses. The load flow study shall use multiple scenarios to help ensure that the power system is adequately designed to satisfy the project’s performance criteria.

1. The study shall determine the following: a. Optimizing circuit usage and loading b. Develop bus voltage profiles c. Minimize kW and kVar losses d. Identify transformer tap settings

2. Provide an Electrical Distribution System Diagram: prepare in hard-copy and electronic-

copy formats.




a. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram.

3.3 LARGE MOTOR STARTING STUDY

A. This study is used to calculate the electrical parameters (voltage and current) and the accelerating torque of the large motors during the starting process. These type of studies would normally be performed for large electric motors (250 HP and larger). The study shall also evaluate the effect of reduced voltage on other running motors in the Facility.

3.5 POWER FACTOR STUDY

A. Perform analysis using approved computer software program and power system metering. B. A power factor study shall investigate the power factor of the facility over the previous twelve

month billing cycle to examine any penalties incurred by the local utility and to investigate any possible incentives for higher power factor.

C. The goals of the study shall include at a minimum: 1. Reduce total system loading thereby increasing system capacity. 2. Determine any negative interaction between Non Linear Loads (Harmonic Source) and

capacitor banks. 3. Determine preferred locations, sizes, types and control of capacitor banks to optimize

system performance, reduce low PF penalties and take incentives from the Utility for high PF.

3.6 EXECUTION OF WORK

A. Perform studies using approved computer software programs. Prepare written reports in conjunction with results of study. Provide completed data sheets and calculations where a part of the study.

1. The final Study/ analysis, in the form of hard copy and electronic media, shall be submitted to the Cleveland Clinic.

2. The written report shall include the following attributes.

a. Introduction and executive summary sections which include assumptions and recommendations. Reiterate assumptions stated elsewhere in the report.

b. Body of report including findings and detailed recommendations.

c. Data sheets in tabular form and/or graphical.

d. Copies of all drawings used or generated.

e. Copies of all manufacturers’ data used in the analysis.

END OF SECTION 260573.1



ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 1

SECTION 260913 - ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section describes the metering, communications, and visualization requirements for a modular, scalable Web-based Electrical Power Monitoring and Control System. The goal of this system is to provide the user the ability to monitor and manage their power system with the user only requiring a browser to access the system. This system shall allow the user to directly connect to the web enabled equipment and to software based system designed to aggregate data from multiple devices and provide a system level view of both real time information and advanced power ands system analytics.

1. The EPMCS shall comply with new construction installations utilizing web-based components to function independently or to co-exist with other Eaton Cutler-Hammer INCOM or Power-Net system components or other Modbus RTU communicating devices in a heterogeneous environment

B. Section includes the following for monitoring and control of electrical power system:

1. Software, remote devices for metering, monitoring, control and protection, a network time server, all Ethernet communications gateways, interface modules, a server class computer, software, intercommunication wiring, ancillary equipment, startup and training services, and ongoing technical support

C. Related Sections:

1. Those Sections specifying power distribution components that are monitored or controlled by power monitoring and control equipment.



1. Attach copies of approved Product Data submittals for products (such as switchboards and switchgear) that describe power monitoring and control features to illustrate coordination among related equipment and power monitoring and control.

B. Shop Drawings: For power monitoring and control equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.




1. Outline Drawings: Indicate arrangement of components and clearance and access requirements.

2. Block Diagram: Show interconnections between components specified in this Section and devices furnished with power distribution system components. Indicate data communication paths and identify networks, data buses, data gateways, concentrators, and other devices to be used. Describe characteristics of network and other data communication lines.

3. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. Coordinate nomenclature and presentation with a block diagram.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer.


C. Other Informational Submittals:

1. Manufacturer's system installation and setup guides, with data forms to plan and record options and setup decisions.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power monitoring and control units, to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition include the following:

1. Operating and applications software documentation. 2. Software licenses. 3. Software service agreement. 4. PC installation and operating documentation, manuals, and software for the PC and all

installed peripherals. Software shall include system restore, emergency boot diskettes, and drivers for all installed hardware.

5. Hard copies of manufacturer's specification sheets, operating specifications, design guides, user's guides for software and hardware, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the hard-copy submittal.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Self-study guide describing the process for setting equipment's network address; setting options; procedures to ensure data access from any PC on the network, using a standard Web browser; and recommended firewall setup.

2. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 3. Software Backup: On compact discs or portable memory sticks. 4. Device address list and the set point of each device and operator option, as set in

applications software. 5. Graphic file and printout of graphic screens and related icons, with legend.




C. Software Upgrade Kit: For Cleveland Clinic use in modifying software to suit future power system revisions or power monitoring and control revisions.

D. Software licenses and upgrades required by and installed for operating and programming digital and analog devices.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing power monitoring and control equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of distribution equipment and power monitoring and control components to form an integrated interconnection of compatible components.

1. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.

B. Coordinate Work of this Section with those in Sections specifying distribution components that are monitored or controlled by power monitoring and control equipment.

1.8 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years.

B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include the operating systems. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following :




1. Eaton Corporation Electrical Group, “Power X-pert”. 2. General Electric Company, GE Consumer & Industrial. 3. Schneider Electric, Power Management Operations.

2.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. The EPMCS shall provide a web browser-based monitoring and management system for all communicating devices in the power system.

B. The EPMCS shall communicate to all devices over an industry standard Ethernet communication backbone. For devices that cannot communicate directly on Ethernet, a gateway shall be provided.

C. The EPCMS shall identify power system anomalies and measure, display, and record trends and alarms.

D. The EPCMS shall provide a database for recording of equipment ratings and characteristics with capability for graphic display on monitors.

E. The EPCMS shall report equipment status and power system control.

1. Display circuit-breaker and switch status and allow circuit-breaker control.

2.3 APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE

A. The software system shall provide a real time, web based visualization system to allow the user to easily view the key operational characteristics of the system. These features of the system shall not require any custom screen development to provide the following functions:

1. The software shall provide the ability to view the current value of all operational variables available from a device. The user shall be able to organize and view this attributes in easy to understand groupings.

2. The software shall not require specific knowledge of a device to be able to display information from that device. Instead, the software shall have the ability to query the device for its operational capabilities and automatically set up web based pages to display the information:

a. The software shall support the ability to automatically establish a connection to any device added to a gateway without the user doing any configuration in the software.

3. The software shall automatically build a navigation tree of all connected devices so the user can easily find a device and display the data for that device.

4. The software shall provide the ability trend one or more variables (volts, amps, kW, kWh, etc.) from one or more devices on a web based trend graph.




5. The software shall support displaying of the waveform data collected by the power monitoring devices that can capture waveforms. The waveform display shall be fully accessible via the web browser.

6. The software shall provide time stamped sequential order of events for trips, analog alarms, motor start profiles, and operator actions based on the information received from the actual devices. The software shall support ordering the events based on timestamps up to 1ms in accuracy.

7. The software shall have the ability to manage alarm and event conditions detected by the devices. Alarm management shall include:

a. Ability to acknowledge and close alarms via the web interface.

b. Ability to color code alarms and events based on severity and state.

c. Ability to separate Alarms and Events on separate tabs of the display to reduce information clutter.

d. Ability to sort and analyze alarms by time, device and other key characteristics.

e. Ability to install a small “system tray” applet to provide notification that an alarm has been raised even if the browser session is not active.

f. Ability to send an email, page or text message for selected sets or alarm conditions.

B. The software shall provide a web based editing environment that allows the user to extend the software visualization capabilities by developing custom animated graphic pages. Examples of typical pages include one-line diagrams, elevation views and plan layouts.

C. The software system shall be easy to operate and manage. It shall also be scalable such that the system can be expanded without requiring the user to reconfigure a new system.

D. The software system shall be scalable such that the system can be expanded without requiring the user to reconfigure a new system.

1. The software shall allow users to be granted privileges based on their user ID and password, to perform various functions in the system. The software shall support, at a minimum 2 levels of access with one supporting read only access and the other provide full Administration access.

E. The software shall provide a data warehouse based reporting option that allows the user to analyze long term (years) system performance and operational issues.

1. The reporting system shall be able to connect to one or more real time systems to provide the ability to analyze local or enterprise power system performance.

2. The reporting system shall allow the user to subscribe to a report such that the report is run with a pre-defined set of selections at a pre-defined time and the output is email to the user, saved as a file to a directory or sent to a printer. A subscription shall be at to be set up such that it reoccurs on a regularly scheduled basis.




3. The reporting system shall allow the user to define a reporting hierarchy such that the report output can provide high level summary information and also support “drill down” into the key operational information (current, voltage, kWh, etc) for different levels in the reporting hierarchy.

4. The reporting system will support a variety of output formats including, but not limited to interactive web pages, Excel files, pdf files, csv files, and XML files.

F. Summary Web pages shall be provided to display the following information for each communicating device within the power equipment lineup: 1. Circuit Summary Page: Circuit name, three-phase average RMS current, power (kW),

power factor, and breaker status. 2. Transformer Page: Transformer tag, coil temperatures, and cooling fan status. 3. Specific Device Pages: Each individual communicating device shall display detailed,

real-time information, as appropriate for device type.

G. Graphics: Interactive color-graphics platform with pull-down menus and mouse-driven generation of power system graphics, in formats widely used for such drafting; to include the following:

1. Site plan. 2. Floor plans. 3. Equipment elevations. 4. Single-line diagrams.

2.4 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Monitoring and Control System: As the EPMCS is a web enabled system; the computer that runs the software shall be set up and managed as a server. This server computer will provide access to the system for any authorized user via a standard internet browser. The computer shall be placed on the Cleveland Clinic’s data transmission network and configured as a server that others can access.

B. The server shall consist of a server class computer with the following specifications:

1. [____] processor with [___] GB RAM, [___] GB hard disk drive. 2. CD-RW Drive. 3. Ethernet 10/100 card. 4. Auto-reboot capability after power failure. 5. Windows [___] Server or greater. 6. The end user computers require Internet Explorer v[ ___ ] or greater and Windows [ ___ ]

or higher

C. All web enabled devices in the EPMCS shall provide any authorized user access to the critical data listed below with the user requiring only a supported Internet browser on their own computer.

D. RMS Real-Time Measurements:

1. Current: Each phase, neutral, ground, and average of three phases.




2. Voltage: Line-to-line each phase, line-to-line average of three phases, line-to-neutral each phase, line-to-neutral average of three phases.

3. Power: Per phase and three-phase total. 4. Demand. 5. Power Factor: Per phase and three-phase total. 6. Frequency. 7. THD: Current and voltage. 8. Harmonics to the 127th level.

E. Events screen providing: 1. Latest events. 2. Enabled Triggers. 3. Historical Events. 4. Real time and historical wave form capture with simultaneous display of voltage and

current for all phases. 5. Real time and historical THD display. 6. Real time and historical harmonic display.

F. The web enabled power monitoring hardware shall connect to the power system using Web enabled gateways that communicate to the power system devices for viewing of power monitoring and equipment status information over device specific communication links.

G. Network Configuration: The web-enabled power monitoring hardware and gateways shall support multiple protocols over Ethernet to ensure the system can easily be integrated into the EPCMS software system as well as existing systems. These protocols shall includes: 1. Modbus TCP/IP to support integration into third party systems. 2. BacNet Web Services to support integration into third party systems. 3. SNMP to support integration into Data Center management system. 4. Manufacturer’s standard protocols.

H. The web enabled gateways shall support the following devices:

1. [Provide list based on project requirements]

I. The devices connected to the Web enabled gateway shall communicate using the protocols described above over a local area network interconnected with twisted pair shielded cable in raceway, interconnecting all breaker trip units, protective relays, drives, and metering devices equipped with communications.

J. All web enabled power monitoring hardware that is connected directly to Ethernet shall support the ability to synchronize their time clock using NTP. The purpose for this support is to ensure all device clocks are accurate so that event sequences can be adequately analyzed.

K. The web enabled power monitoring hardware shall provide support for configuration of all web enabled meters and gateways directly via the web pages on the device.

1. To support the configuration of legacy devices on the device networks connected to the gateway, the gateway shall support a “pass thru mode” to allow the legacy configuration software to connect from any computer on the users network to the device via the gateway.




2.5 MICROPROCESSOR BASED METERING EQUIPMENT

A. Provide microprocessor based power quality meters consisting of a meter base(s) with an integrally mounted display. Comply with UL 1244.

B. Basis of Design Products: provide Eaton “Power X-pert Meter Series” products or equal by General Electric or Square D.

C. Accuracy:

1. For meters that are circuit-breaker accessories, metering accuracy at full-scale shall not be less than the following:

a. Current: Plus or minus 2.5 percent. b. Voltage: Plus or minus 1.5 percent. c. Energy, Demand, and Power: Plus or minus 4.0 percent.

D. Current inputs for each channel shall be from standard instrument current transformers.

E. Voltage inputs for each channel shall allow for connection into circuits with the following parameters: 1. Input range up to 600V L-L, direct connected. 2. PT primary input of 120 volts to 500,000 volts.

F. The Metering shall be capable of monitoring, displaying, and communicating true RMS information. The Metering shall be suitable for installation in single phase, two or three wire systems or in three phase, three or four wire systems. 1. AC current in A, B and C phase, 3-phase average, Neutral (N) and Ground (G). 2. AC voltage for A-B, B-C and C-A, phase average, A-N, B-N and C-N, average phase to

N, and N to G. 3. Real Power (Watts), Reactive Power (VARS), Apparent Power (VA), for each phase and

system. 4. Accumulated, Incremental and conditional measurement for Real Energy (WH), Reactive

Energy (VARH), Apparent Energy (VAH) for each phase and system. 5. Frequency (Hz) Accuracy +/- 0.01 hertz. 6. Demand values including present, running average, last complete interval and peak for

System Current (Amperes). 7. Power Factor for both 60-cycle fundamental Watts to VA and Apparent total Watts to

total VARS including harmonics for A, B and C phase and 3 phase average. 8. Current percent Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) in A, B and C phase and N. 9. K-Factor (sum of the squares of harmonic currents times the square of their harmonic

numbers).

G. Meters shall have a digital Input/Output (I/O) card which shall include eight (8) digital inputs and three (3) relay outputs. 1. Output Relay Control: Normally open and normally closed contacts, field configured.

H. Onboard Data Logging:

1. Store logged data, alarms, events, and waveforms in onboard nonvolatile memory.




I. Alarms.

1. User Options: Define pickup, dropout, and delay.

J. Display: 1. Back-lighted LCD to display metered data with touch-screen selecting device. 2. Capable of being mounted to the Meter base unit or remote mounting of display up to

2000 ft away with capability of displaying up to 16 base units or complete Meters.

K. The Meter(s) shall be provided with multiple communications ports and shall be permanently connected to communicate via standard protocols.

2.6 ETHERNET SWITCHES

A. A single web access point: 4 or 6 ports Ethernet switch shall be provided in the equipment to allow a single access point for the user and the ability to connect more than one network device directly on the Cleveland Clinic’s Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN).

B. Ethernet switch shall support standard copper RJ45 connectors and/or 100BaseFX Fiber-Optic via ST connectors.

2.7 LAN CABLES

A. Comply with Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards.

2.8 LOW-VOLTAGE WIRING

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CABLING


B. Install cables and wiring according to requirements in the Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards.

C. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Label each power monitoring and control module with a unique designation.




3.3 GROUNDING

A. Comply with Section 260526 “Grounding and Bonding of Electrical Systems.”





1. Electrical Tests: Use caution when testing devices containing solid-state components. 2. Continuity tests of circuits. 3. Operational Tests: Set and operate controls at workstation and at monitored and

controlled devices to demonstrate their functions and capabilities.

a. Coordinate testing required by this Section with that required by Sections specifying equipment being monitored and controlled.

b. Test LANs according to requirements in the Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards. c. System components with battery backup shall be operated on battery power for a

period of not less than 10 percent of calculated battery operating time. d. Verify accuracy of graphic screens and icons. e. Metering Test: Load feeders, measure loads on feeder conductor with an RMS

reading clamp-on ammeter, and simultaneously read indicated current on the same phase at central-processing workstation. Record and compare values measured at the two locations. Resolve discrepancies greater than 5 percent and record resolution method and results.

f. Record metered values, control settings, operations, time intervals, and functional observations and submit test reports.

C. Power monitoring and control equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


E. Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified requirements are met.

F. Test Labeling: After satisfactory completion of tests and inspections, apply a label to tested components indicating test results, date, and responsible party and representative.

G. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.

H. Remove and replace malfunctioning devices and circuits and retest as specified above.




3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Cleveland Clinic's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems.

1. Train Cleveland Clinic's maintenance personnel in interpreting and using monitoring displays and in configuring and using software and reports. Include troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and maintaining equipment. Provide a minimum of 12 hours' training.

2. Training Aid: Use approved final versions of software and maintenance manuals as training aids.

3.6 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.


PROJECT NAME


FOR: DRAFT ISSUED: 00/00/20XX

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES_2015 260923 - 1

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Time switches.

2. Exterior photoelectric sensors.

3. Indoor occupancy sensors.

4. Indoor daylight sensors.

5. Wall box dimmers.

6. Emergency relay control devices. (GTD)

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 260519 “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” for wire and

cabling.

2. Section 260933 “Central Dimming Controls” for Architectural Dimming Systems.

3. Section 260936 “Modular Dimming Controls” for localized dimming.

4. Section 260943 "Network Lighting Controls” for low-voltage, manual and programmable

lighting control systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. PIR: Passive infrared.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy, photoelectric sensors and emergency

relay control devices.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.

PROJECT NAME




2. Submit typical wiring diagrams for all components including, but not limited to,

photosensors, time switches, emergency relay control devices and occupancy sensors.


D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals.

1.5 WARRANTIES

A. Indoor occupancy sensors, photosensors, time switches and emergency relay control devices

shall have a standard five (5) year warranty.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that

penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including luminaires, HVAC equipment, smoke

detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

B. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Guidelines.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME SWITCHES


following:

1. Intermatic, Inc.

2. Cooper Industries, Inc.

3. TORK.

B. Electronic Time Switches: Electronic, solid state programmable units with alphanumeric

display; complying with UL 917.

1. Contact Configuration: SPST.

2. Contact Rating: 30A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac.

3. Program: 2 on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for each

day of the week and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on

holidays.

PROJECT NAME




4. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a

program on selected channels.

5. Astronomic Time: All channels.

6. Battery Backup: For schedules and time clock.

C. Color to be white, ivory or grey. Custom colors to be coordinated with the Architect.

2.2 EXTERIOR PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS


following:

1. Lutron.

2. Leviton.

3. Hubbell Building Automation.

B. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800-VA to operate connected load,

or contactor coils, complying with UL 773A.

1. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off

levels within that range.

2. Time Delay: 30-second minimum, to prevent false operation.

3. Lightning Arrestor: Air gap type.

4. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base.

2.3 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS


following:

1. Lutron Electronics Company.

2. WattStopper.

3. SensorSwitch.

B. General Description: Ceiling or wall mounting, solid-state type with a separate relay unit and

isolated output.

1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and

off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable in ten (10)

minute increments to a maximum setting of sixty (60) minutes.

2. Self-Adaptive: Continually adjusts sensitivity and timing to ensure optimal lighting

control for any use of the space.

3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A.

Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.

4. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A

tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc,

150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.

5. Isolated Relay: Provide an internal additional isolated relay with Normally Open,

Normally Closed, and Common outputs for use with HVAC control, Data Logging and

other control options where indicated.

PROJECT NAME




6. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.

b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical

enclosure.

c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.

7. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal

operation of the sensor.

8. Bypass Switch: Override the ‘on’ function in case of sensor failure.

9. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; keep lighting off when

selected lighting level is present.

10. Sensors shall be UL listed.

11. Communications capability with daylighting function.

12. Five year warranty.

13. Fully compatible with lighting control system/dimming system and shall communicate

with said system.

14. Color to be white, ivory or grey. Custom colors to be coordinated with the Architect.

C. Dual-Technology Low Voltage Type: Ceiling or wall mounting; detect occupancy/vacancy by

using a combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular

technology or combination of technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in

the field by operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.

2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch minimum movement of any portion of

a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of

average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical

manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.

3. Dual Technology Sensing: Passive infrared and ultrasonic sensing coupled with

technology for sensing very fine motions. Signal processing technology detects fine-

motion passive infrared (PIR) and ultrasonic signals without the need to change the

sensor's sensitivity threshold

4. Ceiling-Mounted Sensors: Detection Coverage (Standard Room): 360º coverage, detect

occupancy anywhere in the following areas when mounted on a 96-inch high ceiling.

a. Up to 1000 sq. ft. for normal range.

b. Up to 2000 sq. ft. for extended range.

5. Ceiling-Mounted Sensors: Provide customizable mask to block off unwanted viewing

areas.

6. Wall-Mounted Sensors: Detection Coverage (Standard Room): 180º coverage, detect

occupancy anywhere in the following areas when mounted on wall.

7. a. Up to 1600 sq. ft. for utilizing dual technology.

8. Operating Environment: Operating temperature 32º-104ºF with a relative humidity (non-

condensing) of 0% to 95%.


PROJECT NAME




2.4 Power Packs for Wired Sensors

A. 120-277 VAC power input/24 VDC, 150 mA power output; 16 A lighting (120-177 V), 1 HP

motor (120-277 V) relay contact rating; Lutron Model PP-DV or equal.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Sensors: Programmable to operate as an occupancy sensor (automatic-on and

automatic-off), an occupancy sensor with low light feature (automatic-on when less than one

footcandle of ambient light available and automatic-off), or a vacancy sensor (manual-on and

automatic-off).

C. Wall-Mounted Sensors: Programmable to operate as an occupancy sensor (automatic-on and

automatic-off), or a vacancy sensor (manual-on and automatic-off).

2.5 INDOOR DAYLIGHT SENSORS


following:

1. Lutron Electronics Company.

2. WattStopper.

3. SensorSwitch.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Daylight Sensor: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit with photodiode element

to detect changes in lighting levels that are perceived by the eye, sensing daylight and electrical

lighting levels. The unit adjusts the indoor electrical lighting levels.

1. Sensor Output: Provide data to the dimming ballast or step dimming ballast for adjusting

light levels. As daylight increases, the lights are reduced.

2. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, and Class 2 power source as defined

by NFPA 70.

3. Open loop basis for daylight sensor control scheme.

4. Partially shielded for accurate detection of available daylight to prevent luminaire

lighting and horizontal light component from skewing sensor detection.

5. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 0 to 500 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off

levels within that range.

6. Time Delay: Adjustable in ten (10) minute increments to a maximum setting of sixty

(60) minutes.

7. Low voltage class 2 wiring for low voltage communication.

8. Indicator: LED’s to indicate operation and programming mode.

9. Sensor shall be capable of being mounted in ceiling tile or luminaire.

10. Sensor shall have the ability to be replaced without reprogramming.

11. UL listed.

12. Five year warranty.

13. Fully compatible with lighting control system/dimming system and shall communicate

with said system.

PROJECT NAME




2.6 WALL-BOX DIMMERS

A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches,

with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Lutron “Maestro” series or equal.

B. Control: Continuously adjustable slide-to-off with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply

with UL 1472.

C. Dimmers shall be fully compatible with the lighting control system/dimming system and shall

communicate with said system.

D. Color to be white, ivory or grey. Custom colors to be coordinated with the Architect.

2.7 EMERGENCY RELAY CONTROL DEVICE

A. Internal Type: Self contained, modular, emergency power transfer device, factory mounted or

field mounted within luminaire body and compatible with LED driver, as manufactured by The

Bodine Company, Model GTD or approved equal by Cleveland Clinic.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one (1) LED luminaire continuously under emergency

conditions regardless of wall switch position. Connect unswitched normal and

emergency circuits, and switched normal circuit to transfer device. Output to one (1)

LED luminaire.

2. Fused input.

3. Rated for 3 amps, 120/277 volts.

B. External Type: Where control of multiple luminaires is indicated, externally mounted type unit

as manufactured by The Bodine Company, GTD20 or approved equal by Cleveland Clinic.

1. Fused input.

2. Rated for 20 amps, 120/277 volts.

C. All devices shall be warranted for five (5) full years after date of purchase.

D. UL 924 Listed.

2.8 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12

AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multi-conductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not

smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage

Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PROJECT NAME




C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multi-conductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than

No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that

penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including luminaires, HVAC equipment, smoke

detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas

indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

Allow six (6) feet of cable slack for sensor location adjustment.

C. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.

2. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables." Minimum conduit size is 3/4 inch.

B. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless

otherwise indicated.

C. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in

junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification

for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each

sensor.

B. Label time switches with a unique designation.

PROJECT NAME





A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been

energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.

2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time

delays.

B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective Work.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit occupied conditions. Provide up to two

visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements

for low-voltage, programmable lighting control system specified in Division 26 Section

"Network Lighting Controls."


PROJECT NAME



CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS_2015 260933 - 1

SECTION 260933 -CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS

PART 1 – GENERAL



Conditions and Division 01 Specifications Section, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Central Dimming Control Systems.


1. Section 265100 “Interior Lighting” for LED drivers controlled by Central Dimming

Control System.

2. Section 260923 “Lighting Control Devices” for occupancy sensors used in

conjunction with Central Dimming Control System.

3. Section 260519 “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” for wiring and

cabling.

4. Section 260523 “Control Voltage Electrical Power Cables” for low voltage control

cabling.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Central Dimming Control System: Factory assembled dimming and switching panels,

interfaces and modules. Low voltage wall stations, control interfaces and sensors.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show installation detail for Central Dimming Controls.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field installed wiring.

2. Submit typical wiring diagrams for all components including, but not limited to,

power interfaces, wall stations, lighting control modules, low voltage control

interfaces, switching modules and sensors.

3. Shall include catalog cut sheets with performance specifications including historical

PROJECT NAME




testing data demonstrating complete compliance to all of the Specifications herein.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency,

operation and maintenance manuals.

D. Field quality control test reports.

E. Shall include a load schedule which indicates the actual connected load and load type per

circuit, circuits and their respective control zones, circuits that are on emergency, and the

capacity, phase, and corresponding circuit numbers per the Electrical Drawings.

F. Shall include a complete schematic of the System.


A. Manufacturer: Minimum 10 years experience in manufacture of Central Dimming Control

Systems.

B. Central Dimming Control System shall be UL Listed specifically for the required loads.

Manufacturer shall provide evidence of compliance on request.

C. Manufacturer shall have their quality system registered to the ISO 9001 Quality Standard,

including in-house engineering for all product design activities. Due to the exclusion of the

Design Control element, ISO 9002 Registration is not acceptable.

D. Central Dimming Control System shall meet IEC801-2, tested to withstand a 15kV

electrostatic discharge without damage or loss of memory.

E. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Guidelines.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive

equipment:

1. Ambient temperature: 0° to 40° C (32° to 104° F).

2. Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing.

3. Dimming Control System must be protected from dust during installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Central Dimming Controls shall have minimum standard five (5) year warranty.

1.8 COMMISSIONING

A. Provide factory-certified field service engineer to a site visit to ensure proper System

installation and operation under following parameters:

1. Qualifications for factory-certified field service engineer:

a. Minimum experience of 2 years training in the electrical/electronic field.

b. Certified by the equipment manufacturer on the System installed.

2. Make a visit upon completion of installation of Central Dimming Control System:

a. Verify connection of power feeds and load circuits.

PROJECT NAME




b. Verify connection and location of controls.

c. Verify proper connection of panel links (low voltage/data) and address panel.

d. Check dimming panel load types and currents and remove by-pass jumpers.

e. Verify System operation control by control, circuit by circuit.

f. Verify proper operation of manufacturers interfacing equipment.

g. Obtain sign-off on System functions.

h. Cleveland Clinic to be trained on System operation.

1.9 MAINTENANCE

A. Make ordering of new equipment for expansions, replacements, and spare parts available to

the Cleveland Clinic 24 hours a day seven days a week.

B. Make new replacement parts available for minimum of ten years from date of manufacture.

C. Provide factory direct technical support hotline 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Lutron.

2. CCF approved equal (must be approved in writing by CCF Facilities Engineering)

B. The Contractor shall use only Central Dimming Control System software and hardware by

the listed manufacturer which meets the requirement and intent of this Specification.

C. Substitutions:

1. All proposed substitutions (clearly delineated as such) must be submitted in writing for

approval by Cleveland Clinic a minimum of 10 working days prior to the bid date and

must be made available to all bidders. Proposed substitutes must be accompanied by a

review of the specification noting compliance on a line-by-line basis.

2. Any proposed substitutions to be reviewed by Cleveland Clinic or Engineer at

Contractor's expense.

3. By using pre-approved substitutions, Contractor accepts responsibility and associated

costs for all required modifications to related equipment and wiring. Provide complete

engineered shop drawings (including power wiring) with deviations from the original

design highlighted in an alternate color for review and approval by Architect prior to

rough-in.

2.2 GENERAL

A. Provide System hardware that is designed, tested, manufactured, and warranted by a single

manufacturer.

B. Central Dimming Controls: Ten-year operational life while operating continually at any

PROJECT NAME




temperature in an ambient temperature range of 0° C (32°F) to 40° C (104°F) and 90 percent

non-condensing relative humidity.

C. Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges up to 15,000 V without

impairmentper IEC 801-2.

2.3 DIMMING / RELAY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrolytic capacitors to operate at least 20° C below the component manufacturer's

maximum temperature rating when device is under fully-loaded conditions in 40° C (104° F)

ambient temperature.

B. Load Handling Thyristors (SCRs and triacs), Field Effect Transistors (FETs), and Isolated

Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs): Manufacturer’s maximum current rating minimum two

times control’s rated operating current.

C. Capable of withstanding repetitive inrush current of 50 times operating current without

impacting lifetime of dimmer/relay.

D. Design and test dimmers/relays to withstand line-side surges without impairment to

performance.

1. Panels: Withstand surges without impairment of performance when subjected to surges

of 6,000 volts, 3,000 amps per ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and per IEC 61000-4-5 surge

requirements.

2. Other power handling devices: Withstand surges without impairment of performance

when subjected to surges of 6,000 volts, 200 amps per ANSI/IEEE C62.41.

E. Utilize air gap off, activated when user selects “off” at any control to disconnect the load

from line supply.

F. Possess power failure memory such that if power is interrupted and subsequently returned,

lights will automatically return to same levels (dimmed setting, full on, or off) prior to power

interruption within 3 seconds.

G. Dimmers:

1. Multiple dimmer/module types to specifically control LED drivers, 0-10v loads and

non-dim loads.

2. Each dimmer to be assigned a load type that will provide a proper dimming curve for

the specific light source.

3. Possess ability to have load types assigned per circuit, configured in field.

4. Minimum and maximum light levels user adjustable on circuit-by-circuit basis.

5. Control all light sources in smooth and continuous manor. Dimmers with visible steps

are not acceptable.

6. Provide real-time cycle-by-cycle compensation for incoming line voltage variations

including changes in RMS voltage (a minimum of plus or minus 2 percent change in

RMS voltage/cycle), frequency shifts (plus or minus 2 Hz change in frequency/second),

dynamic harmonics, and line noise.

7. Each dimmer to incorporate electronic "soft-start" default at initial turn-on that

smoothly ramps lights up to the appropriate levels within 0.5 seconds.

8. Line Voltage Dimmers; Meet following load-specific requirements:

a. Electronic Low Voltage (ELV) transformer: Dimmer to operate electronic low

voltage transformers via reverse phase control. Alternately, forward phase

PROJECT NAME




control dimming may be used if dimming equipment manufacturer has

recommended specific ELV transformers being provided.

9. Low Voltage Dimming Modules; Meet following requirements:

a. Coordination between low voltage dimming module and line voltage relay:

Capable of being electronically linked to single zone.

b. Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling following light

sources:

1) 0-10V analog voltage signal.

a) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.

b) Sink current via IEC 60929.

c) Source current.

2) 10-0V reverse analog voltage signal.

3) DSI digital communication.

4) DALI broadcast communication IEC 60929:

a) Logarithmic intensity values in compliance with IEC 60929.

b) Linear intensity values for use with LED color intensity control.

5) PWM IEC 60929.

H. Non-dim circuits to meet the following requirements:

1. Rated life of relay: Minimum 1,000,000 cycles.

2. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is

applied to load circuits.

3. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.

2.4 POWER PANELS

A. Product:

1. Lutron - GP Series.

B. Mechanical:

1. Delivered and installed as a factory assembled panel.

2. Field wiring accessible from front of panel without need to remove dimmer assemblies

or other components.

3. Panels passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means.

4. Ship panels with each dimmer in mechanical bypass position by means of jumper

inserted between input and load terminals. Jumpers to carry full rated load current and

be reusable at any time. Mechanical bypass device to allow for switching operation of

connected load with dimmer removed by means of circuit breaker.

C. Electrical:

1. Panels contain branch circuit protection for each input circuit unless the panel is a

dedicated feed-through type panel or otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

2. Branch circuit breakers/miniature circuit breaker (MCB) meet following performance

requirements:

a. Utilize type C trip curve for lighting loads.

b. Rated at 6,000 AIC.

PROJECT NAME




c. Thermal-magnetic construction for overload, short-circuit, and over-temperature

protection. Use of breakers without thermal protection requires dimmers/relays to

have integral thermal protection to prevent failures when overloaded or ambient

temperature is above rating of panel.

d. Replaceable without moving or replacing dimmer/relay assemblies or other

components in panel.

D. Lutron GP Series Grafik Panel:

1. Utilize universal 16A (non-CE) or 10A (CE) continuous-use dimmer.

2. Limit current rise time to minimum 190 µsec as measured from 10-90 percent of load

current waveform and minimum 285 µsec as measured from 0-100 percent of load

current waveform at 50 percent rated dimmer capacity at a 90 degree conduction angle.

Current rise to be minimum 220 µsec as measured from 10-90 percent of load current

waveform and minimum 325 µsec as measured from 0-100 percent of load current

waveform at 100 percent rated dimmer capacity at a 90 degree conduction angle.

3. Load faults only affect the given circuit.

4. Tested 100 percent for proper operation at three stages:

a. Function test each printed circuit board.

b. Function test fully assembled panel.

c. Final assembly burn in for two hours at 40° C (104° F) ambient temperature.

E. Lutron LP/CCP Series Light Duty Commercial Lighting Control Panel:

1. Flush into wall or surface mounted as Project permits.

2. Utilize multiple load type continuous-use dimming/switching modules.

3. For switching only circuits, utilize 1,000,000 cycle relay.

F. Lutron XP Softswitch Series Switching Panels:

1. Flush into wall or surface mounted as Project permits.

2. Rated life of relay: Minimum 1,000,000 cycles.

3. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is

applied to load circuits.

4. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.

G. Lutron Circuit Selector:

1. Provide following capabilities:

a. Operate circuits directly from panel processor for system diagnostics and provide

feedback of System operation.

b. Electronically assign each circuit to any zone in Dimming System.

c. Determine normal/emergency function of panel and set emergency lighting levels.

2. Where indicated on Drawings, panels to provide two control links. Each circuit to be

capable of transferring control based on independent programming between

architectural control system and theatrical controls utilizing the USITT DMX-512 1990

or ESTA DMX-512A protocol.

H. Diagnostics and Service:

1. Replacing dimmer/relay does not require re-programming of System or processor.

2. Dimmers/relays: Include diagnostic LED’s to verify proper operation and assist in

System troubleshooting.

3. Dimming/relay panels: Include tiered control scheme for dealing with component

PROJECT NAME




failure that minimizes loss of control for occupant.

a. If Lighting Control System fails, lights to remain at current level. Panel processor

provides local control of lights until System is repaired.

b. If panel processor fails, lights to remain at current level. Circuit breakers can be

used to turn lights off or to full light output, allowing non-dim control of lights

until panel processor is repaired.

c. If dimmer fails, factory-installed mechanical bypass jumpers to allow each dimmer

to be mechanically bypassed. Mechanical bypass device to allow for switching

operation of connected load with dimmer removed by means of circuit breaker.

2.5 POWER INTERFACES

A. Product: SELECT [PHPM-PA, PHPM-3F, PHPM-SW, NGRX-PB, GRX-FDBI, GRX-

PWM & GRX-TVI].

B. Electrical:

1. Phase independent of control input.

2. Dimmer to meet limited short circuit test as defined in UL 20

C. Diagnostics and Service: Replacing power interface does not require re-programming of

system or processor.

2.6 LOW-VOLTAGE WALL STATIONS

A. Product: Architectural.

B. Electronics:

1. Use RS485 wiring for low voltage communication.

C. Functionality:

1. Upon button press, LEDs to immediately illuminate.

2. LEDs to reflect the true System status. LEDs to remain illuminated if the button

press was properly processed or the LEDs turn off if the button press was not

processed.

3. Allow for easy reprogramming without replacing unit.

4. Replacement of units does not require reprogramming.

D. Color:


E. Provide faceplates with concealed mounting hardware.

F. Engrave wall stations in English with appropriate button, zone, and scene engraving

descriptions furnished prior to fabrication.

G. Preset Lighting Control with Zone Override:

1. Intensity for each zone indicated by means of one illuminated bar graph per zone.

2. Fade time indicated by digital display for current scene while fading.

3. Incorporate built-in wide angle infrared receiver.

4. For temporary local overrides, individual raise/lower buttons to allow zones to be

adjusted without altering scene values stored in memory.

H. Slider Controls:

1. When controlled by slider wall station, light level to be indicated by position of slider.

PROJECT NAME




More than one zone may be proportionately raised or lowered at same time.

2.7 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL INTERFACES

A. Contact Closure Interfaces:

a. The contact closure input device will accept both momentary and maintained

contact closures.

B. RS232 and Ethernet Interfaces:

1. Provide ability to communicate to System by means of user-supplied PC or

digital audiovisual equipment.

a. Provide access to:

1) Scene selections.

2) Fade zone to a level.

3) Fine-tuning of preset levels with scene raise/lower.

4) Lock out scenes and zones.

5) Fine-tuning of light levels with individual zone raise/lower.

b. Provide status monitoring through button feedback and scene-status updates.

2. Astronomical time clock and programmer interface

a. Provide access to:

1) Scene selections.

2) Fade zone to a level.

3) Fine-tuning of preset levels with scene raise/lower.

4) Lock out scenes and zones.

5) Fine-tuning of light levels with individual zone raise/lower.

b. Provide status monitoring through button feedback and scene-status updates.

c. Software to provide as follows:

1) System setup.

a) Program low voltage controls.

b) Set up and run time clock schedules.

c) Set up and run sequences.

d) Set and report time.

e) Archive system information.

f) Enable/disable wall station.

g) Enable/disable time clock.

2.8 SENSORS

A. Ceiling-Mounted Infrared Receiver; [Lutron Model GRX-CIR-WH]:

1. Ceiling-Mounted Infrared Receivers have 360 degree reception of wireless infrared

remote controls.

B. Interior Daylight Sensors; [Lutron Model MW-FPS-WH]:

1. Use Class 2 wiring for low voltage communication

2. Can be replaced without reprogramming

3. Open-loop basis for daylight sensor control scheme

PROJECT NAME




4. Stable output over temperature from 0 degrees C to 40 degrees C

5. Partially shielded for accurate detection of available daylight to prevent fixture lighting

and horizontal light component from skewing sensor detection

6. Provide linear response from 0 to 500 foot-candles

7. Constructed with plastic meeting UL94 HB

8. Mountable on lighting fixtures or recessed acoustical ceiling tiles

9. Constructed via sonic welding

10. Color:

a. Match NEMA WD1, Section 2, White.

C. Exterior Daylight Sensors:

1. Calibrated with independent turn-on and turn-off thresholds; minimum 2 foot-candles

difference between the turn-on and turn-off thresholds.

2. Enclosed in weatherproof housing with shading and lens protection visor.

D. Infrared Partition Sensor; [Lutron Model GRX-IRPS-WH]:

1. Provide contact closure based on status of sensor.

E. Ceiling and Wall Mount Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors

1. Product: SELECT:[LOS-CUS-500-WH], [LOS-CUS-1000-WH], [LOS-CUS-2000-

WH], [LOS-CIR-450-WH], [LOS-CIR-1500-WH], [LOS-CDT-500-WH], [LOS-CDT-

500R-WH], [LOS-CDT-1000-WH], [LOS-CDT-1000R-WH], [LOS-CDT-2000-WH],

[LOS-CDT-2000R-WH], [LOS-WIR-WH], [LOS-WDT-WH], [LOS-WDT-R-WH].

2. Sensing mechanism:

1. Infrared: Utilize multiple segmented lenses, with internal grooves to eliminate

dust and residue build-up.

2. Ultrasonic: Utilize an operating frequency of 32 kHz or 40 kHz that shall be

crystal controlled to operate within plus or minus 0.005 percent tolerance.

3. Dual technology:

i. Utilize multiple segmented lenses, with internal grooves to eliminate dust

and residue build-up.

ii. Utilize an operating frequency of 32 kHz or 40 kHz that shall be crystal

controlled to operate within plus or minus 0.005 percent tolerance.

3. Sensors shall turn off or reduce lighting automatically after reasonable time delay when a

room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy the space

4. Sensor shall accommodate all conditions of space utilization and all irregular work hours

and habits.

5. Sensors shall be UL listed.

6. Sensors shall be fully adaptive and adjust their sensitivity and timing to ensure optimal

lighting control for any use of the space

7. Sensors shall have field adjustable controls for time delay and sensitivity to override any

adaptive features.

8. Power failure memory:

Controls incorporate non-volatile memory. Should power be interrupted and subsequently

restored, settings and learned parameters saved in protected memory shall not be lost.

9. Provide all necessary mounting hardware and instructions.

10. Sensors shall be Class 2 devices.

11. Indicate viewing directions on mounting bracket for all Ceiling mount sensors.

12. Provide customizable mask to block off unwanted viewing areas for all ceiling mounted

PROJECT NAME




sensors using infrared technology.

13. Provide swivel mount base for all wall mount sensors.

14. [Provide an internal additional isolated relay with Normally Open, Normally Closed

and Common outputs for use with HVAC control, Data Logging and other control

options.]

F. Sensor Power Packs

1. For ease of mounting, installation and future service, power pack(s) shall be able to

mount through a 1/2" knock-out in a standard electrical enclosure and be an integrated,

self-contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching control relay and a

transformer to provide low-voltage power. Transformer shall provide power to a

minimum of three (3) sensors.

2. Power pack shall be plenum rated

3. Control wiring between sensors and control units shall be Class 2, 18-24 AWG, stranded

U.L. Classified, PVC insulated or TEFLON jacketed cable suitable for use in plenums,

where applicable.

4. ACCESSORIES

1. Tamper Proof Covers:

i. Locking covers for preset control units and wall stations: Reversible to

allow lock to be located on either side of control.

ii. Compatible with IR controls.

iii. Does not reduce specified IR range by more than 50 percent of its

original specification.

2. Emergency Lighting Interface; Lutron LUT-ELI

i. Provides total system listing to UL924 when used with Lutron GRAFIK

Eye 4000 system.

ii. Senses all three phases of building power.

iii. Provides an output to power panels if power on any phase fails.

iv. Accepts a contact closure input from a fire alarm control panel.

3. Infrared Transmitters:

i. Provide wireless remote control capable of recalling preset light levels

for [four] [eight] scenes plus “off” and of fine-tuning light levels with

master raise/lower.

ii. Designed for use in conjunction with compatible infrared receiver and

lighting control; dependent on that receiver, not transmitter.

iii. Operate up to 15 meters (50 feet) within line-of-sight to that receiver.

iv. “Learnable” by other variable frequency remote controls.

5. REMOTE ACCESS

1. Provide web-based support through control panel or head end to allow

troubleshooting, diagnostics and software upgrades.

PROJECT NAME




PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. INSTALLATION

a. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 “Low Voltage Electrical

Power Conductors and Cables.”

b. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

c. Provide complete installation of System in accordance with Contract Documents.

d. Define each dimmer's load type, assign each load to a zone, and set control

functions.

e. Provide equipment at locations and in quantities indicated on Drawings. Provide

any additional equipment required to provide control intent.

f. Ensure that daylight sensor placement minimizes sensors view of electric light

sources; ceiling mounted and luminaire-mounted daylight sensors shall not have

direct view of luminaries.

g. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, labor, system setup and other services

necessary for the proper installation of the products/System as indicated on the

Drawings and specified herein. System setup shall include defining each

dimmers load type, assigning each load to a zone and setting the control

functions.

h. Systems Integration:

i. Equipment Integration Meeting Visit

(1) Facility Representative to coordinate meeting between

Cleveland Clinic Representative, Lighting Control System

Manufacturer and other related equipment manufacturers to discuss

equipment and integration procedures.

B. START-UP AND PROGRAMMING

1. Provide factory-certified field service engineer to a site visit to ensure proper System


a. Qualifications for factory-certified field service engineer:



b. Make a visit upon completion of installation of modular dimming control system:



c. Program system data.

d. Verify proper connection of digital control link.

e. Verify proper operation of manufacturers interfacing equipment.

f. Obtain sign-off on System functions.

PROJECT NAME




g. User to be trained on System operation.

C. After Hours Start-up

1. Provide factory certified Field Service Engineer to perform manufacturer’s start-up

procedures outside normal working hours (Monday through Friday, 7a.m. to 5 p.m.)

D. Tech Support

1. Provide factory direct technical support hotline 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.

E. CLOSE OUT ACTIVITIES

1. Training Visit

a. Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide 2 days additional on-site

System training to Cleveland Clinic personnel.

2. On-Site Walkthrough

a. Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide a factory certified Field

Service Engineer to demonstrate System functionality to the Commissioning

Agent.

F. MAINTENANCE

1. Capable of providing on-site service support within 24 hours anywhere in

continental United States and within 72 hours worldwide except where special

visas are required.

2. Offer renewable service contract on yearly basis, to include parts, factory labor,

and annual training visits. Make service contracts available up to ten years after

date of System startup.


PROJECT NAME



MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015 260936 - 1

SECTION 260936 - MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS

PART 1– GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Modular dimming control systems and components.


1. Section 265100 “Interior Lighting” for LED drivers controlled by Modular Dimming

Control System.

2. Section 260923 “Lighting Control Devices” for wall box dimmers and occupancy

sensors.


cabling.


cabling.

5. Section 260933 “Central Dimming Controls” for Architectural Dimming Systems.

6. Section 260943 “Network Lighting Controls” for low voltage, manual and

programmable lighting control systems.


A. Modular Dimming Control: Factory assembled dimming control, interfaces, and modules.

Low voltage wall stations, control interfaces, and sensors.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors, service

condition requirements, and installed features

a. Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors: Include detailed basic motion detection coverage

range diagrams

B. Shop Drawings: Show installation detail for Modular Dimming Controls

PROJECT NAME




1. Interconnection diagrams showing field installed wiring including component

interconnections.

a. Include requirements for interfacing with other systems.

2. Submit project specific wiring diagrams for all components including, but not limited

to, power interfaces, wall stations, lighting control modules, low voltage control

interfaces, dimming ballasts, switching modules and sensors.





A. Manufacturer: Minimum 10years experience in manufacture of architectural lighting

controls.

B. Manufacturer’s Quality System: Registered to ISO 9001:2000 Quality Standards, including

in-house engineering for product design activities.

C. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA

70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and marked

for intended use.

D. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Guidelines.

1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Modular Dimming Controls shall have minimum standard five (5) year warranty.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by:

1. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.

2. CCF approved equal (must be approved in writing by CCF Facilities Engineering)

B. Substitutions:

1. All proposed substitutions (clearly delineated as such) must be submitted in writing for

approval by Cleveland Clinic a minimum of 10 working days prior to the bid date and

must be made available to all bidders. Proposed substitutes must be accompanied by a

review of the specification noting compliance on a line-by-line basis.

PROJECT NAME




2. Any proposed substitutions to be reviewed by Cleveland Clinic or Engineer at

Contractor's expense.

3. By using pre-approved substitutions, Contractor accepts responsibility and associated

costs for all required modifications to related equipment and wiring. Provide complete

engineered shop drawings (including power wiring) with deviations from the original

design highlighted in an alternate color for review and approval by Architect prior to

rough-in.

C. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from

a single supplier.

2.2 GENERAL

A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) as

suitable for the purpose indicated.

B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required equipment, conduit, boxes,

wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, accessories, software, system programming, etc. as

necessary for a complete operating system that provides the control intent indicated.

C. Shade Control Requirements [IF REQUIRED ON PROJECT]

1. Capable of operating shades and recalling shade presets via keypad, contact closure

input, infrared receiver, lighting management system software, or other lighting control

system interface.

2. Capable of operating any individual, group, or subgroup of shade electronic drive units

within system without requiring separate group controllers.

3. Capable of assigning and reassigning individual, groups, and subgroups of shades to

any control within system without requiring additional wiring or hardware changes.

4. Capable of controlling shade speed for tracking within plus or minus 0.125 inch (3.17

mm) throughout entire travel.

5. Provide 10 year power failure memory for preset stops, open and close limits, shade

grouping and sub grouping and system configuration.

6. Capable of synchronizing multiple shade electronic drive units of the same size to start,

stop and move in unison.

7. Capable of stopping shades within accuracy of 0.125 inch (3.17 mm) at any point

between open and close limits.

8. Capable of storing up to 250 programmable stop points, including open, close, and any

other position.

D. Design lighting control equipment for 10 year operational life while operating continually at

any temperature in an ambient temperature range of 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 104

degrees F (40 degrees C) and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.

E. Electrostatic Discharge Tolerance: Design and test equipment to withstand electrostatic

discharges without impairment when tested according to IEC 61000-4-2.

F. Dimming and Switching (Relay) Equipment:

PROJECT NAME




1. Designed so that electrolytic capacitors operate at least 36 degrees F (2 degrees C)

below the capacitor's maximum temperature rating when the device is under fully

loaded conditions at maximum rated temperature.

2. Inrush Tolerance:

a. Utilize load-handling thyristors (SCRs and triacs), field effect transistors (FETs)

and isolated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs) with maximum current rating at least

two times the rated operating current of the dimmer/relay.

b. Capable of withstanding repetitive inrush current of 50 times the operating current

without impacting lifetime of the dimmer/relay.

3. Surge Tolerance:

a. Panels: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 6,000 V, 3,000 amps according

to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEC 61000-4-5 without impairment to performance.

b. Other Power Handling Devices: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 6,000

V, 200 amps according to IEEE C62.41.2 without impairment to performance.

4. Power Failure Recovery: When power is interrupted and subsequently restored, within

3 seconds lights to automatically return to same levels (dimmed setting, full on, or full

off) as prior to power interruption.

5. Dimming Requirements:

a. Line Noise Tolerance: Provide real-time cycle-by-cycle compensation for

incoming line voltage variations including changes in RMS voltage (plus or minus

2 percent change in RMS voltage per cycle), frequency shifts (plus or minus 2 Hz

change in frequency per second), dynamic harmonics, and line noise.

1) Systems not providing integral cycle-by-cycle compensation to include

external power conditioning equipment as part of dimming system.

b. Incorporate electronic "soft-start" default at initial turn-on that smoothly ramps

lights up to the appropriate levels within 0.5 seconds.

c. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply.

d. Control all light sources in smooth and continuous manner. Dimmers with visible

steps are not acceptable.

e. Load Types:

1) Assign a load type to each dimmer that will provide a proper dimming curve

for the specific light source to be controlled.

2) Provide capability of being field-configured to have load types assigned per

circuit.

f. Minimum and Maximum Light Levels: User adjustable on a circuit-by-circuit

basis.

g. Line Voltage Dimmers:

1) Dimmers for Electronic Low Voltage (ELV) Transformers: Operate

transformers via reverse phase control. Alternately, forward phase control

dimming may be used if dimming equipment manufacturer has recommended

specific ELV transformers being provided.

h. Low Voltage Dimming Modules:

1) Coordination between Low Voltage Dimming Module and Line Voltage

Relay: Capable of being electronically linked to a single zone.

2) Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling the following

PROJECT NAME




light sources:

a) 0-10V analog voltage signal.

. Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.

. Sink current according to IEC 60929.

. Source current.

b) 10-0 V reverse analog voltage signal.

c) DSI digital communication.

d) DALI broadcast communication per IEC 60929:

. Logarithmic intensity values complying with IEC 60929.

. Linear intensity values for use with LED color intensity control.

e) PWM per IEC 60929.

6. Switching Requirements:

a. Rated Life of Relays: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all

lighting loads.

b. Switch load in a manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is

applied to and removed from load circuits.

c. Provide output fully rated for continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and

resistive loads.

G. Device Finishes:

1. Wall Controls: Match finishes specified for wiring devices in Section 26 2726, unless


2. Standard Colors: Comply with NEMA WD1 where applicable.

3. Color Variation in Same Product Family: Maximum delta E of 1, CIE L*a*b color

units.

4. Visible Parts: Exhibit ultraviolet color stability when tested with multiple actinic light

sources as defined in ASTM D4674. Provide proof of testing upon request.

H. Interface with building automation system as specified in Mechanical Sections.

2.3 LED DRIVERS

A. General Requirements:

1. Operate for at least 50,000 hours at maximum case temperature and 90 percent non-

condensing relative humidity.

2. Provide thermal fold-back protection by automatically reducing power output

(dimming) to protect LED driver and LED light engine/fixture from damage due to

over-temperature conditions that approach or exceed the LED driver's maximum

operating temperature at calibration point.

3. Provide integral recording of operating hours and maximum operating temperature to

aid in troubleshooting and warranty claims.

4. Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges without impairment when

tested according to IEC 61000-4-2.

5. Manufactured in a facility that employs ESD reduction practices in compliance with

ANSI/ESD S20.20.

PROJECT NAME




6. UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.

7. UL Type TL rated where possible to allow for easier fixture evaluation and listing of

different driver series.

8. UL 1598C listed for field replacement as applicable.

9. Designed and tested to withstand Category A surges of 4,000 V according to IEEE

C62.41.2 without impairment of performance.

10. Class A sound rating; Inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient.

11. Demonstrate no visible change in light output with a variation of plus or minus 10

percent change in line-voltage input.

12. LED drivers of the same family/series to track evenly across multiple fixtures at all

light levels.

13. Offer programmable output currents in 10 mA increments within designed driver

operating ranges for custom fixture length and lumen output configurations, while

meeting a low-end dimming range of 100 to 1 percent or 100 to 5 percent as applicable.

14. Meet NEMA 410 inrush requirements.

15. Employ integral fault protection up to 277 V to prevent LED driver damage or failure in

the event of incorrect application of line-voltage to communication link inputs.

16. LED driver may be remote located up to 100 feet (30 m) from LED light engine

depending on power outputs required and wire gauge utilized by installer.

B. 3-Wire Control:

1. Provide integral fault protection to prevent driver failure in the event of a mis-wire.

2. Operate from input voltage of 120 V through 277 V at 50/60 Hz.

C. Digital Control (when used with compatible Lutron lighting control systems):

1. Employ power failure memory; LED driver to automatically return to the previous

state/light level upon restoration of utility power.


3. Automatically go to 100 percent light output upon loss of control link voltage and lock

out system commands until digital control link voltage is restored. Manufacturer to

offer UL 924 compliance achievable through use of external Lutron Model LUT-ELI-

3PSH interface upon request.

4. Each driver responds independently per system maximum:

a. Up to 32 occupant sensors.

b. Up to 16 daylight sensors.

5. Responds to digital load shed command. (Example: If light output is at 30 percent and a

load shed command of 10 percent is received, the ballast automatically sets the

maximum light output at 90 percent and lowers current light output by three percent to

27 percent).

D. Product(s):

1. Forward Phase (Neutral Wire Required), 3-Wire, and Digital Control, One Percent

Dimming; Lutron A-Series (LTE-Series):

a. Dimming Range: 100 to one percent relative light output.

b. Complies with FCC requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 15, for commercial and

PROJECT NAME




residential applications at 120 V.

c. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20 percent at full output for 40 W

loads; complies with ANSI C82.11.

d. Constant Current Drivers:

1) Support for downlights and pendant fixtures from 200 mA to 2.1 A to ensure

a compatible driver exists.

a) Support LED arrays up to 53 W.

b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) or Constant Current Reduction (CCR)

dimming methods available.

c) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.

2) Support for troffers, linear pendants, and linear recessed fixtures from 200

mA to 2.1 A to ensure a compatible driver exists.





3) Support for cove and under-cabinet fixtures from 200 mA to 2.1 A to ensure a

compatible driver exists.




c) UL listed.

e. Constant Voltage Drivers:

1) Support for downlights and pendant fixtures from 10 V to 60 V (in 0.5 V

steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists.


b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) dimming method.


2) Support for troffers, linear pendants, and linear recessed fixtures from 10 V to

60 V (in 0.5 V steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists.




3) Support for cove and under-cabinet fixtures from 10 V to 60 V (in 0.5 V




c) UL listed.

2. 3-Wire and Digital Control, One Percent Dimming; Lutron A-Series (L3D-Series):


b. Complies with FCC requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 15, for commercial

applications at 120 V or 277 V.

c. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20 percent at full output for loads

greater than 25 W typical (higher for select models); complies with ANSI C82.11.

PROJECT NAME






















c) UL listed.
















c) UL listed.

3. Digital Control, One Percent Dimming with Soft-On and Fade-to-Black Low End

Performance; Lutron EcoSystem H-Series (LDE1-Series):

a. Dimming Range: 100 to one percent measured output current.

b. Smooth fade-to-on and fade-to-black low end dimming performance for an

incandescent-like dimming experience.

c. Typically dissipates 0.2 W standby power at 120 V and 0.3 W standby power at

277 V.

d. Complies with FCC requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 15, for commercial

applications at 120-277 V.

PROJECT NAME




e. Employs true Constant Current Reduction (CCR) dimming method from 100 to

five percent light level and Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) dimming method

from five percent to off.

f. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) frequency of 240 Hz.

g. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20 percent at full output for drivers

greater than 25 W; complies with ANSI C82.11.

h. UL Class 2 output.

i. Driver outputs to be short circuit protected, open circuit protected, and overload

protected.

j. Constant Current Driver; Lutron K-Case Form Factor: Support for fixtures from

220 mA to 1.4 A over multiple operating ranges.

1) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.

2) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.

k. Constant Current Driver; Lutron M-Case Form Factor: Support for fixtures from

400 mA to 2.1 A over multiple operating ranges.


2) Models available to meet the Design Lights Consortium (DLC) power line

quality requirements.

4. 4-Wire, 0-10v Dimming

a. Dimming Range: 100 to 10 percent measured output current


A. Provide power interfaces as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated.

B. General Requirements:


2. Rated for use in air-handling spaces as defined in UL 2043.

3. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply.

4. Diagnostics and Service: Replacing power interface does not require re-programming of


C. Product(s):

1. Phase-Adaptive Power Module; Lutron PHPM-PA: Provides interface for phase

control input to provide full 16 A circuit output of forward/reverse phase control for

compatible loads.

2. Switching Power Module; Lutron PHPM-SW: Provides interface for phase control or

switched input to provide full 16 A circuit output of switching for compatible non-dim

loads.

3. Phase-Adaptive Power Module with 3-Wire Fluorescent/LED Input; Lutron PHPM-

WBX: Provides interface for fluorescent ballast/LED driver control input to provide full

16 A circuit output for compatible loads.

4. Ten Volt Interface; Lutron GRX-TVI: Provides interface for phase control input to

provide full 16 A circuit output of switching and 0-10 V low voltage control for

PROJECT NAME




compatible fluorescent electronic dimming ballasts or LED drivers.

2.5 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL INTERFACES

A. Provide low-voltage control interfaces as indicated or as required to control the loads as

indicated.

B. UL listed.

C. Contact Closure Interface:

1. Product: Lutron Model QSE-IO.

2. The contact closure input device to accept both momentary and maintained contact

closures.

3. The contact closure output device can be configured for maintained or pulsed outputs.

4. Contact closure can be programmed using conditional logic off of a state variable such

as time of day or partition status.

D. Wallbox Input Closure Interface:

1. Product: Lutron Model QSE-CI-WCI.

2. Mounts in wallbox behind contact closure keypad to provide interface for up to eight

contact closure inputs.


closures.

E. RS232 and Ethernet Interface:

1. Product: Lutron Model QSE-CI-NWK-E.

2. Provide ability to communicate via Ethernet or RS232 to audiovisual equipment,

touchscreens, etc.

3. Provide control of:

a. Light scene selections.

b. Fine-tuning of light scene levels with raise/lower.

c. Shade group presets.

d. Fine-tuning of shade preset levels with raise/lower.

e. Simulate system wall station button presses and releases.

4. Provide status monitoring of:

a. Light scene status.

b. Shade group status.

c. Wall station button presses and releases.

d. Wall station LEDs.

5. Provide ability to send custom output strings.

F. DMX Interface:

1. Product: Lutron Model QSM-CI-DMX.

2. Provide ability to:

a. Map a single zone intensity to a single DMX512 lighting channel.

PROJECT NAME




b. Map a single zone intensity to three DMX512 channels for RGB/CMY color

control.

c. Map a single zone intensity to a single DMX512 integration channel.

d. Smoothly transition from one color to another in a cross fade.

e. Automatically sequence through a variety of colors.

f. Download, program, and customize a color wheel for each unit.

G. Sensor Modules:

1. Products:

a. Sensor module with both wired and wireless inputs; Lutron Model QSM2-4W-C.

b. Sensor module with wired inputs only; Lutron Model QSMX-4W-C.

c. Sensor module with wireless inputs only; Lutron Model QSM2-XW-C.

2. Wired Modules:

a. Provide wired inputs for:

1) Occupancy sensors.

2) Daylight sensors.

3) IR receivers for personal control.

4) Digital ballast wall stations.

3. Wireless Modules:

a. Provide wireless communication inputs for:



3) Wireless controller.

b. RF Range: 30 feet (9 m) between sensor and compatible RF receiving devices.

c. RF Frequency: 434 MHz; operates in FCC governed frequency spectrum for

periodic operation; continuous transmission spectrum is not permitted.

4. Communicate sensor information to wired low-voltage digital link for use by

compatible devices.

2.6 MAIN UNITS (LUTRON GRAFIK EYE QS)

A. Product: Lutron GRAFIK Eye QS.

B. Provide main units with configuration and quantity of zones as indicated or as required to

control the loads as indicated.

C. Finish: Standard white with white top door, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Engrave units with button, zone, and scene descriptions as indicated on the drawings.

E. Integrated Wireless Capability:

1. Provide wireless communication inputs for:

a. Occupancy sensors.

b. Daylight sensors.

c. Wireless controller.

PROJECT NAME




2. RF Range: 30 feet (9 m) between sensor and compatible RF receiving device(s).

3. RF Frequency: 434 MHz; operate in FCC governed frequency spectrum for periodic

operation; continuous transmission spectrum is not permitted.

F. Preset Lighting Control with Zone Override:


2. User-programmable zone and scene names.


4. Astronomical time clock and programmer interface provides access to:

a. Scene selections.

b. Fade zone to a level.

c. Fine-tuning of preset levels with scene raise/lower.

d. Lock out scenes and zones.

e. Fine-tuning of light levels with individual zone raise/lower.

f. Terminal block for wired infrared signal input.

g. Enable/disable wall station.

5. Light intensity with real time energy savings by digital display.


7. Integral wide angle infrared receiver.



9. Direct Low-Voltage Control of Digital Ballasts and LED drivers (120 V, 277 V and/or

347 V Lighting):

a. Electronically link drivers to a zone for both dimming and turning on/off.

b. Electronically assign daylight sensors to drivers and line voltage dimmers for

proportional daylight harvesting.

c. Single integral controller with Class 1 or Class 2 isolated digital output signal

conforming to IEC 60929; capable of direct control without interface.

10. Creates daylighting rows independent of control zones.

11. Capable of re-zoning without re-wiring using programming display on unit.

12. Outputs can be virtually mapped to other device's outputs.

13. Zone raise/lower buttons capable of controlling local lighting loads connected to the

main unit or remote lighting zones in the system.

G. Preset Shade Control with Zone Override:

1. Preset expandable shade control: Provide up to three columns of shade control.



H. Provides one direct-wired occupancy sensor connection without interface or power pack.

2.7 LIGHTING CONTROL MODULES

A. Provide lighting control modules as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated.

PROJECT NAME





1. Listed to UL 508 as industrial control equipment.

2. Delivered and installed as a listed factory-assembled panel.

3. Passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means.

4. Mounting: Surface.

5. Connection without interface to wired:



c. IR receivers for personal control.

6. LED status indicators confirm communication with occupancy sensors, daylight

sensors, and IR receivers.

7. Contact Closure Input:

a. Directly accept contact closure input from a dry contact closure or sold-state output

without interface to:

1) Activate scenes.

a) Scene activation from momentary or maintained closure.

2) Enable or disable after hours.

a) Automatic sweep to user-specified level after user-specified time has

elapsed.

b) System will provide occupants a visual warning prior to sweeping lights to

user-specified level.

c) Occupant can reset timeout by interacting with the lighting system.

3) Activate or deactivate demand response (load shed).

a) Load shed event will reduce lighting load by user-specified amount.

8. Emergency Contact Closure Input:

a. Turn all zones to full output during emergency state via direct contact closure input

from UL 924 listed emergency lighting interface, security system or fire alarm

system.

b. Allow configurable zone response during emergency state.

c. Disable control operation until emergency signal is cleared.

9. Supplies power for control link for keypads and control interfaces.

10. Distributes sensor data among multiple lighting control modules.

11. Capable of being controlled via wireless sensors and controls.

C. Switching Lighting Control Modules:

1. Product(s):

a. Lutron SoftSwitch Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-4S16-S: 16 A continuous-use

per channel.

2. Switching:

a. Rated Life of Relay: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all lighting

loads.

b. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power

is applied to and removed from load circuits.

c. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.

PROJECT NAME




d. Module to integrate up to four individually controlled zones.

e. Utilize air gap off, activated when user selects "off" at any control to disconnect

the load from line supply.

D. 0-10V Lighting Control Modules:

1. Product(s):

a. Lutron 0-10 V Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-4T16-S: 16 A continuous-use per

channel.

2. Coordination between Low Voltage Dimming Module and Line Voltage Relay:


3. Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling following light sources:

a. 0-10 V analog voltage signal.

1) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10 V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.

2) Sink current per IEC 60929.

b. 10-0 V analog voltage signal.

1) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10 V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.


4. Switching:


loads.







E. Digital Fixture Lighting Control Modules:

1. Product(s):

a. Lutron EcoSystem Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-1ECO-S: One EcoSystem

Digital Link.

b. Lutron EcoSystem Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-2ECO-S: Two EcoSystem

Digital Links.

2. Provides two-way feedback with digital fixtures for energy monitoring, light level

status, lamp failure reporting, and ballast/driver failure reporting.

3. Provide testing capability using manual override buttons.

4. Each low-voltage digital communication link to support up to 64 ballasts or LED

drivers capable of NFPA 70 Class 1 or Class 2 installation.

F. Total Light Management Control Module (Digital Lighting and Shades Control):

1. Product: Lutron EcoSystem with Shades Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-2ECO-PS120

- Two EcoSystem Digital Links.

2. Ten fused 30 W (60 W peak) 24 VDC outputs provide power to compatible shades,

drapery drive units, keypads, and accessories.

3. Provide power for 10 to 30 shades dependent on shade dimensions.

PROJECT NAME




4. Provide smart diagnostics for system verification.


6. Each low-voltage digital communication link to support up to 64 ballasts capable of

NFPA 70 Class 1 or Class 2 installation.

2.8 WALL STATIONS

A. Line Voltage Control Unit:

1. Preset lighting control with zone override:

a. Intensity for each zone indicated by means of one illuminated bar graph per zone.

b. Each zone and scene to be field customizable to indicate each zone and scene

name.

c. Astronomical time clock and programmer interface.

1) Provide access to:

a) Scene selections.

b) Fade zone to a level.

c) Fine-tuning of preset levels with scene raise/lower.

d) Lock out scenes and zones.

e) Fine-tuning of light levels with individual zone raise/lower.

f) Terminal block for wired infrared signal input.

g) Enable/disable wall station.

d. Light intensity with real time energy savings by digital display.

e. Fade time indicated by digital display for current scene while fading.

f. Incorporate built-in wide angle infrared receiver.

g. For temporary local overrides, individual raise/lower buttons to allow zones to be


h. Direct low-voltage control of digital ballasts (120V/277V lighting).

2. Color:

a. Color to be white, ivory or grey. Custom colors to be coordinated with the

Architect.

B. Architectural Low Voltage Wall Stations:

1. Electronics:

a. Use RS485 wiring for low voltage communication.

2. Functionality:

a. LEDs to reflect the true system status. LEDs to remain illuminated if the button

press was properly processed or the LEDs turn off if the button press was not

processed.

b. Allow for easy reprogramming without replacing unit.

3. Provide faceplates with concealed mounting hardware.

4. Color:

PROJECT NAME




a. Color to be white, ivory or grey. Custom colors to be coordinated with the

Architect.

2.9 LIGHTING CONTROL MODULE

A. Lighting Control Module:

1. Mechanical:

a. Listed to UL 508 as industrial control equipment approved as applicable.

b. Delivered and installed as a UL listed factory assembled panel.

c. Panels passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means.

2. Surface mounted.

3. Switching:

a. Rated life of relay: Minimum 1,000,000 cycles.




d. Module to integrate up to 4 individually controlled zones, each with a capacity of

up to 16 amps, of high in-rush lighting load (LED, electronic low-voltage and

motor loads).


a. Occupancy sensors

b. Daylight sensors

c. IR receivers for personal control

5. Connects to Lighting Management Panel via RS485.



7. Thermal protection reports to Light Management System if module overheats.

8. Contact Closure Input.

a. Directly accept contact closure input from a dry contact closure or solid-state

output without interface to:

1) Activate scenes.

2) Enable or disable time clock.

9. Emergency Contact Closure Input


from UL 924 Listed Emergency Lighting Interface, security system or fire alarm

system.



B. 0-10V Lighting Control Module:

1. Meet the following requirements:

a. Coordination between low voltage dimming module and line voltage relay:

PROJECT NAME





b. Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling following light

sources:

1) 0-10V analog voltage signal.

a) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.

b) Sink current via IEC 60929.

2. Mechanical:

a. Listed to UL 508 as applicable.

b. Delivered and installed as a UL listed factory assembled panel.

c. Panels passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means.

3. Surface mounted.

4. Switching:

a. Rated life of relay: Minimum 1,000,000 cycles.




d. Module to integrate up to 4 individually controlled zones, each with a capacity of

up to 16 amps, of high in-rush lighting load (LED, electronic low-voltage and

motor loads).


a. Occupancy sensors

b. Daylight sensors

c. IR receivers for personal control

6. Connects to Lighting Management Panel via RS485.



8. Thermal protection reports to Light Management System if module overheats.

9. Contact Closure Input.

a. Directly accept contact closure input from a dry contact closure or solid-state

output without interface to:

1) Activate scenes

2) Enable or disable time clock.

10. Emergency Contact Closure Input


from UL 924 Listed Emergency Lighting Interface, security system or fire alarm

system



2.10 SENSORS

A. Sensors: Occupancy sensors, daylight sensors as specified in Division 26 Section 260923

“Lighting Control Devices”.

PROJECT NAME




2.11 REMOTE ACCESS

A. Provide web-based support through control panel or head end to allow troubleshooting,

diagnostics and software upgrades.


A. Perform full-function testing on completed assemblies at end of line. Statistical sampling is

not acceptable.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables.”

B. Provide complete installation of system in accordance with Contract Documents.

C. Define each dimmer's load type and set control functions.

D. Provide equipment at locations and in quantities indicated on Drawings. Provide any

additional equipment required to provide control intent.

E. Mount exterior daylight sensors to point due north with constant view of daylight.

F. Ensure that daylight sensor placement minimizes sensors view of electric light sources;

ceiling mounted and luminaire-mounted daylight sensors shall not have direct view of

luminaries.

G. Systems Integration:

1. Equipment Integration Meeting Visit

a. Facility Representative to coordinate meeting between Cleveland Clinic

Representative, Lighting Control System Manufacturer and other related

equipment manufacturers to discuss equipment and integration procedures.

3.2 STARTUP AND PROGRAMMING




PROJECT NAME






2. Make a visit upon completion of installation of modular dimming control system:



c. Program system data.

d. Verify proper connection of digital control link.

e. Verify proper operation of manufacturers interfacing equipment.

f. Obtain sign-off on System functions.

g. User to be trained on System operation.

B. After Hours Start-up

1. Provide factory certified Field Service Engineer to perform manufacturer’s start-up

procedures outside normal working hours (Monday through Friday, 7a.m. to 5 p.m.)

C. Tech Support


3.3 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Training Visit

1. Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide 2 days additional on-site system

training to Cleveland Clinic personnel.

B. On-site Walkthrough

1. Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide a factory certified Field Service

Engineer to demonstrate System functionality to the Commissioning Agent.

3.4 MAINTENANCE

A. Capable of providing on-site service support within 24 hours anywhere in continental United

States and within 72 hours worldwide except where special visas are required.

B. Offer renewable service contract on yearly basis, to include parts, factory labor, and annual

training visits. Make service contracts available up to ten years after date of System startup.


PROJECT NAME




THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

PROJECT NAME



NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015 260943 - 1

SECTION 260943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS

PART 1- GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Network Lighting Control System.

2. Power interfaces.

3. Main units (Lutron Grafik Eye QS).

4. Lighting control modules (Lutron Energi Savr Node).

5. Energy meter.

6. Lighting management hubs.

7. Lighting management system computers.

8. Lighting management system software.

9. Control stations.

10. Low-voltage control interfaces.

11. Wired sensors.

12. Wireless sensors.

13. Accessories.


1. Section 265100 “Interior Lighting” for LED drivers controlled by Network Lighting

Control System.


cabling.


cabling.

4. Section 260923 “Lighting Control Devices” for occupancy sensors used in conjunction

with Central Dimming Control System.

5. Section 260933 “Central Dimming Controls” for factory assembled dimming and

switching panels, interfaces and modules. Low voltage wall stations, control interfaces

and sensors.

6. Section 260936 “Modular Dimming Controls” for factory assembled dimming control,

interfaces, and modules. Low voltage wall stations, control interfaces, and sensors.


A. Network Lighting Control System: Computer-based software that provides control,

PROJECT NAME




configuration, monitoring and reports. Lighting management panels, low voltage wall

stations, control interfaces and sensors, and LED drivers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show installation detail for Network Lighting Controls.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field installed wiring.

2. Submit typical wiring diagrams for all components including, but not limited to, power

interfaces, wall stations, and lighting control modules, low voltage control interfaces,

dimming drivers, switching modules and sensors.

3. Shall include catalog cut sheets with performance specifications including historical

testing data demonstrating complete compliance to all of the Specifications herein.




E. Shall include a complete schematic of the System.

F. Sequence of Operation to describe how each area operates and how any building wide

functionality is described.


A. Manufacturer: Minimum 10 years experience in manufacture of Network Lighting Control

Systems.

B. Network Lighting Control System shall be UL Listed specifically for the required loads.

Manufacturer shall provide evidence of compliance on request.

C. Manufacturer shall have their quality system registered to the ISO 9001 Quality Standard,

including in-house engineering for all product design activities. Due to the exclusion of the

Design Control element, ISO 9002 Registration is not acceptable.

D. Qualified to supply specified products and to honor claims against product presented in

accordance with warranty.

E. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Guidelines.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation


PROJECT NAME




A. Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive

equipment:

1. Ambient Temperature:

a. Lighting Control System: 0º to 40º C (32º to 104º F).

2. Relative Humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing.

3. Lighting Control System must be protected from dust during installation.

B. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute

limits.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Network Lighting Controls shall have minimum standard five (5) year warranty.

1.9 COMMISSIONING






2. Make a visit upon completion of installation of Network Lighting Control System:



c. Verify proper connection of panel links (low voltage/data) and address panel.

d. Check dimming panel load types and currents and remove by-pass jumpers.

e. Verify System operation control by control, circuit by circuit.

f. Verify proper operation of manufacturers interfacing equipment.

g. Obtain sign-off on System functions.

h. Cleveland Clinic to be trained on System operation.

1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Make ordering of new equipment for expansions, replacements, and spare parts available to

the Cleveland Clinic 24 hours a day seven days a week.

B. Make new replacement parts available for minimum of ten years from date of manufacture.

C. Provide factory direct technical support hotline 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.

D.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by:

PROJECT NAME




1. Lutron – Quantum.

2. Encilium – ECS.

B. The Contractor shall use only Network Lighting Control System software and hardware by

the listed manufacturer which meets the requirement and intent of this Specification.

C. Source Limitations: Furnish products by a single manufacturer and obtain from a single

supplier.

2.2 DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) as

suitable for the purpose indicated.

B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required equipment, conduit, boxes,

wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, accessories, software, system programming, etc. as

necessary for a complete operating system that provides the control intent indicated.

C. Shade Control Requirements as required per project scope:

1. Capable of operating shades and recalling shade presets via keypad, contact closure

input, infrared receiver, lighting management system software, or other lighting control

system interface.

2. Capable of operating any individual, group, or subgroup of shade electronic drive units

within system without requiring separate group controllers.

3. Capable of assigning and reassigning individual, groups, and subgroups of shades to

any control within system without requiring additional wiring or hardware changes.

4. Capable of controlling shade speed for tracking within plus or minus 0.125 inch (3.17

mm) throughout entire travel.

5. Provide 10 year power failure memory for preset stops, open and close limits, shade

grouping and sub grouping and system configuration.

6. Capable of synchronizing multiple shade electronic drive units of the same size to start,

stop and move in unison.

7. Capable of stopping shades within accuracy of 0.125 inch (3.17 mm) at any point

between open and close limits.

8. Capable of storing up to 250 programmable stop points, including open, close, and any

other position.

9. Capable of controlling lights and shades from single wall control button.

D. Design lighting control equipment for 10 year operational life while operating continually at

any temperature in an ambient temperature range of 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 104

degrees F (40 degrees C) and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.

E. Electrostatic Discharge Tolerance: Design and test equipment to withstand electrostatic

discharges without impairment when tested according to IEC 61000-4-2.

F. Dimming and Switching (Relay) Equipment:

1. Designed so that electrolytic capacitors operate at least 36 degrees F (20 degrees C)

PROJECT NAME




below the capacitor's maximum temperature rating when the device is under fully

loaded conditions at maximum rated temperature.

2. Inrush Tolerance:

a. Utilize load-handling thyristors (SCRs and triacs), field effect transistors (FETs)

and isolated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs) with maximum current rating at least

two times the rated operating current of the dimmer/relay.

b. Capable of withstanding repetitive inrush current of 50 times the operating current

without impacting lifetime of the dimmer/relay.

3. Surge Tolerance:

a. Panels: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 6,000 V, 3,000 amps according

to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEC 61000-4-5 without impairment to performance.

b. Other Power Handling Devices: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 6,000

V, 200 amps according to IEEE C62.41.2 without impairment to performance.

4. Power Failure Recovery: When power is interrupted and subsequently restored, within

3 seconds lights to automatically return to same levels (dimmed setting, full on, or full

off) as prior to power interruption.

5. Dimming Requirements:

a. Line Noise Tolerance: Provide real-time cycle-by-cycle compensation for

incoming line voltage variations including changes in RMS voltage (plus or minus

2 percent change in RMS voltage per cycle), frequency shifts (plus or minus 2 Hz

change in frequency per second), dynamic harmonics, and line noise.

1) Systems not providing integral cycle-by-cycle compensation to include

external power conditioning equipment as part of dimming system.

b. Incorporate electronic "soft-start" default at initial turn-on that smoothly ramps

lights up to the appropriate levels within 0.5 seconds.

c. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply.

d. Control all light sources in smooth and continuous manner. Dimmers with visible

steps are not acceptable.

e. Load Types:

1) Assign a load type to each dimmer that will provide a proper dimming curve

for the specific light source to be controlled.

2) Provide capability of being field-configured to have load types assigned per

circuit.

f. Minimum and Maximum Light Levels: User adjustable on a circuit-by-circuit

basis.

g. Line Voltage Dimmers:

1) Dimmers for Magnetic Low Voltage (MLV) Transformers:

a) Provide circuitry designed to control and provide a symmetrical AC

waveform to input of magnetic low voltage transformers per UL 1472.

b) Dimmers using unipolar load current devices (such as FETs or SCRs) to

include DC current protection in the event of a single device failure.

2) Dimmers for Electronic Low Voltage (ELV) Transformers: Operate

transformers via reverse phase control. Alternately, forward phase control

dimming may be used if dimming equipment manufacturer has recommended

specific ELV transformers being provided.

PROJECT NAME




h. Low Voltage Dimming Modules:

1) Coordination between Low Voltage Dimming Module and Line Voltage

Relay: Capable of being electronically linked to a single zone.

2) Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling the following

light sources:

a) 0-10V analog voltage signal.

. Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.

. Sink current according to IEC 60929.

. Source current.

b) 10-0V reverse analog voltage signal.

c) DSI digital communication.

d) DALI broadcast communication per IEC 60929:

. Logarithmic intensity values complying with IEC 60929.

. Linear intensity values for use with LED color intensity control.

e) PWM per IEC 60929.

6. Switching Requirements:

a. Rated Life of Relays: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all

lighting loads.

b. Switch load in a manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is

applied to and removed from load circuits.

c. Provide output fully rated for continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and

resistive loads.

G. Device Finishes:

1. Wall Controls: Match finishes specified for wiring devices in Section 26 2726, unless


2. Standard Colors: Comply with NEMA WD1 where applicable.

H. Interface with building automation system as specified in Mechanical Sections.

2.3 POWER PANELS

A. Provide power panels with configurations as indicated on the drawings.



2. Comply with UL 508A and IEC 60669-2-1 as applicable.


4. Field wiring accessible from front of panel without removing dimmer assemblies or

other components.


6. Shipped with each dimmer in mechanical bypass position by means of jumper bar

inserted between input and load terminals. Jumpers to carry full rated load current and

be reusable at any time. Mechanical bypass device to allow for switching operation of

connected load with dimmer removed by means of circuit breaker.

PROJECT NAME




7. Provided with branch circuit protection for each input circuit unless the panel is a

dedicated feed-through type panel or otherwise indicated on the drawings.

8. Branch Circuit Breakers:

a. Listed to UL 489 as molded case circuit breaker for use on lighting circuits.

b. Provided with visual trip indicator.

c. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to match the short

circuit current rating.

d. Thermal-magnetic construction for overload, short-circuit, and over-temperature

protection. Use of breakers without thermal protection requires dimmers/relays to

have integral thermal protection to prevent failures when overloaded or ambient

temperature is above rating of panel.

e. Equipped with provision for tag-out/lock-out devices to secure circuit breakers in

off position when servicing loads.

f. Replaceable without moving or replacing dimmer/relay assemblies or other panel

components.

g. Listed as switch duty (SWD) so that loads can be switched on and off by breakers.

9. Provide panels with listed short circuit current rating as indicated

a. Minimum Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): [25,000 A; 45,000 A; 65,000 A;

or [_________A.].

10. Panel Processor Lutron Circuit Selector:

a. Provide the following capabilities:

1) Operate circuit directly from panel processor for system diagnostics and

provide feedback of system operation.

2) Electronically assign each circuit to any zone in lighting control system.

3) Determine normal/emergency function of panel and set emergency lighting

levels.

b. Where indicated on the drawings, panels to provide two control links. Each circuit

to be capable of transferring control based on independent programming between

architectural control system and theatrical controls utilizing the USITT DMX-512

1990 or ESTA DMX-512A protocol.

c. React to changes from control within 20 milliseconds.

11. Diagnostics and Service:

a. Replacing dimmer/relay does not require re-programming of system or processor.

b. Include diagnostic LEDs for dimmers/relays to verify proper operation and assist

in system troubleshooting.

c. Include tiered control scheme for dealing with component failure that minimizes

loss of control for occupant.

1) If lighting control system fails, lights to remain at current level. Panel

processor provides local control of lights until system is repaired.

2) If panel processor fails, lights to remain at current level. Circuit breakers can

be used to turn lights off or to full light output, allowing non-dim control of

lights until panel processor is repaired.

3) If dimmer fails, factory-installed mechanical bypass jumpers to allow each

dimmer to be mechanically bypassed. Mechanical bypass device to allow for

switching operation of connected load with dimmer removed by means of

PROJECT NAME




circuit breaker.

C. Product(s):

1. Specification Grade Dimming Panels:

a. Product: Lutron GP Series Dimming Panels.

b. Mounting: Surface.

c. Dimmers designed and tested specifically to control incandescent/tungsten,

magnetic low voltage, electronic low voltage, neon/cold cathode, fluorescent

dimming ballasts, and non-dim loads.

d. Unless otherwise indicated or required, utilize universal 16 A continuous-use listed

dimmers.

e. For loads requiring 0-10V, PWM, or DSI control, utilize compatible multiple load

type low voltage dimming modules.

f. Limit current rise time to minimum 350 microseconds as measured from 10 to 90

percent of load current waveform and minimum 525 microseconds as measured

from 0 to 100 percent of load current waveform at 50 percent rated dimmer

capacity at a 90 degree conduction angle. Current rise time to be minimum 400

microseconds as measured from 10 to 90 percent of load current waveform and

minimum 600 microseconds as measured from 0 to 100 percent of load current

waveform at 100 percent rated dimmer capacity at a 90 degree conduction angle.

g. Load faults only affect the given circuit.

2. Modular Dimming Panels:

a. Product: Lutron LP Series Dimming Panels.

b. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated.

c. Unless otherwise indicated or required, utilize multiple load type 16 A feed

continuous-use listed dimming/switching modules.

d. For switching only circuits, utilize relays rated for minimum of 1,000,000 cycles at

fully rated current for all lighting loads.



3. Modular Combination Panels:

a. Product: Lutron CCP Series Custom Combination Panels.


c. Unless otherwise indicated or required, utilize multiple load type 16 A feed

continuous-use listed dimming/switching modules.

d. For switching only circuits, utilize relays rated for typical 1,000,000 cycles at fully

rated 16 A for all lighting loads.



4. Relay Panels:

a. Product: Lutron XP Series Switching Panels.


c. Switching Requirements:

1) Utilize 20 A continuous-use rated switching modules; able to switch 20 A

receptacles.

PROJECT NAME




2) Rated Life of Relay: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all

lighting loads.

3) Switch load in a manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when

power is applied to and removed from load circuits.

4) Provide output fully rated for continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and

resistive loads.

5. DC Dimming Panels:

a. Product: Lutron DCI Series Dimming Panels.

b. Mounting: Surface.

c. Meet recommended electrical noise levels of MRI system manufacturers.

d. Operate lamps free from audible noise and flicker throughout entire dimming

range.

e. In case of control system failure, supervisory circuit to shut down power to load.

f. Automatically detect and compensate for lamp failures to maintain consistent DC

voltage level.

2.4 LED DRIVERS

A. General Requirements:

1. Operate for at least 50,000 hours at maximum case temperature and 90 percent non-

condensing relative humidity.

2. Provide thermal fold-back protection by automatically reducing power output

(dimming) to protect LED driver and LED light engine/fixture from damage due to

over-temperature conditions that approach or exceed the LED driver's maximum

operating temperature at calibration point.

3. Provide integral recording of operating hours and maximum operating temperature to

aid in troubleshooting and warranty claims.

4. Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges without impairment when

tested according to IEC 61000-4-2.

5. Manufactured in a facility that employs ESD reduction practices in compliance with

ANSI/ESD S20.20.

6. UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.

7. UL Type TL rated where possible to allow for easier fixture evaluation and listing of

different driver series.

8. UL 1598C listed for field replacement as applicable.

9. Designed and tested to withstand Category A surges of 4,000 V according to IEEE

C62.41.2 without impairment of performance.

10. Class A sound rating; Inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient.

11. Demonstrate no visible change in light output with a variation of plus or minus 10

percent change in line-voltage input.

12. LED drivers of the same family/series to track evenly across multiple fixtures at all

light levels.

13. Offer programmable output currents in 10 mA increments within designed driver

operating ranges for custom fixture length and lumen output configurations, while

meeting a low-end dimming range of 100 to 1 percent or 100 to 5 percent as applicable.

PROJECT NAME




14. Meet NEMA 410 inrush requirements.

15. Employ integral fault protection up to 277 V to prevent LED driver damage or failure in

the event of incorrect application of line-voltage to communication link inputs.

16. LED driver may be remote located up to 100 feet (30 m) from LED light engine

depending on power outputs required and wire gauge utilized by installer.

B. 3-Wire Control:

1. Provide integral fault protection to prevent driver failure in the event of a mis-wire.


C. Digital Control (when used with compatible lighting control systems):

1. Employ power failure memory; LED driver to automatically return to the previous

state/light level upon restoration of utility power.


3. Automatically go to 100 percent light output upon loss of control link voltage and lock

out system commands until digital control link voltage is restored. Manufacturer to

offer UL 924 compliance achievable through use of external Lutron Model LUT-ELI-

3PSH interface upon request.

4. Each driver responds independently per system maximum:

a. Up to 32 occupant sensors.

b. Up to 16 daylight sensors.

5. Responds to digital load shed command.

D. Product(s):

1. Forward Phase (Neutral Wire Required), 3-Wire, and Digital Control, One Percent

Dimming



applications at 120 V.

c. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20 percent at full output for 40 W

loads; complies with ANSI C82.11.















PROJECT NAME








c) UL listed.
















c) UL listed.

2. 3-Wire and Digital Control, One Percent Dimming



applications at 120 V or 277 V.

c. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20 percent at full output for loads

greater than 25 W typical (higher for select models); complies with ANSI C82.11.


















PROJECT NAME





c) UL listed.
















c) UL listed.

3. Digital Control, One Percent Dimming with Soft-On and Fade-to-Black Low End

Performance

a. Dimming Range: 100 to one percent measured output current.

b. Features smooth fade-to-on and fade-to-black low end dimming performance.

c. Typically dissipates 0.2 W standby power at 120 V and 0.3 W standby power at

277 V.

d. Complies with FCC requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 15, for commercial

applications at 120-277 V.

e. Employs true Constant Current Reduction (CCR) dimming method from 100 to

five percent light level and Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) dimming method

from five percent to off.

f. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) frequency of 240 Hz.

g. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20 percent at full output for drivers

greater than 25 W; complies with ANSI C82.11.

h. UL Class 2 output.

i. Driver outputs to be short circuit protected, open circuit protected, and overload

protected.

j. Constant Current Driver: Support for fixtures from 220 mA to 1.4 A over multiple

operating ranges.


2) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.

k. Constant Current Driver: Support for fixtures from 400 mA to 2.1 A over multiple

operating ranges.


2) Models available to meet the Design Lights Consortium (DLC) power line

quality requirements.

PROJECT NAME





A. Provide power interfaces as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated.



2. Rated for use in air-handling spaces as defined in UL 2043.


4. Diagnostics and Service: Replacing power interface does not require re-programming of


C. Product(s):

1. Phase-Adaptive Power Module: Provides interface for phase control input to provide

full 16 A circuit output of forward/reverse phase control for compatible loads.

2. 3-Wire Power Module: Provides interface for phase control input to provide full 16 A

circuit output for compatible line-voltage control LED drivers.

3. Switching Power Module: Provides interface for phase control or switched input to

provide full 16 A circuit output of switching for compatible non-dim loads.

4. Phase-Adaptive Power Module with 3-Wire LED Input: Provides interface for /LED

driver control input to provide full 16 A circuit output for compatible loads.

5. Ten Volt Interface: Provides interface for phase control input to provide full 16 A

circuit output of switching and 0-10 V low voltage control for compatible LED drivers.

2.6 MAIN UNITS (LUTRON GRAFIK EYE QS)

A. Product: Lutron GRAFIK Eye QS.

B. Provide main units with configuration and quantity of zones as indicated or as required to

control the loads as indicated.

C. Connects to lighting management hub via RS485.

D. Finish: Standard white with white top door, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Engrave units with button, zone, and scene descriptions as indicated on the drawings.

F. Integrated Wireless Capability:

1. Provide wireless communication inputs for:



c. Wireless controller.

2. RF Range: 30 feet (9 m) between sensor and compatible RF receiving device(s).

3. RF Frequency: 434 MHz; operate in FCC governed frequency spectrum for periodic

operation; continuous transmission spectrum is not permitted.

G. Preset Lighting Control with Zone Override:


PROJECT NAME




2. User-programmable zone and scene names.


4. Astronomical time clock and programmer interface provides access to:

a. Scene selections.

b. Fade zone to a level.

c. Fine-tuning of preset levels with scene raise/lower.

d. Lock out scenes and zones.

e. Fine-tuning of light levels with individual zone raise/lower.

f. Terminal block for wired infrared signal input.

g. Enable/disable wall station.

5. Light intensity with real time energy savings by digital display.


7. Integral wide angle infrared receiver.



9. Direct Low-Voltage Control of LED drivers (120V or 277V Lighting):

a. Electronically link LED drivers to a zone for both dimming and turning on/off.

b. Electronically assign daylight sensors to LED drivers and line voltage dimmers for

proportional daylight harvesting.

c. Single integral controller with Class 1 or Class 2 isolated digital output signal

conforming to IEC 60929; capable of direct control without interface.

10. Creates daylighting rows independent of control zones.

11. Capable of re-zoning without re-wiring using programming display on unit.

12. Outputs can be virtually mapped to other device's outputs.

13. Zone raise/lower buttons capable of controlling local lighting loads connected to the

main unit or remote lighting zones in the system.

H. Preset Shade Control with Zone Override:

1. Preset expandable shade control: Provide up to three columns of shade control.



I. Provides one direct-wired occupancy sensor connection without interface or power pack.

2.7 LIGHTING CONTROL MODULES

A. Provide lighting control modules as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated.





4. Mounting: Surface.



PROJECT NAME





c. IR receivers for personal control.

6. Connects to lighting management hub via RS485.



8. Contact Closure Input:

a. Directly accept contact closure input from a dry contact closure or sold-state output

without interface to:

1) Activate scenes.

a) Scene activation from momentary or maintained closure.

2) Enable or disable after hours.

a) Automatic sweep to user-specified level after user-specified time has

elapsed.

b) System will provide occupants a visual warning prior to sweeping lights to

user-specified level.

c) Occupant can reset timeout by interacting with the lighting system.

3) Activate or deactivate demand response (load shed).

a) Load shed event will reduce lighting load by user-specified amount.

9. Emergency Contact Closure Input:


from UL 924 listed emergency lighting interface, security system or fire alarm

system.



10. Supplies power for control link for keypads and control interfaces.

11. Distributes sensor data among multiple lighting control modules.

12. Capable of being controlled via wireless sensors and controls.

C. Switching Lighting Control Modules:

1. Product(s):

a. Lutron SoftSwitch Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-4S16-S: 16 A continuous-use

per channel.

b. Lutron SoftSwitch Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-4S20-S: 20 A continuous-use

per channel.

2. Switching:


loads.







PROJECT NAME




D. 0-10V Lighting Control Modules:

1. Product(s):

a. Lutron 0-10V Energi -Savr Node; Model QSN-4T16-S: 16 A continuous-use per

channel.

2. Coordination between Low Voltage Dimming Module and Line Voltage Relay:


3. Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling following light sources:

a. 0-10V analog voltage signal.

1) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.


b. 10V-0V analog voltage signal.

1) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.


4. Switching:


loads.







E. Digital Fixture Lighting Control Modules:

1. Product(s):

a. Lutron EcoSystem Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-1ECO-S: One EcoSystem

Digital Link.

b. Lutron EcoSystem Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-2ECO-S: Two EcoSystem

Digital Links.

2. Provides two-way feedback with digital fixtures for energy monitoring, light level

status, lamp failure reporting, and ballast/driver failure reporting.


4. Each low-voltage digital communication link to support up to 64 ballasts or LED

drivers capable of NFPA 70 Class 1 or Class 2 installation.

F. Total Light Management Control Module (Digital Lighting and Shades Control):

1. Product: Lutron EcoSystem with Shades Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-2ECO-PS120

- Two EcoSystem Digital Links.

2. Ten fused 30W (60W peak) 24V DC outputs provide power to compatible shades,

drapery drive units, keypads, and accessories.

3. Provide power for 10 to 30 shades dependent on shade dimensions.

4. Provide smart diagnostics for system verification.


6. Each low-voltage digital communication link to support up to 64 ballasts capable of

NFPA 70 Class 1 or Class 2 installation.

PROJECT NAME




2.8 ENERGY METER

A. Product: Lutron Quantum CPN5898 Series Class 500 Energy Meter.


1. Provides accurate, real-time energy metering and verification capability through front-

end PC-based software.

2. Factory-calibrated; not requiring preventative/scheduled maintenance or

cleaning/decontamination procedures.

3. Accepts up to three sets of current sensors to monitor up to three loads of the same

voltage with one meter.

4. Contains direct-read 8-digit LCD display of cumulative kWh.

5. Current Sensors: Split-core; capable of being placed up to 500 feet (152 m) from the

meter without power interruption.

6. Connects to server via Ethernet.

7. UL listed.

8. Accuracy: Plus/minus 0.5 percent, certified to ANSI C12.20.

9. NEMA 12 housing.

10. Provide voltage and current ratings suitable for the installed location.

2.9 DIGITAL SWITCHING MODULES

A. Provide digital switching modules as indicated or as required to control the loads as

indicated.


1. Provide continuous 3-wire signal dimming to compatible 3-wire electronic dimming

drivers.


3. Connect without interface to:

a. Occupancy sensor.

b. Daylight sensor.

c. Personal control input (wall station or infrared receiver).

2.10 LIGHTING MANAGEMENT HUBS

A. Product: Lutron Quantum Light Management Hub.

B. Provided in a pre-assembled NEMA listed enclosure with terminal blocks listed for field

wiring.

C. Connects to controls and power panels via RS485.

D. Enables light management software to control and monitor compatible dimming ballasts and

ballast modules, power panels, power modules, and window treatments.

1. Utilizes Ethernet connectivity to light management computer utilizing one of the

following methods:

PROJECT NAME




a. Dedicated network.

b. Dedicated VLAN.

c. Shared network with Building Management System (BMS).

d. Corporate network where managed switches are configured to allow multicasting

and use of IGMP.

E. Integrates control station devices, power panels, shades, preset lighting controls, and external

inputs into a single customizable lighting control system with:

1. Multiple Failsafe Mechanisms:

a. Power failure detection via emergency lighting interface.

b. Protection: Lights go to full on if ballast wires are shorted.

c. Distributed architecture provides fault containment. Single hub failure or loss of

power does not compromise lights and shades connected to other lighting

management hubs.

2. Manual overrides.

3. Automatic control.

4. Central computer control and monitoring.

5. Integration with BMS via BACnet.

F. Furnished with astronomical time clock. [or]

G. Furnished with solar clock to track the position of the sun to control the shades to limit

penetration of direct sunlight.

H. Maintains a backup of the programming in a non-volatile memory capable of lasting more

than ten years without power.

I. BACnet Integration License:

1. Provide ability to communicate by means of native BACnet IP communication (does

not require interface) to lighting control system from a user-supplied 10BASE-T or

100BASE-T Ethernet network.

2. Requires only one network connection per system.

3. Lighting control system to be BACnet Test Laboratory (BTL) listed.

4. Basic BACnet integration license:

a. The BACnet integrator can command:

1) Area light output.

2) Area enable or disable after hours mode.

3) Area load shed level.

4) Area load shed enable/disable.

5) Area shade group presets and levels.

6) Enable/Disable:

a) Automated solar adaptive shade control.

b) Cloudy day/shadow override mode for automated shade control.

c) Brightness override mode for automated shade control.

d) Area occupancy sensors.

PROJECT NAME




e) Area daylighting.

7) Daylighting level.

8) Area occupied and unoccupied level

9) Occupancy sensor timeouts.

b. The BACnet integrator can monitor:

1) Area on/off status.

2) Area occupancy status.

3) Area fault.

a) Lamp failures.

b) Control devices not responding.

4) Area load shed status.

5) Area instantaneous energy usage and maximum potential power usage.

6) Energy savings broken out by strategy (occupancy, timeclock, daylighting,

personal control, tuning, load shed) down to the individual area.

7) Area shade group presets and levels.

8) Cloudy day and shadow sensor status.

9) Light levels from window mounted sensors.

10) Enable/Disable:

a) Status of automated solar adaptive shade control.

b) Status of cloudy day/shadow override for automated shade control.

c) Status of brightness override for automated shade control.

d) Area occupancy sensors.

e) Daylighting.

11) Daylighting level.

12) Light levels from photo sensors.

13) Area occupied and unoccupied level.

14) Occupancy sensor timeouts.

c. Shade assignment and grouping to be discoverable with third party building

management software.

J. Integration with other devices over Ethernet via Telnet using the Lutron Integration Protocol.

K. Control other devices over Ethernet via TCP or Telnet by sending device specific strings.

2.11 LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM COMPUTERS [SELECT A OR B]

A. No computers to be provided. Lighting Control System Manufacturer authorized Service

Representative to perform system start-up without on-site computer.

B. Computers:

1. Product: Lutron Q-Manager.

2. System PC (Desktop/Laptop):

a. Suitable for occasional programming, monitoring, and control of digital network

lighting controls.

PROJECT NAME




b. Unless otherwise indicated, computer(s) to be provided by lighting control system

manufacturer.

c. Quantity: To be determined; provide allowance for [_____] computer(s).

d. Location(s): As indicated on the drawings.

e. Minimum Hardware Requirements:

1) Processor: Single Intel® Core® i3 processor with minimum speed of 2.4

GHz.

2) 4 GB RAM.

3) 250 GB hard drive (40 GB for application).

4) One 10/100/1000 Ethernet network interface for communication with lighting

management hubs.

5) Monitor with 1280 x 1024 resolution.

6) 4 USB 2.0 ports.

7) Dedicated Graphics Card with 256 MB of memory.

f. Minimum Software Requirements:

1) Licensed installation of US English 64-bit Microsoft® Windows® 7

Professional with Service Pack 1 or US English 64-bit Microsoft®

Windows® 8 Professional.

2) Microsoft® Internet Information Services (IIS) 7 or later.

3) Microsoft® Internet Explorer 9 or later.

4) Microsoft® .NET Framework 3.5.

3. Server:

a. Suitable for 24 hour per day, 7 day per week programming, monitoring, control,

and data logging of digital-network lighting controls.

b. Suitable to handle client machine request in multi-computer systems.

c. Unless otherwise indicated, computer to be provided by CCF

d. Minimum Hardware Requirements:

1) Processor: Quad Core Intel® Xeon® processor with minimum speed of 2.8

GHz.

2) 8 GB Ram.

3) 250 GB hard drive (40 GB for application and database).

4) Two 10/100/1000 Ethernet network interfaces - one for communication with

lighting management hubs and one for communication with corporate intranet

to allow access from system PCs and/or energy saving display terminals. Only

one Ethernet network interface is required if all lighting management hubs

and client PCs are on the same network.


6) 4 USB 2.0 ports.


e. Minimum Software Requirements:

1) Licensed installation of US English 64-bit Microsoft® Windows® Server

2008 R2 or Windows Server 2012 R1.

2) Microsoft® Internet Information Services (IIS) 7 or later.

3) Microsoft® Internet Explorer 9 or later.

PROJECT NAME




4) Microsoft® .NET Framework 3.5.

4. Energy Savings Display Terminals:

a. Suitable for displaying energy savings data on user-supplied display.

b. Unless otherwise indicated, computer(s) to be provided the CCF

c. Quantity: As indicated on the drawings.

d. Location(s): As indicated on the drawings.

e. Minimum Hardware Requirements:

1) Processor: Single Intel® Core® i3 processor with minimum speed of 2.4

GHz.

2) 4 GB RAM.

3) 250 GB hard drive (40 GB for application and database).

4) One 10/100/1000 Ethernet network interface for communication with lighting

management hubs.


6) 4 USB 2.0 ports.


f. Minimum Software Requirements:

1) Licensed installation of US English 64-bit Microsoft® Windows® 7

Professional with Service Pack 1 or US English 64-bit Microsoft®

Windows® 8 Professional.

5. Computers Provided by Lighting Control System Manufacturer: Computer software to

be preinstalled and tested prior to shipping.

2.12 LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SOFTWARE

A. Provide system software license and hardware that is designed, tested, manufactured, and

warranted by a single manufacturer.

B. Configuration Setup Software:

1. Product: Lutron Q-Design.

2. Suitable to make system programming and configuration changes.

3. Windows-based, capable of running on either central server or a remote client over

TCP/IP connection.

4. Allows end-user (with training) to:

a. Capture system design:

1) Geographical layout.

2) Load schedule zoning.

3) Shade grouping.

4) Equipment schedule.

5) Equipment assignment to lighting management hubs.

6) Daylighting design.

b. Define the configuration for the following in each area:

1) Lighting scenes.

2) Shade group presets.

PROJECT NAME




3) Control station devices.

4) Interface and integration equipment.

5) Occupancy/after hours.

6) Partitioning.

7) Daylighting.

8) Emergency lighting.

9) Night lights.

c. Startup:

1) Addressing.

2) Daylighting.

3) Provide customized conditional programming.

C. Control and Monitor Software:

1. Products:

a. Lutron Quantum Vue (web-based application).

b. Lutron Q-Admin (desktop application).

2. Accessibility and Platform Support:

a. Lutron Quantum Vue Web-Based Application:

1) Web-based; runs on most HTML5 compatible browsers (including Internet

Explorer, Chrome, and Safari).

2) Supports multiple platforms and devices; runs from a tablet, desktop, laptop,

or smartphone; optimized for displays of 1024 by 768 pixels or higher.

3) User interface supports multi-touch gestures such as pinch to zoom, drag to

pan, etc.

4) Utilizes HTTPS (industry-standard certificate-based encryption and

authentication for security).

b. Lutron Q-Admin Desktop Application:

1) Client installation for Windows-based operating systems only.

3. System Navigation and Status Reporting:

a. Lutron Quantum Vue Web-Based Application: Performed using graphical floor

plan view or a generic system layout.

1) Graphical Floor Plan View: Utilizes customized CAD based drawing of the

building. Pan and zoom feature allows for easy navigation; dynamically

adjusts the details presented based on zoom level.

2) Area, scene, and zone names can be changed in real time.

b. Lutron Q-Admin Desktop Application: Performed using basic system tree view.

4. Control of Lights:

a. Area lights can be monitored for on/off status.

b. All lights in an area can be turned on/off or sent to a specific level.

c. For areas that have been zoned, these areas may be sent to a predefined lighting

scene, and individual zones may be controlled.

d. Area lighting scenes can be renamed and modified in real-time, changing the levels

that zones go to when a scene is activated.

e. High and low end of area lighting can be tuned/trimmed.

PROJECT NAME




f. Control and monitor area partition status.

5. Control of Shades:

a. Area shades can be monitored for current preset or position.

b. Area shades can be opened/closed, sent to a preset, or sent to a specific position.

6. Occupancy:

a. Area occupancy can be monitored.

b. Area occupancy can be disabled to override occupancy control or in case of

occupancy sensor problems.

c. Area occupancy settings including level that lights turn on to when area is

occupied, and level that lights turn off to when area is unoccupied can be changed

in real-time.

d. Monitor energy savings due to occupancy down to an individual area.

7. Daylighting:

a. Daylighting can be enabled/disabled. Can be used to override the control currently

taking place in the space.

b. Daylight calibration can be adjusted for each daylit area.

c. Daylight status can be monitored.

d. Monitor energy savings due to daylight harvesting down to an individual area.

8. Load Shedding; Lutron Intelli-Demand: Allows the building manager to monitor whole

building lighting power usage and apply a customized load shed reduction to selected

areas, thereby reducing a building's power usage; load shedding triggered via Quantum

software, BACnet, or OpenADR.

9. Scheduling: Schedule time of day and astronomic time clock events to automate

functions.

a. Adjust or disable a single occurrence of a repeating scheduled event.

b. Easily monitor and adjust scheduled events using a weekly calendar view.

10. Reporting: Provide reporting capability that allows the building manager to gather real-

time and historical information about the system as follows:

a. Energy Reports: Show a comparison of cumulative energy used over a period of

time for one or more areas or meter groups.

b. Power Reports: Show power usage trend over a period of time for one or more

areas or meter groups.

c. Energy Density Report: Show energy usage in W/sq ft.

d. Energy Savings By Strategy Report: Show energy savings for any area broken

down by strategy (tuning, occupancy, daylighting, scheduled events, personal

control, and load shedding).

e. Activity Report: Show what activity has taken place over a period of time for one

or more areas. Activity includes occupant activities (e.g. wall controls being

pressed), building manager operation (e.g. controlling/changing areas using the

control and monitor tool), and device failures (e.g. keypads or ballasts that are not

responding).

1) Include shade related activities (e.g. automatic movements from Hyperion

automated shade algorithm, manual overrides from personal controls,

automatic overrides from sensors).

f. Failure Report: Shows which areas are currently reporting LED failures.

PROJECT NAME




g. Shade Level Report: Shows the shade level for any shade group in the system over

any historical 24 hour period.

h. Shade Position Report: Shows the percentage of time shade groups in the system

are at each position.

i. Sensor Level Report: Shows the light level in footcandles of any photosensor in

the system.

j. Alert Activity Report: Capable of generating historical reports of all alert activity

within the system.

k. Hyperion Automated Shade Control Activity Report: A single chart that displays

historical data regarding the position and performance of Hyperion automated

shades for a given shade group, which can be displayed over any single hour or 24

hour period, and includes the following:

1) Shade Level: Shows the shade level for any shade group in the system over

the time period, and also indicates the reason for shade movement.

2) Sensor Level: Shows the light level in footcandles over time for a given

shade group.

3) Sensor Threshold: Shows the sensor override thresholds in footcandles over

time for a given shade group.

4) Hyperion Mode: Shows the system mode transitions over time (Hyperion,

Dark Override, Bright Override, Manual Override, etc.).

11. Diagnostics: Allows the building manager to check on the status of all equipment in the

lighting control system. Devices to be listed with a reporting status of OK, missing, or

unknown.

12. Alerts and Alarms: Monitors the system for designated events/triggers and

automatically generates alerts according to configured response criteria.

a. Capable of monitoring for the following events/triggers:

1) A failed piece of equipment (e.g. ballast, control, sensor, etc.); alert cleared

when equipment is replaced.

2) A driver outage (for compatible drivers only); alert cleared when replaced.

3) Luminaires with operating hours in excess of designated time.

4) A load shed event; alert generated for beginning and end of trigger.

5) Energy usage higher than designated threshold target.

6) Potential light level condition discrepancies (daylight sensors not agreeing

with expected lighting status).

7) Potential sensor failures (Radio Window sensors that have not seen a change

in light level).

b. View alerts on a customized graphical floor plan.

c. Capable of generating alerts through visible changes in software or through email

messages.

d. Capable of customizing the frequency of alerts and providing notifications

immediately or through daily, weekly, or monthly summaries.

e. Capable of sending different alerts to different system users.

f. Capable of generating historical reports of all alert activity within the system.

13. Administration:

a. Users: Allows new user accounts to be created and existing user accounts to be

PROJECT NAME




edited.

1) Supports Active Directory (LDAP) tying user accounts to network accounts.

b. Area and feature access can be restricted based on login credentials with three

levels of access rights (Admin, Programmer, Controller) and customized access

levels available.

c. Publish Graphical Floor Plan: Allows admin user to publish new graphical floor

plan files, allowing users to monitor the status of lights, occupancy of areas, and

daylighting status.

d. Back-Up Project Database: Allows admin user to back up the project database that

holds all the configuration information for the system, including keypad

programming, areas scenes, daylighting, occupancy programming, emergency

levels, night lights, and time clock.

e. Publish Project Database: Allows admin user to send a new project database to the

server and download the new configuration to the system. The project database

holds all the configuration information for the system, including keypad

programming, area scenes, daylighting, occupancy programming, emergency

levels, night lights, and time clock.

14. Favorite Buttons: Provide global scene control or modes of operation across the entire

system.

15. Provides control/monitoring of partition status to automatically reconfigure how the

space operates based on the partition's open/closed status.

D. Energy Savings Display Software:

1. Product: Lutron GreenGlance.

2. Provide software from a single manufacturer that can collect and display real-time and

historical energy savings data from all of the components in the lighting control system

or from the meters in the system.

3. Energy savings data to be accessible for display on computer terminal or user-supplied

display monitor via energy savings display software.

4. Software to be capable of displaying:

a. Current savings in percent and kW.

b. Historic energy savings in kWh saved, money saved, coal not burned, and carbon

dioxide not emitted.

c. Historical views in time periods of three hours, one day, one week, one month, and

one year.

d. Configurable energy usage baseline and user-defined working hours for energy

saving calculations.

e. Comparisons of historical periods (days, weeks, months, years).

f. Local weather conditions.

E. Web Services Integration License:

1. Provide ability to communicate by means of XML web services

2. Web services integrator can monitor:

a. Area instantaneous power usage.

b. Area instantaneous power savings.

c. Area energy savings.

PROJECT NAME




d. Area energy usage.

e. Area maximum power usage.

3. Initiate load shed event using Open ADR protocol in an auto-Demand-Response event

without additional interfaces or gateways.

4. Supports both push and pull for integration with third party systems and energy

dashboards.

F. Quantum Mobile Control and Programming Software License:

1. Allows mobile control and programming of Quantum system via an Apple iPad.

2. Provides users the ability to:

a. Control and monitor area lighting scenes, zones, and shade presets.

b. Easily identify zones and shade groups.

c. Edit area lighting scenes, shade presets, scene fade rates, and scene delay rates.

d. Restrict user access by area.

e. Restrict users from ability to make changes.

f. Historical logging of who made changes available in Q-Admin control and monitor

software.

3. Connects to Quantum system via Wi-Fi.

4. Can connect directly to processor or through computer (server) in the system.

G. Personal Web-Based Control Software:

1. Product: Lutron Personna PC.

2. Lighting Control: Allows the user to use a web browser on their personal PC, laptop, or

some mobile devices (supporting 1024 by 768 resolution) to control one or more lights

in their area.

a. The user may select between full on, full off, or a favorite light level.

b. The user may raise/lower the currently selected lighting level in the area.

3. Shade Control: Allows the user to use a web browser on their personal PC, laptop, or

some mobile devices (supporting 1024 by 768 resolution) to control one or more shades

in their area.

a. The user may select open, closed, or a favorite shade position.

b. The user may raise/lower a selected shade group in the area.

4. Supports up to 10,000 users.

5. Each user to have a login name and password sent from administrator via email when

user account created.

6. Supported Browsers: Microsoft Internet Explorer (versions 7 and higher), Mozilla

Firefox (versions 3 and higher), Apple Safari (versions 4 and higher), Google Chrome

(versions 8 and higher).

H. Automated Shade Control Software as required:

1. Product: Lutron Hyperion.

2. Objectives:

a. Uses open loop solar adaptive algorithm to minimize the penetration depth of

direct sunlight.

b. Optimizes energy savings from daylight.

PROJECT NAME




c. Provides manual override capability for occupants via wall-mounted keypad or

simple remote control.

d. Provides automatic override capability utilizing a local sensor in dark conditions or

when excessive brightness occurs.

e. Maximizes occupants’ connectivity with outdoors by optimizing view.

f. Provides diffuse daylight and minimizes direct sunlight in the space to reduce solar

heat gain and maximize occupant comfort in the space.

g. Reduces glare.

h. Shades along same facade to start, stop and track in unison to maintain a consistent

exterior aesthetic.

i. Provides optional presets to allow shades to align with architectural elements of the

facade.

j. Provides a preset, also referred to as visor position, to limit maximum amount of

light entering a space.

k. Provides configurable dark and bright override positions.

3. Hardware: Independent operation of solar tracking program through non-Windows

based operating system provided in one or more lighting management hubs.

4. Control Software:

a. Incorporates a solar tracking software that:

1) Calculates the sun's position in the sky relative to the building and then

calculates when shade movement is necessary by facade.

2) Calculates the position of the shade to limit direct sunlight penetration to a

predetermined limit.

b. Controlled using the following inputs for startup:

1) Building location.

2) Facade orientation.

3) Window dimensions.

4) Solar depth of penetration.

5) Number of shade movements per day.

6) Visor position of shades.

7) Optional presets that align shades with architectural features of the facade.

8) Light level thresholds for dark and bright override.

9) Shade position for dark and bright override.

10) Window position on wall.

c. Requires minimal long term maintenance and service. Does not require user to

make daily changes to programming or overall system functionality, unless desired

by CCF.

5. PC Graphic User Interface: Provides access to all adjustable parameters of solar depth

of penetration and number of shade movements per day.

6. Override:

a. Manual:

1) Temporary override of the control program capability through optional

manual keypads, remote controls, or end-user control software.

2) Keypads, remote controls, or end-user control software to be capable of

PROJECT NAME




providing manual control of shades in a particular area.

3) Time of manual override to be programmable.

b. Automatic overrides achievable via Radio Window sensors or rooftop cloudy day

sensors:

1) Radio Window Sensors:

a) Product(s):

. Lutron Radio Window sensor; Model LRF2-SSM-XX (mullion mount

sensor pair).

. Lutron Radio Window sensor; Model LRF2-SSW-WH (window mount).

b) Monitors exterior light conditions and provides automatic override of system

on dark cloudy days or in the presence of shadows from neighboring

buildings and rooftop mechanical equipment.

c) Capable of detecting a light range of 0 to 10,000 footcandles (0 to 107,000

lux).

d) Sensors update the system with the light level conditions based on daylight

event changes, not periodic transmissions.

e) During dark conditions, shades to go to predetermined dark override position

to maximize view and available daylight.

f) Monitors exterior light conditions and provides automatic override of system

during excessive brightness.

g) During excessive bright conditions, shades to go to predetermined bright

override position to maximize occupant comfort.

h) Capable of having one or multiple sensors per facade for more localized

detection of exterior light conditions.

i) Capable of having one sensor control one shade group or multiple shade

groups.

j) Provides flexible grouping capabilities to achieve optimal hembar alignment

and daylight autonomy by allowing for any of the following three grouping

options in the software:

. Smart Adaptive Grouping: Shades in the same facade share sensor data

and intelligently adapt grouping to balance daylight autonomy, hembar

alignment, and maintain consistent shade positions for groups with

similar perceived daylight conditions.

. Always Aligned: Shades in the same facade share sensor data and

always maintain hembar alignment across the entire facade.

. Independent Grouping: Shades in the same facade operate independently

based on individual sensor data.

k) Software enables the ability to adjust thresholds, timeouts, and shade

movement frequency globally or per area to meet the unique preferences of

different individuals.

l) Sensor to not require external power packs, power wiring, or communication

wiring.

m) Light level readings of the two mullion mount sensors to be combined

together to act as one sensor.

n) Sensor to be easily mountable to mullion (mullion mount sensor pair) or

PROJECT NAME




window (window mount) and can be easily removed and repositioned

without marring or damaging window surface.

o) Provides typical battery lifetime of 7 to 10 years when installed per

manufacturer instructions.

p) Communicates directly to compatible Lutron QS sensor module via Lutron

Clear Connect Technology to ensure reliable RF communications.

q) RF Frequency: 434 MHz.

r) RF Range: 30 feet (9 m) between sensor and compatible RF receiving

device(s).

s) Intuitive test mode to provide instant system verification of associated shades

and programmed visor position.

2) Rooftop Cloudy Day Sensors:

a) Product: Lutron Cloudy Day Sensor; Model QS-CES-R.

b) Provides automatic override of system on dark cloudy days.

c) During dark conditions, shades to go to predetermined visor position to

maximize view and available daylight.

2.13 CONTROL STATIONS

A. Provide control stations with configuration as indicated or as required to control the loads as

indicated.

B. Wired Control Stations:

1. General Requirements:

a. Power: Class 2 (low voltage).

b. UL listed.

c. Provide faceplates with concealed mounting hardware.

d. Borders, logos, and graduations to use laser engraving or silk-screened graphic

process that chemically bonds graphics to faceplate, resistant to removal by

scratching and cleaning.

e. Finish: As specified for wall controls in "Device Finishes" under DIGITAL-

NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

2. Multi-Scene Wired Control:

a. General Requirements:

1) Allows control of any devices part of the lighting control system.

2) Allows for easy reprogramming without replacing unit.

3) Replacement of units does not require reprogramming.

4) Communications: Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communication.

5) Engrave keypads with button, zone, and scene descriptions as indicated on the

drawings.

6) Software Configuration:

a) Customizable control station device button functionality:

. Buttons can be programmed to perform single defined action.

. Buttons can be programmed to perform defined action on press and

defined action on release.

PROJECT NAME




. Buttons can be programmed using conditional logic off of a state

variable such as time of day or partition status.

. Buttons can be programmed to perform automatic sequence of defined

actions.

. Capable of deactivating select keypads to prevent accidental changes to

light levels.

. Buttons can be programmed for raise/lower of defined loads.

. Buttons can be programmed to toggle defined set of loads on/off.

7) Status LEDs:

a) Upon button press, LEDs to immediately illuminate.

b) LEDs to reflect the true system status. LEDs to remain illuminated if the

button press was properly processed or LEDs to turn off if the button press

was not processed.

c) Support logic that defines when LED is illuminated:

. Scene logic (logic is true when all zones are at defined levels).

. Room logic (logic is true when at least one zone is on).

. Pathway logic (logic is true when at least one zone is on).

. Last scene (logic is true when spaces are in defined scenes).

b. Wired Keypads:

1) Style: [per project rqmts].

2) Communications: Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communications link.

3) Mounting: Wallbox or low-voltage mounting bracket; provide wall plates

with concealed mounting hardware.

4) Button/Engraving Backlighting:

a) Utilize backlighting for buttons and associated engraving to provide

readability under all light conditions.

b) Backlight intensity adjustable via programming software.

5) Design keypads to allow field-customization of button color, configuration,

and engraving using field-changeable replacement kits.

6) Contact Closure Interface: Provide two contact closure inputs on back of unit

which provide independent functions from front buttons; accepts both

momentary and maintained contact closures.

7) Terminal block inputs to be over-voltage and miswire-protected against wire

reversals and shorts.

8) Provide integral infrared receiver for personal control

c. Wired Keypads; Lutron Architrave QS Keypads:

1) Mounting: Wallbox; Lutron Architrave Wallbox; provide wall plates with

concealed mounting hardware.







PROJECT NAME





d. Wired Keypads; Lutron Signature Series QS Keypads:

1) Mounting: Wallbox; Lutron Signature Series Wallbox; provide wall plates

with concealed mounting hardware.


a) Utilize backlighting for buttons and associated engraving to provide

readability under all light conditions.

b) Backlight intensity adjustable via programming software.








e. Wired Keypads; Lutron QS Wired Palladium Wallstations:

1) Style: Architectural Style

2) Mounting: Wallbox; provide wall plates with concealed mounting hardware.

3) Buttons and Faceplate:

a) Buttons to be greater than 0.65 inch (16.5 mm) in height to provide large

target area for ease of use and actuation.

b) Front of buttons to be flush with faceplate.

c) Buttons and faceplate to be of the same material and finish (e.g.

plastic/plastic, glass/glass, metal/metal).

d) Buttons to depress and provide tactile feedback of a successful button push.

Controls utilizing capacitive or resistive touch technology are not acceptable.

e) Gaps to be less than 0.007 inch (0.18 mm) between buttons and less than

0.15 inch (3.8 mm) between buttons and faceplate.


a) Backlighting to be visible through engraved text to provide clear readability

in a variety of lighting conditions.

b) Indicate active scene through the intensity of the backlighting (brighter

backlit text indicates the active state).

c) Backlight intensity adjustable via programming software; capable of

dynamic adjustment during usage based on conditional logic (time of day,

button press, etc.).

5) Design keypads to allow field-customization of button color and engraving

using field-changeable replacement kits.



3. Single-Scene or Zoned Wired Control:

a. Product: Lutron Pico Wired Control.

b. Turn an individual fixture or group of fixtures on and off.

c. Raise and lower light levels.

PROJECT NAME




d. Recall favorite light levels.

4. Wired Keyswitch:

a. Product: Lutron QS Keyswitch.

b. Allows control of any devices part of the lighting control system.

c. Communications: Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communications link.

d. Functionality:

1) Allows for easy reprogramming without replacing unit.

2) Requires key insertion to activate actions.

e. Engrave keypads with button, zone, and scene descriptions as indicated on the

drawings.

f. Software Configuration:

1) Customizable control station device button functionality:

a) Key positions can be programmed to perform single defined action.

b) Key positions can be programmed using conditional logic off of a state

variable such as time of day or partition status.

5. Single Touch Slider Control:

a. Product: Lutron GrafikT QS Slider.

b. Allows control of any single lighting zone in the system.


d. Switch Control: Single-touch LED bar for on/off operation.

e. Dimmer Control: Single touch LED bar with one portion of bar for on/off

operation and one portion for dimmer adjustment.

1) Single touch of light level adjustment control portion of LED bar

raises/lowers lights, with new level becoming the current preset level.

2) When off, single touch of on/off control portion of LED bar raises lights to

preset level.

3) When on, single touch of on/off control portion of LED bar initiates long fade

to off.

4) Provides audible feedback for touch control confirmation.

5) LED bar indicates on/off status and current light level, and functions as

locator light when dimmer is off.

6) Provides for customized adjustment of dimmer functions via programming

software:

a) High/low end trims.

b) LED brightness.

c) Sound on/off.

d) Off fade time.

e) On fade time.

f) Preset lock capability.

6. Analog Slider Control:

a. Product: Lutron QS Slider Control.

b. Allows control of any lighting zone in the system via intuitive analog slider

control.


PROJECT NAME




d. Available in 1 to 16 zone configurations.

e. Available with or without a take command switch to activate the slider scene.

f. Optional keypad ganging.

g. Slider zones can be chained in partitioned spaces.

h. Engrave keypads with button, zone, and scene descriptions as indicated on the

drawings.

i. Functionality:

1) Full range dimming of individual zones or groups of zones.

2) Zone levels indicated by slider position.

3) Integrates with multi-scene wired control.

C. Infrared Handheld Controls:

1. Product(s):

a. Four-Scene Wireless Infrared Transmitter; Lutron Model GRX-IT-WH: Operates

up to 50 feet (15 m) line-of-sight to receiver.

b. Single-Scene Wireless Infrared Transmitter; Lutron Model C-FLRC-WH: Operates

up to 12 feet (3.7 m) line-of-sight to receiver.

2. Quantity: To be determined; provide allowance for [per project rqmts] control(s).

3. Designed for use in conjunction with compatible infrared receiver and lighting control;

compatibility dependent on that receiver, not transmitter.

4. Learnable by other variable frequency remote controls.

2.14 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL INTERFACES

A. Provide low-voltage control interfaces as indicated or as required to control the loads as

indicated.

B. Connects to lighting management hub via RS485.

C. UL listed.

D. Contact Closure Interface:


closures.

2. The contact closure output device can be configured for maintained or pulsed outputs.

3. Contact closure can be programmed using conditional logic off of a state variable such

as time of day or partition status.

E. Wallbox Input Closure Interface:

1. Mounts in wallbox behind contact closure keypad to provide interface for up to eight

contact closure inputs.


closures.

F. RS232 and Ethernet Interface:

1. Provide ability to communicate via Ethernet or RS232 to audiovisual equipment,

PROJECT NAME




touchscreens, etc.

2. Provide control of:

a. Light scene selections.

b. Fine-tuning of light scene levels with raise/lower.

c. Shade group presets.

d. Fine-tuning of shade preset levels with raise/lower.

e. Simulate system wall station button presses and releases.

3. Provide status monitoring of:

a. Light scene status.

b. Shade group status.

c. Wall station button presses and releases.

d. Wall station LEDs.

4. Provide ability to send custom output strings.

G. DMX Interface:

1. Provide ability to:

a. Map a single zone intensity to a single DMX512 lighting channel.

b. Map a single zone intensity to three DMX512 channels for RGB/CMY color

control.

c. Map a single zone intensity to a single DMX512 integration channel.

d. Smoothly transition from one color to another in a cross fade.

e. Automatically sequence through a variety of colors.

f. Download, program, and customize a color wheel for each unit.

H. Sensor Modules:

1. Products:

a. Sensor module with both wired and wireless inputs; Lutron Model QSM2-4W-C.

b. Sensor module with wired inputs only; Lutron Model QSMX-4W-C.

c. Sensor module with wireless inputs only; Lutron Model QSM2-XW-C.

2. Wired Modules:

a. Provide wired inputs for:



3) IR receivers for personal control.

4) Digital wall stations.

3. Communicate sensor information to wired low-voltage digital link for use by

compatible devices.

2.15 WIRED SENSORS

A. Wired Occupancy Sensors:

1. General Requirements:

a. Connects directly to compatible ballasts and modules without the need of a power

pack or other interface.

PROJECT NAME




b. Turns off or reduces lighting automatically after reasonable time delay when a

room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy the space.

c. Accommodates all conditions of space utilization and all irregular work hours and

habits.

d. Comply with UL 94.

e. Self-Adaptive Sensors: Continually adjusts sensitivity and timing to ensure optimal

lighting control for any use of the space; furnished with field-adjustable controls

for time delay and sensitivity to override any adaptive features.

f. Provide capability to:

1) Add additional timeout system-wide without need to make local adjustment

on sensor.

2) Group multiple sensors.

g. Power Failure Memory: Settings and learned parameters to be saved in non-

volatile memory and not lost should power be interrupted and subsequently

restored.

h. Furnished with all necessary mounting hardware and instructions.

i. Class 2 devices.

j. Ceiling-Mounted Sensors: Indicate viewing directions on mounting bracket.

k. Wall-Mounted Sensors: Provide swivel-mount base.

l. Color: White.

B. Infrared Receivers:

1. Product: Lutron Model EC-IR-WH.

2. Use Class 2 wiring for low voltage communication.

3. Can be replaced without reprogramming.

4. 360 degree reception of wireless infrared remote controls.

5. Immediate local LED response upon reception of handheld transmitter communication.

6. Mountable on lighting fixtures or recessed acoustical ceiling tiles.

7. Constructed via sonic welding.

8. Color: White.

C. Wired Daylight Sensors:

1. Digital Interior Daylight Sensor:

a. Product: Lutron Model EC-DIR-WH.

b. Use Class 2 wiring for low voltage communication.

c. Can be replaced without reprogramming.

d. Open-loop basis for daylight sensor control scheme.

e. Stable output over temperature from 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 104 degrees F

(40 degrees C).

f. Partially shielded for accurate detection of available daylight to prevent fixture

lighting and horizontal light component from skewing sensor detection.

g. Provide linear response from 0 to 500 footcandles.

h. Integral IR receiver for personal control.

i. Mountable on lighting fixtures or recessed acoustical ceiling tiles.

PROJECT NAME




j. Constructed via sonic welding.

k. Color: White.

2. Daylight Control Package:

a. Product: Lutron CES Series (Lutron CES Analog Sensor, LC8 Controller, and

Power Pack).

b. Controller:

1) Product: Lutron Model LC8.

2) Automatically switches a dry contact according to changes in ambient light

levels.

3) Fully adjustable separate high and low setpoints, with an adjustable dead band

between set points to prevent unwanted cycling.

4) Input time delay to prevent unwanted cycling due to intermittent light level

fluctuations.

5) Signal/setpoint and relay status indication.

6) Sensor calibration input.

c. Sensors:

1) Class 2, three-wire analog devices.

2) Provision for zero or offset based signal.

3) Indoor Photo Sensors; Lutron Model CES/I: With fresnel lens and 60 degree

cone of response; sensor range of 0 to 750 footcandles.

4) Outdoor Photo Sensors; Lutron Model CES/O: Weatherproof, with hood over

aperture to shield sensor from direct sunlight; sensor range of 0 to 750

footcandles.

5) Atrium Photo Sensors; Lutron Model CES/A: With translucent dome and 180

degree field of view; sensor range of 2 to 2,500 footcandles.

6) Skylight Photo Sensors; Lutron Model CES/S: With translucent dome and

180 degree field of view; sensor range of 10 to 7,500 footcandles.

D. Infrared Partition Sensors:

1. Product: Lutron Model GRX-IRPS-WH.

2. Provide contact closure based on status of the partition wall (open/close) enabling

automatic linking of controls.

2.16 ACCESSORIES

A. Emergency Lighting Interface:

1. Product: Lutron Model LUT-ELI.

2. Provides total system listing to UL 924 when used with lighting control system.

3. Senses all three phases of building power.

4. Provides an output to power panels or digital ballast interfaces if power on any phase

fails and sends all lights controlled by these devices to an emergency light level setting;

100 percent intensity. Lights to return to their previous intensities when normal power

is restored.

5. Accepts a contact closure input from a fire alarm control panel.

PROJECT NAME




B. Provide power supplies as indicated or as required to power system devices and accessories.

1. Product(s):

a. Junction box-mounted power supply for shades, keypads, and accessories, and for

providing additional low voltage power to communication link; Lutron Model

QSPS-J-1-50; with miswire and thermal protection.

b. Plug-in power supply for shades, drapery drive units, keypads, and accessories,

and for providing additional low voltage power to communication link; Lutron

Model QSPS-P1-1-50; with miswire protection; powered from standard receptacle

using cord 6 feet (1.8 m) in length.

c. Ten output power supply panel for shades, drapery drive units, keypads and

accessories, and for providing additional low voltage power to communication

link; Lutron Model QSPS-P1-10-60.

d. Power supply for keypads and accessories (not for shades/window treatments), and

for providing additional low voltage power to communication link; Lutron Model

QSPS-DH-1-75.


A. Factory Testing; Lutron Standard Factory Testing:

1. Perform full-function factory testing on all completed assemblies. Statistical sampling

is not acceptable.

2. Perform full-function factory testing on 100 percent of all LED drivers.

3. Perform factory audit burn-in of all dimming assemblies and panels at 104 degrees F

(40 degrees C) at full load for two hours.

B.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables” and Section 260523 “Control Voltage Electrical Cables”.

B. Grounding: Comply with Section 260526 “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems”.

C. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

D. Provide complete installation of System in accordance with Contract Documents.

E. Provide dedicated network between Q-Manager computer and Quantum Lighting

Management Panels.

F. Provide equipment at locations and in quantities indicated on Drawings. Provide any

additional equipment required to provide control intent.

G. Define each dimmer's/relay’s load type, assign each load to a zone, and set control functions.

PROJECT NAME




H. Mount exterior daylight sensors to point due north with constant view of daylight.

I. Ensure that daylight sensor placement minimizes sensors view of electric light sources;

ceiling mounted and luminaire-mounted daylight sensors shall not have direct view of

luminaires.

J. Systems Integration:

1. Equipment Integration Meeting Visit

a. Cleveland Clinic Facility Representative to coordinate meeting between Cleveland

Clinic, Lighting Control System Manufacturer and other related equipment

manufacturers to discuss equipment and integration procedures.

3.2 STARTUP AND PROGRAMMING

A. Startup and Programming

1. Provide factory certified field service engineer to make minimum of three site visits to

ensure proper System installation and operation under following parameters:

a. Qualifications for factory certified field service engineer:

1) Minimum experience of 2 years training in the electrical/electronic field.

2) Certified by the equipment manufacturer on the System installed.

b. Make first visit prior to installation of wiring. Review:

1) Low voltage wiring requirements.

2) Separation of power and low voltage/data wiring.

3) Wire labeling.

4) Lighting Management Panel locations and installations.

5) Control locations.

6) Computer jack locations.

7) Load circuit wiring.

8) Network wiring requirements.

9) Connections to other equipment.

10) Installer responsibilities.

11) Power Panel locations.

c. Make second visit upon completion of installation of Network Lighting Control

System:

1) Verify connection of power wiring and load circuits.

2) Verify connection and location of controls.

3) Energize Lighting Management Panels and download System data program.

4) Address devices.

5) Verify proper connection of panel links (low voltage/data) and address panel.

6) Download System panel data to dimming/switching panels

7) Check dimming panel load types and currents and supervise removal of by-

pass jumpers.

8) Verify System operation control by control.

9) Verify proper operation of manufacturers interfacing equipment.

10) Verify proper operation of manufacturers supplied PC and installed programs.

PROJECT NAME




11) Configure initial groupings of ballast for wall controls, daylight sensors and

occupant sensors.

12) Initial calibration of sensors.

13) Obtain sign-off on System functions.

d. Make third visit to demonstrate and educate Cleveland Clinic representative on

System capabilities, operation and maintenance.

2. Startup

a. Q-Admin configuration

1) Naming and association of areas and lighting zones.

b. After Hours Start-up if required.

1) Provide factory certified Field Service Engineer to perform manufacturer’s

start-up procedures outside normal working hours (Monday through Friday,

7a.m. to 5 p.m.)

B. Tech Support



A. Manufacturer Services

1. Aim and Focus Visit

a. Cleveland Clinic Representative to coordinate on-site meeting with Lighting

Control System Manufacturer and Lighting Design Consultant to make required

lighting adjustments to the System for conformance with the Lighting Design

Consultant’s original design intent.

3.4 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Training Visit

1. Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide 2 days additional on-site System

training to site personnel.

B. On-Site Walkthrough

1. Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide a factory certified Field Service

Engineer to demonstrate system functionality to the Commissioning Agent.

2.

3.5 MAINTENANCE

A. Capable of providing on-site service support within 24 hours anywhere in continental United

States and within 72 hours worldwide except where special visas are required.

B. Offer renewable service contract on yearly basis, to include parts, factory labor, and annual

training visits. Make service contracts available up to ten years after date of system startup.


PROJECT NAME




THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK



SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS 261116 - 1

SECTION 261116 - SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes indoor and outdoor secondary unit substations, each consisting of the following:

1. Primary incoming section. 2. Transformer. 3. Secondary distribution section.


1. Division 26 Section "Medium-Voltage Cables" for requirements of terminating cables in incoming section of substation.

2. Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study" for short-circuit rating of devices and for setting of overcurrent protective devices.

3. Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for communication features of power distribution system devices.

4. Division 26 Section "Medium-Voltage Switchgear" for metering and instrument transformers.

5. Division 26 Section "Transient-Voltage Suppression for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits" for transient voltage surge suppressors for low-voltage power, control, and communication equipment located in the secondary section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification.


A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.




2. Dimensioned plans and elevations showing major components and features. 3. One-line diagram. 4. List of materials. 5. Nameplate legends. 6. Size and number of bus bars and current rating for each bus, including mains and

branches of phase, neutral, and ground buses. 7. Short-time and short-circuit current ratings of secondary unit substations and

components. 8. Ratings of individual protective devices.

C. Time-Current Characteristic Curves: For overcurrent protective devices.

D. Primary Fuses: Submit recommendations and size calculations.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Dimensioned concrete base, outline of secondary unit substation, conduit entries, and ground rod locations.

2. Location of structural supports for structure-supported raceways [and seismic bracing]. 3. Location of lighting fixtures, sprinkler piping and heads, ducts, and diffusers.

B. [Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformer assembly and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. [select “a’ or “b” below]

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.]

C. Product Certificates: For secondary unit substations, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Material Test Reports: For secondary unit substations.

E. Factory test reports.

F. Field quality-control test reports.





A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For secondary unit substations and accessories to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Spare fuses: Six of each type and rating of fuse and fusible device used. Include spares for the following:

a. Primary disconnect fuses. b. Potential transformer fuses. c. Control power fuses.

2. Spare Indicating Lights: Six of each type installed. 3. Touchup Paint: Three half-pint containers of paint matching enclosure's exterior finish. 4. Primary Switch Contact Lubricant: One container(s). 5. One set(s) of spare mounting gaskets for bushings, handholes, and the gasket between

relief cover and flange of pressure relief device.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain secondary unit substation through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of secondary unit substations and are based on the specific system indicated.

C. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by UL and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with IEEE C2.

E. Comply with IEEE C37.121.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

G. Comply with FM Global requirements.

H. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Guidelines.


A. Deliver in shipping splits in sizes that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.




B. Coordinate delivery of secondary unit substations to allow movement into designated space.

C. Store secondary unit substation components so condensation will not form on or in units. Provide temporary heating according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Handle secondary unit substation components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use factory-installed lifting provisions.


A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

B. Interruption of Existing electric Service: [DELETE THIS PARAGRAPH IF NOT REQUIRED] Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Cleveland Clinic or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:


2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Cleveland Clinic’s written permission.



C. Products Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for secondary unit substations including clearances between substations and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Service Conditions: IEEE C37.121, usual service conditions, except for the following:

[EDIT FOR PROJECT CONDITIONS] 1. Altitudes above 3300 feet (1000 m). 2. Exposure to hot and humid climate. 3. Exposure to seismic shock or to abnormal vibration, shock, or tilting. 4. Exposure to excessively high or low temperatures. 5. Unusual transportation or storage conditions. 6. Unusual grounding resistance conditions. 7. Unusual space limitations.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sensor-communication module package with data network and with monitoring equipment specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for successful transmission and remote readout of remote monitoring data specified in this Section.

B. Coordinate layout and installation of secondary unit substations with other construction that penetrates floors and ceilings, or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and fire-suppression-system components.




C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. ABB Control, Inc. (Transformers only) 2. Cooper Industries, Inc.; Cooper Power Systems Division. (Transformers only) 3. Eaton Corp. Electrical Group. 4. GE Electrical Distribution & Control. 5. Square D; Schneider Electric.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Indoor Unit Arrangement: Single assembly.

B. Outdoor Unit Arrangement: Single assembly.

1. Weatherproof, listed for installation outdoors, complying with IEEE C37.20.1. 2. Aisle-less Construction: Full-height doors in front of basic weatherproof equipment.

C. Enclosure Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard color, including under surfaces treated with corrosion-resistant undercoating.

2.3 INCOMING SECTION

A. Primary Incoming Section: Enclosed, air-interrupter, [dual primary] [primary] switch.

1. Description: For metal-enclosed, fused, air interrupter switches comply with Division 26 Section 261300 “Medium Voltage Switchgear”

2. Three pole, single throw, dead front, metal enclosed, with manual stored energy operator, with fuses mounted on a single frame, complying with IEEE C37.20.3.

3. Key interlocking system to prevent fuse access door from being opened unless switch is open. Additionally, interlock air-interrupter switch with transformer secondary main circuit breaker, preventing switch from being opened or closed unless secondary main circuit breaker is open.

B. Surge Arresters: Comply with IEEE C62.11, Distribution class; metal-oxide-varistor type, with ratings as indicated, connected in each phase of incoming circuit and ahead of any disconnecting device.




2.4 LIQUID-FILLED TRANSFORMER SECTION

A. Description: For liquid-filled, 2-winding, secondary unit substation transformers comply with Division 26 Section 261200 “Medium Voltage Transformers”.

2.5 SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION SECTION

A. Secondary Distribution: Low-voltage switchgear as specified in Division 26 Section 262300 "Low-Voltage Switchgear."

2.6 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS

A. Coordinate remote monitoring communication module package with power monitoring equipment specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for successful transmission and remote readout of monitoring data.

B. Connect remote monitoring communication module to Cleveland Clinic’s data network through appropriate network interface unit to the Building Automation System.

C. The manufacturer shall wire between all communications capable devices within the switchgear, including electronic meters with the same protocol and wire to a set of easily accessible terminal blocks.

2.7 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Compartment Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each compartment, mounted with stainless steel screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 26 Section 260533 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Factory Tests: Perform design and routine tests according to standards specified for components. Conduct transformer tests according to IEEE C57.12.90. Conduct switchgear and switchboard tests according to ANSI C37.51.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and space conditions for compliance with requirements for secondary unit substations and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Examine roughing-in of conduits and grounding systems to verify the following:

1. Wiring entries comply with layout requirements.




2. Entries are within conduit-entry tolerances specified by manufacturer and no feeders will have to cross section barriers to reach load or line lugs.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable conditions for secondary unit substation installation.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and that requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at secondary unit substation location.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install secondary unit substations in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the manufacturer.

1. Anchor secondary unit substations to concrete bases according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in Division 26 Sections "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems".

2. [In seismic areas, secondary unit substation shall be adequately anchored and braced per Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."]

3. Interior Location: Mount secondary unit substations on concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100-mm) larger in both directions than supported unit and 4 inches (100-mm) high with chamfered edges. a. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa) 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement

as specified in Division 03 Sections. b. Install dowel rods to connect concrete bases to concrete floor. Unless otherwise

indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of base.

c. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for anchoring equipment to the concrete base. d. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's

setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Exterior Location. Mount secondary unit substations on concrete slabs. Unless otherwise indicated, the slab shall be at least 8 inches (200mm) thick, reinforced with a 6 by 6 inch (150 by 150-mm) No. 6 mesh placed uniformly 4 inches (100-mm) from the top of the slab. Slab shall be placed on a 6 inch (150-mm) thick, well-compacted gravel base. The top of the concrete slab shall be approximately 4 inches (100-mm) above the finished grade. Edges shall be chamfered. The slab shall be of adequate size to project at least 8 inches (200-mm) beyond the equipment. a. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa) 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement

as specified in Division 03 Sections.

B. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions and NFPA 70.




3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for secondary unit substations, including key interlocking, control sequences, elementary single-line diagram, and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of secondary unit substation.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Verify tightness and torque all accessible bolted electrical connections to manufacturer’s specified values using a calibrated torque wrench. Provide a list of all torqued connections and values.

3.5 CLEANING

A. After completing equipment installation and before energizing, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. Vacuum interiors of secondary unit substation sections, do not use compressed air.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test according to NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. After installing secondary unit substation but before primary is energized, verify that grounding system at the substation tested at the specified value or less.

3. Perform phasing check on double-ended switchgear to insure correct bus phasing from each source.

4. After installing secondary unit substation and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

5. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges according to results in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study." Post a durable copy of the "as-left" settings and fuse ratings in a convenient location within the switchgear




a. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform infrared scan of each unit substation, include primary, transformer, and distribution sections. Remove front and rear panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 1. Instrument: Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect

significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 2. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies equipment checked

and that describes infrared-scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial actions taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.7 FOLLOW-UP SERVICE

A. Voltage Monitoring and Adjusting: After Substantial Completion, if requested by Cleveland Clinic, but not more than six months after Final Acceptance, perform the following voltage monitoring:

1. During a period of normal load cycles as evaluated by Cleveland Clinic, perform seven days of three-phase voltage recording at the outgoing section of each secondary unit substation. Voltage unbalance greater than 1 percent between phases, or deviation of any phase voltage from the nominal value by more than plus or minus 5 percent during the test period, is unacceptable.

2. Corrective Action: If test results are unacceptable, perform the following corrective action, as appropriate:

a. Adjust transformer taps. b. Rebalance loads. c. Prepare written request for voltage adjustment by electric utility.

3. Retests: Repeat monitoring, after corrective action has been performed, until satisfactory results are obtained.

4. Report: Prepare a written report covering monitoring performed and corrective action taken.

B. Infrared Scanning: Perform as specified in Division 26 Section "Medium-Voltage Switchgear."

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Cleveland Clinic's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems. Comply with Division 01 requirements.


PROJECT NAME



MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 261200 - 1

SECTION 261200 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS _ revised October, 2015

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of transformers with medium-voltage primaries:

1. Liquid-filled distribution and power transformers that form a part of unit substation

assemblies.

2. Dry type distribution and power transformers that form a part of unit substation

assemblies.

3. Stand Alone, Pad-mounted, Liquid-filled transformers.


1. Division 26 Section "Secondary Unit Substations" for requirements for transformers that

form a part of a unit substation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification.


A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum

clearances, installed devices and features, location of each field connection, and performance

for each type and size of transformer indicated.

B. Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for insulating fluid.

C. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown

and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Underground primary and secondary conduit stub-up location.

2. Dimensioned concrete base, outline of transformer, and required clearances.

PROJECT NAME




3. Ground rod and grounding cable locations.

B. [Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT

CONDITIONS] Submit certification that transformer assembly and components will

withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls

for Electrical Systems." Include the following:


test of assembled components or on calculation. [select “a’ or ‘b” below]

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without

separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces

specified."

b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without

separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces

specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."




based and their installation requirements.]

C. Source quality-control test reports.


E. Follow-up service reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformer and accessories to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

transformers and are based on the specific system indicated.

1. Product Selection for Restricted Spaces: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for

switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other

items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

C. Comply with IEEE C2.

D. Liquid filled: Comply with ANSI C57.12.10, ANSI C57.12.28.

PROJECT NAME




E. Dry type: Comply with IEEE C57.12.01, ANSI C57.21.50, ANSI C57.12.51, IEEE C57.12.56,

IEEE C57.12.91, and IEEE C57.94.

F. Oil or dry type: IEEE C57.12.70 and IEEE C57.12.80.

G. Comply with NFPA 70.

H. Comply with FM Global requirements.

I. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.


A. Store transformers protected from weather and so condensation will not form on or in units.

Provide temporary heating according to manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Service Conditions: IEEE C37.121, usual service conditions except for the following:

[EDIT FOR PROJECT CONDITIONS]

1. Exposure to significant solar radiation.

2. Altitudes above 3300 feet (1000 m).

3. Exposure to fumes, vapors, or dust.

4. Exposure to explosive environments.

5. Exposure to hot and humid climate or to excessive moisture, including steam, salt spray,

and dripping water.

6. Exposure to seismic shock or to abnormal vibration, shock, or tilting.

7. Exposure to excessively high or low temperatures.

8. Unusual transportation or storage conditions.

9. Unusual grounding-resistance conditions.

10. Unusual space limitations.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate installation of louvers, doors, spill retention areas, and sumps. Coordinate

installation so no piping or conduits are installed in space allocated for medium-voltage

transformers except those directly associated with transformers.

PROJECT NAME




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. ABB.

2. Cooper Industries; Cooper Power Systems Division.

3. Cutler-Hammer.

4. GE Electrical Distribution & Control.

5. Square D; Schneider Electric.

2.2 LIQUID-FILLED DISTRIBUTION AND POWER TRANSFORMERS

A. Description: IEEE C57.12.00 and UL 1062, liquid-filled, 2-winding transformers installed

indoors, typically as part of a unit substation assembly.

B. Insulating Liquid: Less flammable, silicone-based dielectric and UL listed as complying with

NFPA 70 requirements for fire point of not less than 300 deg C when tested according to

ASTM D 92. Liquid shall be FM approved and have low toxicity and be nonhazardous.

C. Insulation Temperature Rise: 65/55 deg C, based on an average ambient temperature of 30

deg C over 24 hours with a maximum ambient temperature of 40 deg C. Insulation system shall

be rated to continuously allow an additional 12 percent kilovolt-ampere output, at 65 deg C

temperature rise, without decreasing rated transformer life.

D. High-voltage and low-voltage windings shall be copper. Insulation between layers of the

windings shall be by thermally set insulating paper or equal.

E. Basic Impulse Level: [60 for 5 kV] [95 for 15 kV].

F. Full-Capacity Voltage Taps: Four nominal 2.5 percent taps, 2 above and 2 below rated primary

voltage; with externally operable tap changer for de-energized use and with position indicator

and padlock hasp.

G. Cooling System: Class OA/FA, self-cooled, and with forced-air-cooled rating. Cooling

systems shall include auxiliary cooling equipment, automatic controls, and status indicating

lights.

H. Sound level may not exceed sound levels listed in NEMA TR 1, without fans operating.

I. Impedance: +/- 7-1/2%.

J. Accessories: Grounding pads, lifting lugs, and provisions for jacking under base. Transformers

shall have a steel base and frame allowing use of pipe rollers in any direction, and an insulated,

low-voltage, neutral bushing with removable ground strap. Include the following additional

accessories:

1. Liquid-level gage.

PROJECT NAME




2. Pressure-vacuum gage.

3. Liquid temperature indicator.

4. Drain and filter valves.

5. Pressure relief device.

6. Additional nameplate with FM approval data.

2.3 DRY TYPE DISTRIBUTION AND POWER TRANSFORMERS

A. Description: NEMA and ANSI C57 compliant and UL 1062, 2-winding transformers installed

indoors, typically as part of a unit substation assembly. UL labeled.

B. Primary terminations shall be designed for close coupling to [a metal enclosed air load break

switch section] [an air terminal chamber provided with the transformer]. Secondary

terminations shall be designed for close coupling to [a switchgear section] [a switchboard

section].

C. Cores shall be manufactured from non-aging, cold rolled, high permeability grain oriented

silicone steel.

D. High and Low Voltage windings shall be Copper.

E. Insulating System: Coils shall be insulated with 220º C Class H Nomex® insulation system.

Environmental protection shall be provided by vacuum pressure impregnation with polyester

resin (VPI).

F. Insulation Temperature Rise: 115º C, based on an average ambient temperature of 30º C over

24 hours with a maximum ambient temperature of 40º C. Insulation system shall be rated to

allow the transformer to be overloaded to the 150º C temperature rise, without decreasing rated

transformer life.

G. Basic Impulse Level: [60 for 5 kV] [95 for 15 kV].

H. Full-Capacity Voltage Taps: Four nominal 2.5% taps, 2 above and 2 below rated primary

voltage; accessible by removing the enclosure panels.

I. Cooling System: Class OA/FA, self-cooled, and with forced-air-cooled rating. Fan cooling

package shall be provided and include auxiliary cooling equipment, automatic controls, digital

winding temperature and status indicating lights.

J. Heavy gauge, sheet steel NEMA 1 enclosure, ventilated, with removable panels for access to

taps. The complete case shall be capable of being knocked down to reduce size and weight for

rigging. Rubber vibration isolation pads shall be installed by the manufacturer between the core

and coil and the enclosure. Finish: manufacturer’s standard ANSI 61 paint finish.

K. Sound level may not exceed sound levels listed in NEMA TR 1, without fans operating.

L. Impedance: +/- 7-1/2%.

M. Accessories: Grounding pads, lifting lugs, and provisions for jacking under base. Transformers

shall have a steel base and frame allowing use of pipe rollers in any direction, and an insulated,

PROJECT NAME




low-voltage, neutral bushing with removable ground strap. Include the following additional

accessories:

1. Alarm contacts for gages and thermometer listed above.

2. Ventilation grilles.

3. Provisions for rolling.

4. Core ground strap.

5. Diagrammatic nameplate.

2.4 PAD-MOUNTED, LIQUID-FILLED TRANSFORMERS

A. Description: ANSI C57.12.13, ANSI C57.12.26, IEEE C57.12.00, for pad-mounted, 2-winding

transformers, stainless-steel tank base, cabinet, and sills, typically installed outdoors.

B. Insulating Liquid: Less flammable, silicone-based dielectric and UL listed as complying with

NFPA 70 requirements for fire point of not less than 300 deg C when tested according to

ASTM D 92. Liquid shall be FM approved and have low toxicity and be nonhazardous.

C. Insulation Temperature Rise: 65 deg C when operated at rated kVA output in a 40 deg C

ambient temperature. Transformer shall be rated to operate at rated kilovolt ampere in an

average ambient temperature of 30 deg C over 24 hours with a maximum ambient temperature

of 40 deg C without loss of service life expectancy.

D. High-voltage and low-voltage windings shall be copper. Insulation between layers of the

windings shall be by thermally set insulating paper or equal.

E. Basic Impulse Level: [60 for 5 kV] [95 for 15 kV].

F. Impedance: +/- 7-1/2%.

G. Full-Capacity Voltage Taps: Four 2.5 percent taps, 2 above and 2 below rated high voltage;

with externally operable tap changer for de-energized use and with position indicator and

padlock hasp.

H. High-Voltage Switch: Separately mounted [5 kV] [15 kV] metal-enclosed fused interrupter

switch complying with Section 261300.

I. Surge Arresters: Distribution class, one for each primary phase; complying with IEEE C62.11

and NEMA LA 1; support from tank wall within high-voltage compartment.

J. High-Voltage Terminations and Equipment: Live front with externally clamped, wet process,

porcelain bushings and cable connectors suitable for terminating primary cable.

K. Accessories:

1. Drain Valve: 1 inch (25 mm), with sampling device.

2. Dial-type thermometer.

3. Liquid-level gage.

4. 1 inch upper filter press and filling plug.

5. Pressure-vacuum gage.

6. Pressure Relief Device: Self-sealing with an indicator.

PROJECT NAME




7. Mounting provisions for low-voltage current transformers. [DELETE IF NOT

REQUIRED]

8. Mounting provisions for low-voltage potential transformers. [DELETE IF NOT

REQUIRED]

9. Alarm contacts for gages and thermometer listed above.

10. Additional nameplate with FM approval data.

11. ANSI tank grounding provisions shall be furnished in both compartments.


A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer, mounted

with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 26

Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Factory Tests: Perform design and routine tests according to standards specified for

components. Conduct transformer tests according to IEEE C57.12.90, for liquid filled

transformers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for medium-voltage

transformers.

B. Examine roughing-in of conduits and grounding systems to verify the following:

1. Wiring entries comply with layout requirements.

2. Entries are within conduit-entry tolerances specified by manufacturer and no feeders will

have to cross section barriers to reach load or line lugs.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where

transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and that requirements in Division 26 Section

"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance

shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install pad mounted transformers on concrete bases designed by the Structural Engineer.

B. Install indoor transformers on 4-inch (100-mm) high concrete housekeeping pads.

PROJECT NAME




1. Anchor transformers to concrete pads according to manufacturer's written instructions

[and seismic codes at Project], and requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and

Supports for Electrical Systems."

2. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as

specified in Division 03 Sections.

3. Install dowel rods to connect concrete pad to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of pad.

4. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts, for supported equipment, that extend through concrete

pad and anchor into structural concrete floor.

5. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be

embedded.

C. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written

instructions and NFPA 70.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in

Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."

C. Verify tightness and torque all accessible bolted electrical connections to manufacturer’s

specified values using a calibrated torque wrench. Provide a list of all torqued connections and

values.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing transformers but before primary is energized, verify that grounding

system at substation is tested at specified value or less.

2. After installing transformers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for


3. Perform visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS.

Certify compliance with test parameters.

PROJECT NAME




4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.


D. Test Reports: Prepare written reports to record the following:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective actions taken to achieve


3.6 FOLLOW-UP SERVICE

A. Infrared Scanning: Perform as specified in Division 26 Section "Medium-Voltage Switchgear."




MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 261300 - 1

SECTION 261300 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear and metal-clad, circuit-breaker switchgear with the following optional components, features, and accessories:

1. Copper, silver-plated main bus at connection points. 2. Communication modules. 3. Analog instruments. 4. Protective Relays and current transformers. 5. Surge arresters. 6. Provisions for future devices. 7. Fungus proofing. 8. Control battery system. 9. Mimic bus.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for interfacing

communication and metering. 2. Division 26 Section "Secondary Unit Substations" for medium voltage fused interrupter

switchgear used as incoming primary equipment. 3. Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study" for short-circuit

rating of devices and for setting of overcurrent protective devices and protective relays.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.

B. GFCI: Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of switchgear and related equipment, include the following:

1. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for individual interrupter switches and circuit breakers.

2. Time-current characteristic curves for overcurrent protective devices, including circuit-breaker relay trip devices and fusible devices.




B. Shop Drawings: For each type of switchgear and related equipment, include the following:

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show method of field assembly and location and size of each field connection. Include the following:

a. Tabulation of installed devices with features and ratings. b. Outline and general arrangement drawing showing dimensions, shipping sections,

and weights of each assembled section. c. Drawing of cable termination compartments showing preferred locations for

conduits and indicating space available for cable terminations. d. Floor plan drawing showing locations for anchor bolts. e. Current ratings of buses. f. Short-time and short-circuit ratings of switchgear assembly. g. Nameplate legends. h. Mimic-bus diagram. i. Utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility

company.

2. [Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.]

3. Wiring Diagrams: For each type of switchgear and related equipment, include the following:

a. Power, signal, and control wiring. b. Three-line diagrams of current and future secondary circuits showing device

terminal numbers and internal diagrams. c. Schematic control diagrams. d. Diagrams showing connections of component devices and equipment. e. Schematic diagrams showing connections to remote devices including power

monitoring and control devices.

C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around switchgear where piping and ducts are prohibited. Show switchgear layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Identify field measurements.

D. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified finish. Manufacturer's color charts showing colors available for mimic bus.

E. [Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that switchgear, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. [select “a” or “b” below]







3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

4. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.]

F. Source quality-control test reports.

G. Field quality-control test reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchgear and switchgear components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of switchgear and associated components through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of switchgear and are based on the specific system indicated.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by UL and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with IEEE C2.




A. Deliver in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path as indicated.

B. Store switchgear indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect switchgear from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

C. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover switchgear to provide protection from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable




materials from inside switchgear; install electric heating (250 W per section) to prevent condensation.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation at indicated ampere ratings for the following conditions:

1. Ambient temperature not exceeding [122 deg F (50 deg C)] [140 deg F (60 deg C)]. 2. Altitude of <Insert elevation> above sea level.

B. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace building components and structures to provide pathway for moving switchgear into place.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchgear, including clearances between switchgear and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: [DELETE THIS PARAGRAPH IF NOT REQUIRED] Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Cleveland Clinic or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:





1.8 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear and components with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required clearances for workspace and equipment access doors and panels.

C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.




1. Fuses: Six of each type and rating used. Include spares for future transformers, control power circuits, and fusible devices.

2. Circuit breaker: fully equipped spare MV circuit breaker crated and labeled.

B. Maintenance Tools: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for switchgear test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. Include the following:

1. Fuse-handling tool. 2. Extension rails, lifting device, transport dolly or mobile lift, and all other items necessary

to remove circuit breaker from housing and transport to remote location. 3. Racking handle to move circuit breaker manually between connected and disconnected

positions, and a secondary test coupler to permit testing of circuit breaker without removal from switchgear.

4. Remote operated, motor driven, racking device.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

manufacturers specified.


A. Description: Factory assembled and tested.

B. Ratings: Suitable for application in 3-phase, 60-Hz, solidly grounded-neutral system.

C. System Voltage: [4.16 kV nominal; 4.76 kV maximum] [7.2 kV nominal; 15 kV maximum] [13.8 kV nominal; 15 kV maximum] [34.5 kV nominal; 38 kV maximum].

2.3 METAL-ENCLOSED INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR

A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Eaton Corporation Electrical Group “MVS”, or equal by: 2. General Electric. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Comply with IEEE C37.20.3.

C. Comply with IEEE C37.20.7.

D. Design Level of Available-Source Fault Current: Integrated short-circuit rating consistent with value of fault current indicated.




E. Ratings: Comply with standard ratings designated in IEEE C37.20.3 for maximum-rated voltage specified.

1. Main-Bus Rating: <insert rating> A, continuous.

F. Interrupter Switches: Stationary, 3-pole, gang-operated, and suitable for application at maximum short-circuit rating of integrated switchgear assembly.

1. Rating: [600] [1200]-A continuous duty and load break. 2. Duty-Cycle, Fault Closing: [25,000] [40,000] asymmetrical A. 3. Switch Action: No external arc and no significant quantities of ionized gas released into

the enclosure. 4. Switch Construction: Supported entirely by interior framework of structure, with copper

switchblades and stored-energy operating mechanism. 5. The speed of opening and closing the switch shall be independent of the operator, and it

shall be impossible to “tease” the switch into any intermediate position under normal operation.

6. A maintenance provision for slow closing the switch to check switch blade engagement and slow opening the switch to check operation of the arc interrupting contacts.

7. Phase Barriers: Full length of switchblades and fuses for each pole; designed for easy removal; allow visual inspection of switch components if barrier is in place.

8. Protective Shields: Cover live components and terminals. 9. Fuses: De-energized if switch is open. 10. Surge Arrestors on load side of fuse. 11. Ground Ball Studs shall be provided on all phase, neutral and ground bus to allow for

apparatus grounding clamps during maintenance.

G. Mechanical Interlock: Prevent opening switch compartment door unless switchblades are open, and prevent closing switch if door is open.

1. Green-OPEN, Red-CLOSED switch position indicators (FLAGS) with the words “Open” and “Closed” in French, Spanish and English.

H. Network Communications Equipment: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems with the following features: 1. The communication system network shall be as described in Section 260913. 2. Each load interrupter switch position (open and closed), where shown, shall communicate

via an addressable relay. This relay shall communicate over the network. The relay shall monitor an auxiliary switch contact that monitors the primary switch position and shall be rated for the application. Each relay shall have a unique address so that it is possible to “call up” and “read” each load interrupter switch’s position from a host computer.

3. A blown high voltage fuse condition on each set of three (3) fuses shall be monitored by an addressable relay. Any blown fuse operation shall be communicated immediately over the network via the monitoring addressable relay. Each relay shall have a unique address so that it is possible to “call up” and “read” a fuse blown operation for a set of fuses with the communication system.

I. Window: Minimum 8-inch x 16-inch high-impact viewing window that permits full view of the position of all three switch blades through the closed door. The window shall not be more than 58-inches above the switch pad level to allow ease of inspection.




J. Key Interlocks: Arranged for interlocking schemes indicated.

K. Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least three padlocks on each switch to secure its enclosure and prevent movement of drawout mechanism. Provisions shall be included for padlocking in the open or closed position.

L. Power Fuses: Comply with the following and with applicable requirements in NEMA SG 2:

1. Indicator: Integral with each fuse to indicate when it has blown. 2. Mounting: Positively held in position with provision for easy removal and replacement

from front without special tools. 3. Current-Limiting, E-rated Fuses: Full-range, fast-replaceable, current-limiting type rated

for not less than 50-kA RMS symmetrical current-interrupting capacity that will operate without explosive noise or expulsion of gas, vapor, or foreign matter from tube.

4. Spares: Include three fuses in use and three spare fuses in storage clips in each switch

2.4 METAL-CLAD, CIRCUIT-BREAKER SWITCHGEAR

A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Eaton Corporation Electrical Group “VAC-CLAD” or equal by: 2. General Electric Distribution & Control. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Comply with IEEE C37.20.2.

C. Comply with IEEE C37.20.7.

D. SCA Rating: [25] [40] [50] [63] kA.

E. Ratings: Comply with IEEE C37.04.

1. Main-Bus Rating: <INSERT RATING> A, continuous.

F. Circuit Breakers: Three-pole, single-throw, electrically operated, drawout-mounting units using three individual, vacuum-sealed interrupter modules and including the following features:

1. Designed to operate at rated voltage to interrupt fault current within its rating within three cycles of trip initiation. For systems with X/R ratio of 17 or less, transient voltage during interruption shall not exceed twice the rated line-to-ground voltage of the system. K=1 rated.

2. Contact-Wear Indicator: Readily accessible to field maintenance personnel. 3. Spare contacts: six each Type A and Type B. 4. Protective relays and current transformers as shown on Drawings.

a. Protective relays shall be Schweitzer type______. 5. Interchangeability: Circuit breakers are interchangeable with vacuum circuit breakers of

same current and interrupting ratings. 6. Closed door drawout mechanism.

7. Operating Mechanism: Electrically charged, mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operated.




a. Closing speed of moving contacts to be independent of both control and operator. b. Design mechanism to permit manual charging and slow closing of contacts for

inspection or adjustment.

1) Control Power: 125 -V dc for closing and tripping.

c. Provide shunt trip capability independent of overcurrent trip.

G. Test Accessories: Relay and meter test plugs.

H. Low-DC-Voltage Alarm: Switchgear shall have a monitor for dc control power voltage with a remote alarm located where indicated. Alarm shall sound if voltage falls to an adjustable value to indicate an impending battery failure. Factory set alarm value at 80 percent of full-charge voltage.

I. Grounding and Testing Device: Suitable for phasing out, testing, and grounding switchgear bus or feeder if device is installed in place of circuit breaker. Include the following:

1. Portable Grounding and Testing Device: Interchangeable with drawout-mounting, medium-voltage circuit breakers to provide interlocked electrical access to either bus or feeder; electrically operated.

2. System control cabinet permanently mounted near switchgear. 3. Portable Remote-Control Station: For grounding and testing device. 4. Control-Cabinet Coupler Cable: Of adequate length to connect device inserted in any

switchgear cubicle and control cabinet. 5. Remote-Control Coupler Cable: 50 feet (15 m) long to connect control cabinet and

portable remote-control station. 6. Permanent Control Power Wiring: From control cabinet to power source. 7. Protective Cover: Fabricated of heavy-duty plastic and fitted to device. 8. Approval of Grounding and Testing Device System: Obtain approval of final system

design from utility company and agency designated by Cleveland Clinic to handle future maintenance of medium-voltage switchgear.

J. Ground Ball Studs: Ground ball studs shall be provided on load side of circuit breakers and line side of main to allow for apparatus grounding clamps during maintenance.

K. Main-Tie-Main arrangements shall have automatic throw-over controls.

L. Key Interlocks: Arranged for interlocking schemes indicated.

M. Network Communications Equipment: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems with the following features: 1. The communication system network shall be as described in Section 260913. 2. Each breaker position (open and closed) shall be communicated via an addressable relay.

This relay shall communicate over the network. The relay shall monitor an auxiliary switch contact that monitors the breaker position and shall be rated for the application. Each relay shall have a unique address so that it is possible to “call up” and “read” each breaker’s position from a host computer.

3. The manufacturer shall wire between all communications capable devices within the switchgear, including relays and electronic meters with the same protocol and wire to a set of easily accessible terminal blocks.




4. Control power for addressable relays shall be 120 volts, 60 Hz available from a fused control transformer.

2.5 TEST CABINET

A. Circuit-Breaker Test Cabinet: Separately mounted and containing push buttons for circuit-breaker closing and tripping, control relay, fuses, and secondary coupler with cable approximately 108 inches (2740 mm) long. Include a set of secondary devices for operating circuit breaker if removed from switchgear and moved near test cabinet. Include provision for storage of test and maintenance accessories in cabinet.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Indoor Enclosure: Steel.

B. Outdoor Enclosure: NEMA Type 3R, galvanized steel, listed for installation outdoors.

1. Each compartment shall have the following features:

a. Structural design and anchorage adequate to resist loads imposed by 125-mph (200-km/h) wind.

b. Space heater operating at one-half or less of rated voltage, sized to prevent condensation.

c. Aisle-less construction, full height doors in front of basic weatherproof equipment, rear hinged doors for each section, all with provisions for padlocking. Downward, rearward sloping roof. Integral structural steel base frame with factory-applied undercoating.

d. Interior light with switch. e. Weatherproof GFCI duplex receptacle. f. Power for heaters, lights, and receptacles to be provided by control power

transformer. g. Ventilation louvers equipped with insect and rodent screen and filter, and arranged

to permit air circulation while excluding rodents and exterior dust.

C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray finish over rust-inhibiting primer on phosphatizing-treated metal surfaces.

D. Bus Transition Unit: Arranged to suit bus and adjacent units.

E. Incoming-Line Unit: Arranged to suit incoming line.

F. Outgoing Feeder Units: Arranged to suit distribution feeders.

G. Auxiliary Compartments: Arranged to house customer metering, relays, controls, and auxiliary equipment; isolated from medium-voltage components.

H. Inspection windows, 4” diameter, in front/rear panels of each cubicle, to permit thermal imaging of terminations, with sliding cover.




2.7 COMPONENTS

A. Main Bus: Copper, silver plated at connection points; full length of switchgear.

B. Ground Bus: Copper, silver plated or copper, tin plated; minimum size 1/4 by 2 inches (6 by 50 mm); full length of switchgear.

C. Bus Insulation: Covered with flame-retardant insulation.

D. Provide insulating boots on all cable terminations.

E. Instrument Transformers: Comply with IEEE C57.13.

1. Potential Transformers: Secondary voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy class of 0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y.

2. Current Transformers: Burden and accuracy class suitable for connected relays, meters, and instruments.

F. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems, listed and labeled by an NRTL, and with the following features:

1. Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential terminals rated to 600 V.

2. Switch-selectable digital display with the following features:

a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. d. Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent. e. Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent. f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent. g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. h. Integrated Demand, with Demand Interval Selectable from 5 to 60 Minutes: Plus

or minus 2 percent. i. Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours (joules), plus or minus 2 percent; stored

values unaffected by power outages for up to 72 hours. 3. Mounting: Display and control unit that is flush or semi-flush mounted in instrument

compartment door.

G. Network Communications: Coordinate remote monitoring communication module package with power monitoring equipment specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for successful transmission and remote readout of monitoring data.

1. Connect remote monitoring communication module to Cleveland Clinic’s data network through appropriate network interface unit.

2. The manufacturer shall wire between all communications capable devices within the switchgear, including electronic meters with the same protocol and wire to a set of easily accessible terminal blocks suitable for remote monitoring of meter quantities and functions.




a. Control power shall be 120 volts, 60 Hz available from a fused control transformer.

H. Protective Relays: Comply with IEEE C37.90, integrated digital type; with test blocks and plugs.

I. Surge Arresters: Distribution class [SPECIFY RATING], metal-oxide-varistor type. Comply with NEMA LA 1.

1. Install in cable termination compartments in each phase of circuit. 2. Coordinate rating with circuit voltage.

J. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for switchgear interior, including instruments and instrument transformers. [TROPICAL LOCATIONS ONLY]

K. Control Power Supply for Metal-Clad Switchgear: Control power transformer supplies 120-V control circuits through secondary disconnect devices. Include the following features:

1. Dry-type transformers, in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA, including primary and secondary fuses.

2. Two control power transformers in separate compartments with necessary interlocking relays; each transformer connected to line side of associated main switch for M-T-M arrangements.

a. Secondary windings connected through relay(s) to control bus to affect an automatic transfer scheme.

b. Secondary windings connected through an internal automatic transfer switch to switchgear control power bus.

3. Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses provide current-limiting and overload protection.

L. Control Wiring: Factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and protection; and complying with the following:

1. Flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.

2. Conductors sized according to NFPA 70 for duty required.

2.8 CONTROL BATTERY SYSTEM for METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR

A. System Requirements: Battery shall have number of cells and ampere-hour capacity based on an initial specific gravity of 1.210 at 25 deg C with electrolyte at normal level and minimum ambient temperature of 13 deg C. Cycle battery before shipment to guarantee rated capacity on installation. Arrange battery to operate ungrounded.

B. Battery: Lead-calcium, maintenance-free type in sealed, clear plastic or glass containers, complete with electrolyte, fully charged and arranged for shipment with electrolyte in cells. Limit weight of each container to not more than 70 lb (32 kg) and cells per container to not more than 3. System batteries shall be suitable for service at an ambient temperature ranging




from minus 18 to 25 deg C. Limit variation of current output to 0.8 percent for each degree below 25 deg C down to minus 8 deg C. For outdoor installations: Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above 10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article.

C. Rack: Two-step rack with electrical connections between battery cells and between rows of cells; include two flexible connectors with bolted-type terminals for output leads. [Rate battery rack, cell supports, and anchorage for seismic requirements.]

D. Accessories:

1. Thermometers with specific-gravity correction scales. 2. Hydrometer syringes. 3. Set of socket wrenches and other tools required for battery maintenance. 4. Wall-mounting, nonmetallic storage rack fitted to store above items. 5. Set of cell numerals.

E. Charger: Provide products by La Marche. Static-type silicon rectifier equipped with automatic regulation and provision for manual and automatic adjustment of charging rate. Unit shall automatically maintain output voltage within 0.5 percent from no load to rated charger output current, with ac input-voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent and input-frequency variation of plus or minus 3 Hz. Other features of charger include the following:

1. DC ammeter. 2. DC Voltmeter: Maximum error of 5 percent at full-charge voltage; operates with toggle

switch to select between battery and charger voltages. 3. Ground Indication: Two appropriately labeled lights to indicate circuit ground, connected

in series between negative and positive terminals, with midpoint junction connected to ground by normally open push-button contact.

4. Capacity: Sufficient to supply steady load, float-charge battery between 2.20 and 2.25 V per cell and equalizing charge at 2.33 V per cell.

5. Charging-Rate Switch: Manually operated switch provides for transferring to higher charging rate. Charger operates automatically after switch operation until manually reset.

6. AC power supply is 120 V, 60 Hz, subject to plus or minus 10 percent variation in voltage and plus or minus 3-Hz variation in frequency. After loss of ac power supply for any interval, charger automatically resumes charging battery. Charger regulates rate of charge to prevent damage due to overload and to prevent fuses or circuit breakers from opening.

7. Protective Feature: Current-limiting device or circuit, which limits output current to rating of charger but does not disconnect charger from either battery or ac supply; to protect charger from damage due to overload, including short circuit on output terminals.

8. Electrical Filtering: Reduces charger's audible noise to less than 26 dB.

2.9 UTILITY COMPANY EQUIPMENT

A. Where required, provide separate cubicles for utility metering equipment. Utility metering vertical section shall contain provisions for current transformers and voltage transformers as required by the Utility. The construction shall conform to the Utility Company’s metering standards. It shall also conform to the general electrical and construction design of the switchgear specified above.




B. Provide suitable arrangements within the utility primary metering cubicles for mounting metering equipment, including drilling or tapping the bus. Obtain the Utility's approval of the cubicle arrangements prior to fabrication of the switchgear.

C. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the installation of utility metering equipment by utility personnel.

2.10 SPACE FOR FUTURE DEVICES

A. Where indicated on the Drawings, "space" shall mean fully provisioned space ready for inserting a circuit breaker at a future date without any future modifications. Provide current transformers sized according to the breaker frame size. A blank door shall close off the front of the compartment.

2.11 IDENTIFICATION

A. Materials: Refer to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Identify units, devices, controls, and wiring.

B. Mimic Bus: Continuous mimic bus applied to front of switchgear, arranged in single-line diagram format, using symbols and lettered designations consistent with approved final mimic-bus diagram.

1. Mimic-bus segments coordinated with devices in switchgear sections to which applied, to produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchgear components and connections.

2. Medium: Painted graphics, as approved. 3. Color: Contrasting with factory-finish background.


A. Before shipment of equipment, perform the following tests and prepare test reports:

1. Production tests on circuit breakers according to ANSI C37.09. 2. Production tests on completed switchgear assembly according to IEEE C37.20.2.

B. Assemble switchgear and equipment in manufacturer's plant and perform the following:

1. Functional tests of all relays, instruments, meters, and control devices by application of secondary three-phase voltage to voltage circuits and injection of current in current transformer secondary circuits.

2. Functional test of all control and trip circuits. Connect test devices into circuits to simulate operation of controlled remote equipment such as circuit-breaker trip coils, close coils, and auxiliary contacts. Test proper operation of relay targets.

C. Prepare equipment for shipment.

1. Provide suitable crating, blocking, and supports so equipment will withstand expected domestic shipping and handling shocks and vibration.




2. Weatherproof equipment for shipment. Close connection openings to prevent entrance of foreign material during shipment and storage.

2.13 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color finish applied to equipment before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchgear for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, required clearances, and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Anchor switchgear assembly to concrete base and attach by bolting. 1. [Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements

and according to seismic-restraint details. See Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for seismic-restraint requirements.]

2. Interior location: Concrete base 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no less than 3 inches (75 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switchgear, unless otherwise indicated [or unless required for seismic anchor support.] Construct concrete bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3. Exterior location: Mount switchgear on concrete slabs. Unless otherwise indicated, the slab shall be at least 8 inches (200mm) thick, reinforced with a 6 by 6 inch (150 by 150-mm) No. 6 mesh placed uniformly 4 inches (100-mm) from the top of the slab. Slab shall be placed on a 6 inch (150-mm) thick, well-compacted gravel base. The top of the concrete slab shall be approximately 4 inches (100-mm) above the finished grade. Edges shall be chamfered. The slab shall be of adequate size to project at least 8 inches (200-mm) beyond the equipment. a. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa) 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement

as specified in Division 03 Sections.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Diagram and Instructions:




1. Frame under clear acrylic plastic on front of switchgear.

a. Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for switchgear, including control and key-interlock sequences and emergency procedures.

b. System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution components, and major loads.

2. Storage for Maintenance: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a copy of maintenance manual.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Cable terminations at switchgear are specified in Division 26 Section "Medium-Voltage Cables."

B. Tighten bus joints, electrical connectors, and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values using a calibrated torque wrench. Provide a list of all torqued connections and values.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Sections "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" and "Medium-Voltage Cables."

E. Provide all communications wiring between remote monitoring communication modules and the Cleveland Clinic’s data network. Verify that each circuit breaker’s address for microprocessor-communication packages corresponds to Division 26 Section “Electrical Power Monitoring and Control Systems” requirements.


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each switchgear bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following:

1. Inspect switchgear, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust components and equipment.

2. Assist in field testing of equipment. 3. Report results in writing.

C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:




1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for each of the following NETA categories:

a. Switchgear. b. Circuit breakers. c. Protective relays. d. Instrument transformers. e. Metering and instrumentation. f. Ground-fault systems. g. Battery systems. h. Surge arresters.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform infrared scan of each switchgear lineup. Remove front and rear panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 1. Instrument: Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect

significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 2. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switchgear checked


3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics according to results in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study." Post a durable copy of the "as-left" relay settings and fuse ratings in a convenient location within the switchgear.

3.7 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchgear. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair damaged finishes.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to switchgear, according to manufacturer's written instructions, throughout periods when switchgear environment is not controlled for temperature and humidity within manufacturers’ stipulated service conditions.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Cleveland Clinic's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear.




ISOLATED POWER CENTERS 262011 - 1

SECTION 262011 – ISOLATED POWER CENTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes Isolated Power Panelboards (IPP) and Line Isolation Monitors (LIM) to be installed in operating rooms and other designated clinical spaces, such as Laser suite.

B. Related sections:

1. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for receptacles and grounding jacks.


A. [DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED] Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."



B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 6. Include wiring diagrams for power and LIM wiring. 7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards.





A. [DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED ] Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."


C. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards.


A. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.




1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by PG Life-Link (Post Glover), IDP Series. Other acceptable manufacturers include: 1. SquareD/Schneider. 2. Isotrol/Bender.




2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ISOLATED POWER PANELBOARDS

A. [ DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED] Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Flush-mounted cabinets of 14 GA galvanized steel and a backplate of 12 GA steel with a finish coat of white or ivory epoxy enamel. Comply with UL 50.

1. Front trim shall be 14 GA, type 304 stainless steel polished to a #4 brushed finish.

2. Front trim: Secured to box with ten stainless steel screws and washers with standard door within trim cover.

a. The front trim shall extend one inch on all sides of the backbox. b. The front trim shall contain a cutout for the LIM which shall be visible at all times. c. The door shall contain a flush key-locking slam latch. d. The door shall have a full length hinge. e. With door open only the circuit breaker handles shall be accessible.

3. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

1. Reference ground bus shall have one - #4-2/0 and nineteen - #14-4 ground lugs.

D. Conductor Connectors: Mechanical type. Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

E. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.3 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Mains: Circuit breaker.

B. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Up to sixteen circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

C. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 1047, fully rated to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Full size, bolt-on, two pole, inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits, minimum 10,000 AIC. Silver alloy contacts.

2.4 ISOLATION TRANSFORMER

A. Isolation transformer: single phase, 60 Hz, with kVA, primary and secondary voltages as indicated on drawings. Comply with UL 506. 1. Class H insulation.




2. Electrostatic shield between primary and secondary grounded to case. 3. Leakage current to ground shall comply with UL 1047. 4. Maximum sound level shall not exceed 35 dB. 5. Temperature rise limited to 115 deg C under full load. 6. Self cooled by natural convection. 6. Transformer to be mounted in an upright position on a 12 GA shelf mounted to the back

box by at least four bolts.

2.5 LINE ISOLATION MONITOR

A. Line Isolation Monitor (LIM): self testing and self calibrating; shall continuously monitor the impedance of each phase to ground; shall be capable of detecting all combinations of resistive and capacitive faults, balanced, unbalanced, and hybrid. 1. Comply with UL 1022 and NFPA 99. 2. Indicating LED’s: GREEN indicates “safe”, RED indicates “hazard”. 3. When total hazard current reaches 2 mA or 5 mA (field adjustable), audible alarm shall

sound and red LED shall illuminate. 4. Momentary test switch shall be provided. 5. Analog and digital display. 6. Remote Alarm Panel: Provide remote annunciation and control of LIM functions.

2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Power Receptacle Panels: Flush, mounted, galvanized steel backbox with 4 -20A hospital grade, red, duplex receptacles or 4 single twist lock receptacles, mounted in a 14 GA, polished 304 stainless steel trim cover. The back box shall contain a copper ground bus with 18 connection points plus one lug to accommodate up to one #1/0 conductor.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of simulated faults, provide an isolated power system test kit. Not required if Facility has existing test kit for similar panels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. [DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED] [Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."]

C. Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

E. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future.




F. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

G. Install quantity of Power Receptacle and Ground Jack panels as indicated on Drawings.

H. All wiring shall be color coded, type XHHW with cross-linked PE insulation and a dielectric constant of 3.5 or less, installed in EMT.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Cleveland Clinic's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. A factory technician shall perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit, verify circuit is clear of ground faults, shorts, and open circuits.

3. Check calibration of the LIM.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification and Manufacturer’s recommendations. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection report, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial actions taken, and observations after remedial action.

F. Cleaning: Vacuum dirt and debris from panelboard tubs; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.




LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 1

SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA:

1. Distribution transformers.


A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.



A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT CONDITIONS] Submit certification that transformers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.








B. Source quality-control test reports.


D. Submit Letter of Compliance with NEMA TP-1 and DOE 2010.

E. Submit certification of sound level compliance.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."

D. Comply with


F. Comply with FM Global requirements.


A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.




B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Corp. Electrical Group. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Schneider Electric; Square D.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.

C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Copper.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NEMA ST 20 and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT CONDITIONS].

C. Cores: One leg per phase.

D. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.

1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

E. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 3R.

1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

F. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

1. Finish Color: ANSI 61 gray.

G. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.




H. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

I. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:

1. Comply with NEMA TP 1, exceed CSL-3 efficiency levels. 2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2. 3. Comply with DOE 2010.

J. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for non-sinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by designated K-factor.

1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion corresponding to designated K-factor.

2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate. 3. The neutral bus shall be configured to accommodate 200% of the rated current.

K. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize inter-winding capacitance.

1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output terminals.

2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield. 3. Shield Effectiveness:

a. Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz.

b. Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz.

c. Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10 kHz.

L. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets. [UP TO 45 KVA ONLY]

M. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core. [RETAIN PARAGRAPH FOR TROPICAL INSTALLATIONS]

N. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.

2.4 DRIVE ISOLATION TRANSFORMERS

A. Motor drive isolation transformers shall be designed for use with three-phase ac adjustable frequency drives 600 volts and below to provide isolation between the incoming line and drive circuitry. These drives minimize the line disturbances caused by SCR firing within the drive unit. Thermo-guards shall be included in all motor drive isolation transformers to provide additional protection for the transformer from increased heating due to the non-sinusoidal characteristics of drive currents. The transformer shall provide reduced short-circuit currents and voltage line transients. The transformer shall be specifically sized to the drive kVA requirements dictated by the horsepower of the motor and, as such, will be mechanically braced




to withstand the stress of current reversals and short-circuit currents associated with the specific drive kVA rating. Transformers shall be low loss type with minimum efficiencies per NEMA TP-1 when operated at 35% of full load capacity.


A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.

B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer.

1. [Brace wall-mounting transformers as specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."]

B. Construct concrete bases 4 inches high for floor mounted transformers and anchor transformers to pad according to manufacturer's written instructions [, seismic codes applicable to Project,] and requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."




C. Do not install transformers in ceiling cavities.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connection to Transformers: Flexible Metallic Conduit (FMC), primary and secondary.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 1. External cable shall be rated 90 degrees C (sized at 75 degrees C ampacity) for

encapsulated and 75 degrees C for ventilated designs. Connectors should be selected on the basis of the type and cable size used to wire the specific transformer.

2. Verify tightness and torque all accessible bolted electrical connections to manufacturer’s specified values using a calibrated torque wrench.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.




D. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

E. Infrared Scanning: after Substantial Completion, but prior to beneficial occupancy, perform an infrared scan of all transformer connections.

1. Uses an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.

2. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action.

F. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.




3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.

B. Output Settings Report: Prepare written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.


CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES MASTER SPECIFICATIONS

ISSUED: 00/00/20XX

LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 262300 - 1

SECTION 262300 - LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal-enclosed, low-voltage power circuit-breaker switchgear rated 1000 V and less for use in AC systems.




3. Division 26 Section "Surge Protective Devices for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits" for transient voltage surge suppressors for low-voltage power, control, and communication equipment located in the switchgear.

4. Division 26 Section "Secondary Unit Substations" for switchgear that forms a part of a unit substation.


A. Product Data: For each type of switchgear, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of switchgear and related equipment.

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Include the following:

a. Tabulation of installed devices with features and ratings. b. Enclosure types and details. c. Outline and general arrangement drawing showing dimensions, shipping sections,

and weights of each assembled section. d. Bus configuration with size and number of conductors in each bus run, including

phase, neutral, and ground conductors of main and branch buses. e. Current rating of buses. f. Short-time and short-circuit current rating of switchgear assembly. g. Nameplate legends. h. Mimic-bus diagram.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


i. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.


C. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified finish. Manufacturer's color charts showing colors available for mimic bus.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around switchgear where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show switchgear layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.

B. [Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that switchgear, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:

1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. [select “a” or “b” below]






D. Updated mimic-bus diagram reflecting field changes after final switchgear load connections have been made, for record.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchgear and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX




1. Fuses: Six of each type and rating used. Include spares for potential transformer fuses and control power fuses.

2. Indicating Lights: Six of each type installed.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain switchgear through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of switchgear and are based on the specific system indicated.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by UL and marked for intended use.





A. Deliver switchgear in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Store switchgear indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect switchgear from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

C. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover switchgear to provide protection from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchgear; install electric heating (250 W per section) to prevent condensation.


A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace building components and structures to provide pathway for moving switchgear into place.

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: [DELETE THIS PARAGRAPH IF NOT REQUIRED] Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Cleveland Clinic or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:



ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Cleveland Clinic's written permission.



C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchgear, including clearances between switchgear, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 40 deg C. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).

1.10 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear and components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required clearances for workspace and equipment access doors and panels.

C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cutler-Hammer, Inc.; Eaton Corporation: Magnum DS. 2. General Electric Company: AKD-20. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric: Power-Zone 4.

2.2 RATINGS

A. Nominal System Voltage [480/277 V, 4] [208/120 V, 4] wire, 60 Hz.

B. Main-Bus Continuous: <Insert size> A.

C. Short-Time and Short-Circuit Current: Match rating of highest-rated circuit breaker in switchgear assembly.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


2.3 FABRICATION

A. Factory assembled and tested and complying with ANSI/IEEE C37.20.1 and UL 1558.

B. Indoor Enclosure Material: Steel.

C. Finish: ANSI/IEEE C37.20.1, manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on phosphatizing-treated metal surfaces.

D. Section barriers between main and tie circuit-breaker compartments shall be extended to rear of section.

E. Bus isolation barriers shall be arranged to isolate line bus from load bus at each main and tie circuit breaker.

F. Circuit-breaker compartments shall be equipped to house drawout-type circuit breakers and shall be fitted with hinged outer doors.

G. Fabricate enclosure with removable, hinged, rear cover panels to allow access to rear interior of switchgear.

H. Inspection windows, 4” diameter, in rear panels to permit thermal imaging of terminations, with sliding cover.

I. Auxiliary Compartments: Match and align with basic switchgear assembly. Include the following: 1. Bus transition sections. 2. Incoming-line sections. 3. Hinged front panels for access to metering, accessory, and blank compartments.

J. Bus bars connect between vertical sections and between compartments. Cable connections are not permitted.

1. Main Phase Bus: Uniform capacity the entire length of assembly. 2. Neutral Bus: 100 percent of phase-bus ampacity, except as indicated. Equip bus with

pressure-connector terminations for outgoing circuit neutral conductors. Include braces for neutral-bus extensions for busway feeders.

3. Vertical Section Bus Size: Comply with IEEE C37.20.1, including allowance for spare circuit breakers and spaces for future circuit breakers.

4. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity, with copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.

5. Use copper for connecting circuit-breaker line to copper bus. 6. Contact Surfaces of Buses: Silver plated. 7. Feeder Circuit-Breaker Load Terminals: Silver-plated copper bus extensions equipped

with pressure connectors for outgoing circuit conductors. 8. Ground Bus: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity, with pressure

connector for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors, minimum size 1/4 by 2 inches (6 by 50 mm).

9. Supports and Bracing for Buses: Adequate strength for indicated short-circuit currents. 10. Service Entrance shall comply with UL Service Entrance requirements: service entrance

label, incoming line isolation barriers, neutral connection to switchgear ground for solidly grounded wye systems.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


11. Neutral bus equipped with pressure-connector terminations for outgoing circuit neutral conductors. Neutral-bus extensions for busway feeders are braced.

12. Neutral Disconnect Link: Bolted, un-insulated, 1/4-by-2-inch (6-by-50-mm) copper bus, arranged to connect neutral bus to ground bus.

13. Provide for future extensions from either end of main phase, neutral, and ground bus by means of predrilled bolt-holes and connecting links.

14. Bus-Bar Insulation: Individual bus bars wrapped with factory-applied, flame-retardant tape or spray-applied, flame-retardant insulation.

a. Sprayed Insulation Thickness: 3 mils (0.08 mm), minimum. b. Bolted Bus Joints: Insulate with secure joint covers that can easily be removed and

reinstalled.

2.4 COMPONENTS

A. Instrument Transformers: Comply with IEEE C57.13.

1. Potential Transformers: Secondary-voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy class of 0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y.

2. Current Transformers: Ratios as indicated; burden and accuracy class suitable for connected relays, meters, and instruments.

B. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: UL-listed or -recognized, microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:

1. Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential terminals rated to 600 V.

2. Switch-selectable digital display of the following:

a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. d. Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent. e. Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent. f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent. g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. h. Integrated Demand, with Demand Interval Selectable from 5 to 60 Minutes: Plus

or minus 2 percent. i. Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours (joules), plus or minus 2 percent; stored

values unaffected by power outages for up to 72 hours.

3. Metering Compartment: Provide 6 port Ethernet switch, graphic display module, meter, gateway, RJ45 to RJ45 receptacle, 120 VAC to 12 VDC power supply. Display and control unit flush or semi-flush mounted in instrument compartment door.

4. Comply with Section 260913, “Electrical Power Monitoring and Control” for metering equipment.

C. Relays: Comply with IEEE C37.90, types and settings as indicated; with test blocks and plugs.

D. Surge Arresters: UL listed surge protective device. Comply with Section 264313.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


E. Provision for Future Devices: Equip compartments with rails, mounting brackets, supports, necessary appurtenances, and bus connections.

F. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for switchgear interior, including instruments and instrument transformers. [For tropical locations only]

G. Control Power Supply: Control power transformer supplying 120-V control circuits through secondary disconnect devices. Include the following features:

1. Dry-type transformers, in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA, including primary and secondary fuses.

2. [Provide for electrically interlocked main-tie-main arrangements] Two control power transformers in separate compartments with necessary interlocking relays; each transformer connected to line side of associated main circuit breaker.

a. Secondary windings connected through a relay or relays to control bus to affect an automatic transfer scheme.

b. Secondary windings connected through an internal automatic transfer switch to switchgear control power bus.

3. Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses with current-limiting and overload protection.

4. Fuses are specified in Division 26 Section "Fuses."

H. Control Wiring: Factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and protection; and complying with the following:

1. Flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.

2. Conductors sized according to NFPA 70 for duty required.

2.5 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Description: Comply with IEEE C37.13 AND UL 1066.

1. Eaton “Magnum DS” or equal by General Electric or Square D.

B. Ratings: As indicated, fully rated, for continuous, interrupting, and short-time current ratings for each circuit breaker; voltage and frequency ratings same as switchgear.

C. Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating mechanism with the following features:

1. Normal Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator. 2. Slow Closing Speed: Optional with operator for inspection and adjustment. 3. Stored-Energy Mechanism: [Manually charged] [Electrically charged, with optional

manual charging (FOR ‘Main-Tie-Main’ ARRANGEMENTS)]. 4. Operation counter.

D. Trip Devices: Solid-state, overcurrent trip-device system consisting of one or two current transformers or sensors per phase, a release mechanism, and the following features:


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


1. Eaton Digi-Trip 1150 plus or equal by General Electric or Square D. 2. Functions: Long-time-delay, short-time-delay, and instantaneous-trip functions,

independent of each other in both action and adjustment. 3. Minimum sensor size shall be 800 A which can be set at 50 percent of breaker rating. 4. Temperature Compensation: Ensures accuracy and calibration stability from minus 5 to

plus 40 deg C. 5. Field-adjustable, time-current characteristics. 6. Current Adjustability: Dial settings and rating plugs on trip units or sensors on circuit

breakers, or a combination of these methods. 7. Three bands, minimum, for long-time- and short-time-delay functions; marked

"minimum," "intermediate," and "maximum." 8. Pickup Points: Five minimum, for long-time- and short-time-trip functions. Equip short-

time-trip function for switchable I2t operation. 9. Pickup Points: Five minimum, for instantaneous-trip functions. 10. Ground-fault protection with at least three short-time-delay settings and three trip-time-

delay bands; adjustable current pickup. Arrange to provide protection for the following:

a. Three-wire circuit or system. b. Four-wire circuit or system. c. Four-wire, double-ended substation.

11. Trip Indication: Labeled, battery-powered lights or mechanical targets on trip device to indicate type of fault.

12. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking phase and ground-fault protection function with the downstream circuit breakers so that the breaker closest to the fault will clear the fault without disruption of service to other parts of the distribution system.

13. Maintenance mode switched trip units: The trip unit shall utilize Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance System to reduce the instantaneous pickup value when activated. The ARMS shall provide a clearing time of 0.04 seconds with a minimum of settings from 2.5X to 10X of the sensor value. The ARMS shall be enabled by a switch on the trip unit with blue indicator LED. A remote communication link shall also be provided for enable/disable and confirmation.

E. Auxiliary Contacts: For interlocking or remote indication of circuit-breaker position, with spare auxiliary switches and other auxiliary switches required for normal circuit-breaker operation, quantity as indicated. Each consists of two-type "a" and two-type "b" stages (contacts) wired through secondary disconnect devices to a terminal block in stationary housing.

F. Drawout Features: Circuit-breaker mounting assembly equipped with a racking mechanism to position circuit breaker and hold it rigidly in connected, test, and disconnected positions. Include the following features:

1. Interlocks: Prevent movement of circuit breaker to or from connected position when it is closed, and prevent closure of circuit breaker unless it is in connected, test, or disconnected position.

2. Circuit-Breaker Positioning: An open circuit breaker may be racked to or from connected, test, and disconnected positions only with the associated compartment door closed unless live parts are covered by a full dead-front shield. An open circuit breaker


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


may be manually withdrawn to a position for removal from the structure with the door open. Status for connection devices for different positions includes the following:

a. Test Position: Primary disconnect devices disengaged, and secondary disconnect devices and ground contact engaged.

b. Disconnected Position: Primary and secondary devices and ground contact disengaged.

G. Arc Chutes: Readily removable from associated circuit breaker when it is in disconnected position, and arranged to permit inspection of contacts without removing circuit breaker from switchgear.

H. Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least three padlocks on each circuit breaker to secure its enclosure and prevent movement of drawout mechanism. Provisions shall be included for padlocking the breaker in the open or closed position.

I. Operating Handle: One for each circuit breaker capable of manual operation.

J. Electric Close Button: One for each electrically operated circuit breaker.

K. Mechanical Interlocking of Circuit Breakers: Uses a mechanical tripping lever or equivalent design and electrical interlocks.

L. (DELETE THIS ITEM ON SINGLE ENDED SWITCHGEAR )Key Interlocks: Arranged so keys are attached at devices indicated and requires one main circuit breaker in a double-ended unit substation to be open before the tie circuit breaker can be closed. Mountings and hardware are included where future installation of key-interlock devices is indicated.

M. (DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED) [Undervoltage Trip Devices: Where indicated, adjustable time-delay and pickup voltage.]

N. Shunt-Trip Devices: Provide on source breakers for Closed Transition Transfer Switches.

O. Indicating Lights: To indicate circuit breaker is open or closed, for main and bus tie circuit breakers interlocked either with each other or with external devices.

P. Lugs: Mechanical style, rated for Copper conductors only, suitable for number, size, and trip ratings.

Q. Grounding Ball Studs: provide on incoming lug pad and outgoing lug pad.

R. Provide shorting blocks for maintenance.

2.6 SPACE FOR FUTURE DEVICES

A. Where indicated on the Drawings, "space" shall mean fully provisioned space ready for inserting a circuit breaker at a future date without any future modifications. Provide current transformers sized according to the breaker frame size. A blank door shall close off the front of the compartment.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


2.7 TIE BREAKER CONTROL (DELETE THESE PARAGRAPHS IF SWITCHGEAR IS SINGLE ENDED)

A. Provide automatic transfer control equipment to transfer a load bus from its normal source of supply to an alternate source. Voltage sensing on each source shall be three phase with loss of phase protection. All transfer scheme logic shall be incorporated into and executed by a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). The PLC shall receive the following inputs: source voltage status as sensed by the voltage relays, beaker status (open, closed, tripped on fault) for main and bus tie breakers. Interposing relays shall be provided for interfacing the PLC outputs with the circuit breaker close and trip circuits. Additional PLC outputs shall be provided for local indication of the following: transfer scheme status (auto-blue / manual-white) and PLC fault (amber). If the control power source for the PLC is derived from within the switchgear, provide a dedicated "hold up device" for the PLC to ride through any momentary switching of control power sources. The PLC programs shall be executed without interruption during an undervoltage or loss of phase condition.

B. Basic PLC logic features shall include: interlocking of the main and bus tie breakers to prevent paralleling sources; time delay for initiating a transfer upon an undervoltage or loss of phase condition; time delay for return to normal after the undervoltage or loss of phase condition has been corrected; and blocking transfer, if the main or bus tie breaker trips due to a fault.

C. Description of operation - three breaker transfers (main-tie-main), delayed transfer / delayed return. Under normal conditions both main breakers are closed and the bus tie breaker is open. The transfer system selector switch is in the auto position. When an undervoltage or loss of phase condition is detected, the PLC receives an input from the voltage sensing relays. The PLC program executes, tripping the affected main breaker by its interposing trip relay after the programmed time delay. The PLC senses the open main breaker status and the program immediately closes the bus tie breaker by its interposing close relay. With the return of the affected source, the PLC trips the bus tie breaker by its interposing trip relay after the programmed time delay. The PLC senses the open tie breaker and the program immediately recloses the open main breaker by its interposing relay. Simultaneous loss of both sources shall not cause any change in breaker status. Upon return of one source, the PLC shall immediately trip the main breaker without voltage and close the bus tie breaker.

D. Manual operation - Control switches for the main and bus tie breakers are inoperative when the transfer system control selector switch is in the auto position. Turning the transfer system control selector switch to the manual position allows the main and bus tie breakers to be manually closed and tripped via their control switches. Electrical interlocking in the breaker close circuits prevents both main breakers and the tie breaker from being closed at the same time. Redundant electrical interlocking, separate from the PLC, shall be provided for the main and tie breakers and shall be operational only when the automatic transfer system is in the manual mode. To transfer the loads from one source to the other, the affected main breaker must first be opened and then the bus tie breaker can be manually closed. To return to normal, trip the bus tie breaker and reclose the main breaker via their respective control switches.

E. The PLC shall be able to communicate via RS-485 / Modbus RTU protocol.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Accessory Set: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for circuit-breaker and switchgear test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


1. Racking handle to manually move circuit breaker between connected and disconnected positions.

2. Portable test set for testing all functions of circuit-breaker, solid-state trip devices without removal from switchgear.

3. Relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchgear meters and switchgear class relays.

B. Circuit-Breaker Removal Apparatus: Overhead-circuit-breaker lifting device, track mounted at top front of switchgear and complete with hoist and lifting yokes matching each size of drawout circuit breaker installed.

C. Storage for Manual: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a copy of maintenance manual.



B. Connect remote monitoring communication modules to Cleveland Clinic’s data network through appropriate network interface unit to the Building Automation System.


2.10 IDENTIFICATION

A. Mimic Bus: Continuous mimic bus, arranged in single-line diagram format, using symbols and lettered designations consistent with approved mimic-bus diagram.


2. Medium: Painted graphics, as selected by Architect. 3. Color: Contrasting with factory-finish background; as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range.

B. System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution components, and major loads. Include as-built data for low-voltage power switchgear and connections as follows:

1. Frame size of each circuit breaker. 2. Trip rating for each circuit breaker. 3. Conduit and wire size for each feeder.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces where switchgear will be installed for compliance with installation tolerances, required clearances, and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 400.

B. Anchor switchgear assembly to concrete base and attach by bolting. 1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend

base no more than 3 inches (75 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switchgear unless otherwise indicated [or unless required for seismic anchor support.] Construct concrete bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" and Division 3 Concrete Sections.

2. [Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and according to seismic-restraint details. See Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for seismic-restraint requirements.]

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


1. Frame and mount under clear acrylic plastic on the front of switchgear.




3.4 CONNECTIONS



ISSUED: 00/00/20XX




D. Provide all communications wiring between remote monitoring communication modules and the Cleveland Clinic’s data network. Verify that each circuit breaker’s address for microprocessor-communication packages corresponds to Division 26 Section “Electrical Power Monitoring and Control Systems” requirements.






1. Inspect switchgear installation, including wiring, components, connections, and equipment. Test and adjust components and equipment.

2. Verify that electrical control wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal by means of point-to-point continuity testing. Verify that wiring installation complies with requirements in Division 26 Sections.

3. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of equipment and

components. 5. Report results in writing.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for each of the following NETA categories:

a. Switchgear. b. Circuit breakers. c. Protective relays. d. Instrument transformers. e. Metering and instrumentation. f. Ground-fault systems. g. Battery systems. h. Surge arresters.

2. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


D. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchgear line-up. Remove front and rear panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 1. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 2. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switchgear checked

and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics according to results in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

3.7 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchgear. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Cleveland Clinic's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear.



ISSUED: 00/00/20XX

PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 262313 - 1

SECTION 262313 - PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal-clad, low-voltage circuit-breaker switchgear rated 1000 V and less, and associated control systems, for paralleling generators on an isolated bus and for distributing power in AC systems.




3. Division 26 Section 263600 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.

1.2 DEFINITIONS


B. HMI: Human machine interface.

C. OIP: Operator Interface Panel.

D. PSG: Paralleling Switch Gear.


A. Product Data: For each type of switchgear and related equipment, include the following:

1. Electrical characteristics, rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

2. Time-current characteristic curves for individual relays and overcurrent protective devices.

3. Description of sequence of operation for paralleling controls.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.



ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS [ IF REQUIRED BY PROJECT CONDITIONS]

A. [Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that switchgear, components, and accessories will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:

1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."


3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based.]







1. Fuses: Six of each type and rating used. Include spares for potential transformers, control power circuits, and fusible devices.

B. Maintenance Tools: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for switchgear test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. Include the following:

1. Floor-running transport or dock-able dolly with manual lifting mechanism and all other items necessary to remove circuit breaker from housing and transport to remote location.

2. Racking handle to move circuit breaker manually between connected and disconnected positions, and a secondary test coupler to permit testing of circuit breaker without removal from switchgear.


A. Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of switchgear and are based on the specific system indicated.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100 by UL and marked for intended use.



E. Provide circuit breakers of the same manufacturer as that specified for other electrical distribution equipment.


A. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchgear, including clearances between switchgear, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

B. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation at indicated ampere ratings for the following conditions:

1. Ambient temperature not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). 2. Altitude of not more than 6000 feet above sea level.

1.9 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERATOR PARALLELING MONITOR AND CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturer specified: 1. Russelectric.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=2800&mf=04&src=wd



ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


B. Individual Generator Control and Monitoring Panel: Provide each generator with a control and monitoring panel that allows the operator to view status and control operation of respective generator. Provide panel with the following features and characteristics:

1. Generator Metering: 1 percent accuracy class or better.

a. Ammeter, voltmeter, frequency meter, wattmeter, kilowatt-hour meter, and power factor meter.

b. Synchroscope and "Generator Set Synchronized" Indication:

1) Provide lamp or LED indication of synchronization. 2) Provide 360-degree analog movement synchroscope.

c. Engine run-time meter, start counter, rpm meter, and battery voltage meter. d. Engine oil temperature gage and engine coolant temperature gage.

2. Generator Protective and Control Switches: Provide oiltight, industrial-grade switches in generator control and monitoring panel.

a. Mode Selector Switch (Run/Off/Auto):

1) "Run" mode to start and accelerate unit to rated speed and voltage, but not close paralleling circuit breaker.

2) "Off" mode to prevent generator from starting or to immediately shutdown generator if running.

3) "Auto" mode to allow generator to start on receipt of remote start signal.

b. Circuit-Breaker Trip/Close Switch: Interlocked with system control so that circuit-breaker closure is impossible unless the following occurs:

1) Mode selector switch is in "Run" position. 2) Generator set is synchronized with system bus.

c. Control/reset push button with flashing lamp to indicate generator is locked out due to fault condition.

d. Lamp test push button to simultaneously test all lamps on panel. e. Control Panel Illumination: DC lamps to illuminate panel when lighting from

surrounding environment is not available. f. Emergency Stop Push Button: Red mushroom-head switch maintaining its

position until manually reset. g. Voltage and Frequency Raise/Lower Switches:

1) Allow plus/minus 5 percent adjustment when generator set is operating but not paralleled.

3. Generator Protective and Control Devices: Solid-state industrial relays, integrated microprocessor-based control devices, and other accessories and devices located either in generator control and monitoring panel or in switchgear control section to provide the following features and functions:

a. Kilowatt Load Sharing Control:


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


1) Operates engine governors during synchronizing and provides isochronous load sharing when paralleled.

2) Allows generator set to ramp up to kilowatt load level signaled by system master controller.

b. Load-Demand Governing Control:

1) Causes generator set to ramp down to zero load when signaled to shut down in load-demand mode.

2) Causes generator set to ramp up to a proportional share of total bus load.

c. Kilovolt Ampere Rating Load Sharing Control:

1) Operates alternator excitation system while generator set is paralleled. 2) Causes sharing of reactive load among all generator sets to within 1 percent

of equal levels without voltage drop.

d. Sync-Check and Paralleling Monitor and Control:

1) Monitors and verifies that generator set has reached 90 percent of nominal voltage and frequency before closing to bus.

2) Prevents out-of-phase paralleling if two or more generator sets reach operating conditions simultaneously, by sending "inhibit" signal to sets not designated by system as "first to close to bus."

3) Recognizes failure of "first-to-close" generator set and signals system paralleling to continue.

4) Prevents out-of-phase closure to bus due to errant manual or automatic operation of synchronizer.

e. Synchronizer Control:

1) Adjusts engine governor to match voltage, frequency, and phase angle of paralleling bus.

2) Maintains generator-set voltage within 1 percent of bus voltage, and phase angle within 20 electrical degrees of paralleling bus for 0.5 seconds before circuit-breaker closing.

3) Provides "fail-to-synchronize time delay" adjustable from 10 to 120 seconds; with field selectivity to either initiate alarm or shut down generator set on failure condition.

f. Reverse Power Monitor and Control:

1) Prevents sustained reverse power flow in generator set. 2) Trips generator circuit breaker and initiates generator set shutdown when

reverse power condition exceeds 10 percent of generator set kilowatt for three seconds.

g. Phase Rotation Monitor and Control:

1) Verifies generator set and paralleling bus phase rotation match prior to closing paralleling circuit breaker.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


h. Electronic Alternator Overcurrent Alarm and Shutdown Control:

1) Monitors current flow at generator-set output terminals. 2) Initiates alarm when load current on generator set is more than 110 percent

of rated current for more than 60 seconds. 3) Provides overcurrent shutdown function matched to thermal damage curve

of alternator. Provide without instantaneous-trip function.

i. Electronic Alternator Short-Circuit Protection:

1) Provides shutdown when load current is more than 175 percent of rated current and combined time/current approaches thermal damage curve of alternator. Provide without instantaneous-trip function.

j. Loss of Excitation Monitor:

1) Initiates alarm when sensing loss of excitation to alternator while paralleled to system bus.

k. Generator-Set Start Contacts: Redundant system, 10 A at 32-V dc. l. Cool-Down Time-Delay Control: Adjustable, 0 to 600 seconds. m. Start Time-Delay Control: Adjustable, 0 to 300 seconds. n. Paralleling Circuit-Breaker Monitor and Control:

1) Monitors circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts. 2) Initiates fault signal if circuit breaker fails to close within adjustable time-

delay period (0.5 to 15 seconds). 3) Trips open and locks out paralleling circuit breaker upon paralleling circuit

breaker failure to close, until manually reset.

4. Engine Protection and Local Annunciation:

a. Provide annunciation and shutdown control modules for alarms indicated. b. Provide visual alarm status indicator and alarm horn with silence/acknowledge

push button on generator control and monitoring panel. c. Annunciate the following conditions:

1) Status, Light Only (Non-latching):

a) Generator engine control switch not in auto (red). b) Generator engine control-switch in auto (green). c) Emergency mode (red). d) Generator circuit breaker-closed (red). e) Generator circuit breaker-open (green). f) Engine stopped (green). g) Engine running (red). h) Engine cool-down (amber).

2) Pre-Alarm, Light and Horn (Non-latching):

a) Pre-high coolant temperature (amber). b) Pre-low oil pressure (amber).


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


c) Low coolant temperature (amber). d) Engine low battery (amber). e) Engine low fuel (amber). f) Generator fails to synchronize (amber).

3) Shutdown Alarm, Light and Horn (Latching):

a) Engine overcrank (red). b) Engine overspeed (red). c) Engine low oil pressure (red). d) Engine high coolant temperature (red). e) Engine low coolant level (red). f) Engine remote emergency shutdown (red). g) Generator circuit breaker tripped (red). h) Generator loss of field (red). i) Generator reverse power (red). j) Generator undervoltage (red). k) Generator overvoltage (red). l) Generator under frequency (red). m) Generator over frequency (red).

C. Master Control System and Monitoring Equipment: Paralleling and monitoring equipment, components, and accessories for multiple generators with the following features and characteristics:

1. Components and devices shall be mounted in the switchgear control section of the switchgear lineup.

2. Paralleled System Metering: 1 percent accuracy class or better to monitor total output of generator bus.

a. Ammeter, voltmeter, frequency meter, wattmeter, kilowatt-hour meter, power factor meter, kilovolt ampere, kilovolt ampere rating, and kilowatt demand meters.

1) Display all functions on the HMI device.

3. Full color high resolution 15 inch diagonal touchscreen HMI.

a. Allows operator to monitor and control the complete system of paralleled generator sets.

b. Screens shall include the following:

1) Main Menu: Include date, time, and system status messages with screen push buttons to access one-line diagram, system controls, load controls, alarms, bus metering, and individual generator-set data.

2) One-Line Diagram Screen: Depicting system configuration and system status by screen animation, screen colors, text messages, or pop-up indicators. Indicate the following minimum system conditions:

a) Generator sets, buses, and paralleling circuit breakers energized/de-energized.

b) Generator-set mode (run/off/auto). c) Generator-set status (normal/warning/shutdown/load-demand stop).


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


d) Paralleling circuit-breaker status (open/closed/tripped). e) Bus conditions (energized/de-energized). f) Provide access to other screens.

3) AC Metering Screen: Displays the following minimum meter data for the paralleling bus:

a) Phase volts and amperes, kilowatt, kilovolt ampere, kilovolt ampere rating, power factor, frequency, kilowatt hour, and kilowatt demand.

b) Real-time trend chart for system kilowatts and volts updated on not less than one-second intervals.

c) A minimum of one historical trend chart for total system loads with intervals no shorter than five minutes and a minimum duration of four hours.

4) Generator-Set Control Screen: Provides control over individual generator sets from master system control panel. Includes the following minimum functions:

a) Generator manual start/stop control (functional only when generator-set mounted control switch is in "Auto" position).

b) Generator-set alarm reset. c) Manual paralleling and circuit-breaker controls.

5) Generator-Set Data Display Screen: Provide the following minimum parameters:

a) Engine speed, oil pressure and temperature, coolant temperature, and engine operating hours.

b) Three-phase voltage and current, kilowatt, power factor, and kilowatt hour.

c) Generator control switch position and paralleling circuit-breaker position.

d) All generator-set alarms.

6) System Control Screen: Password protected and with the following minimum functions:

a) System Test Modes: Test with load/test without load/normal/retransfer time-delay override.

b) Test with Load: Starts and synchronizes generator sets on paralleling bus; all loads are transferred to bus.

c) Test without Load: Starts and synchronizes generator sets on paralleling bus but does not transfer loads to bus.

d) Time adjustments for retransfer time delay, transfer time delay, system time delay on stopping, and system time delay on starting.

7) Load-Demand Control Screen: Monitors total load on system bus and controls number of generator sets running so that capacity tracks load demand.

a) Load-Demand Control: On/off.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


b) Load-Demand Pickup Set Point: Adjustable from 90 to 40 percent in 5 percent increments.

c) Load-Demand Dropout Set Point: Adjustable from 20 to 70 percent in 5 percent increments.

8) Manual Load Control Screen: Allows operator to manually add or delete generator sets from paralleled system in response to system load parameters.

a) Indication of system available in kilowatts and amperes. b) Control functions allow manual addition/removal of generator sets on

system, and activation of load-shed/load-restore functions.

9) Load-Add/Load-Shed Sequence Screen: Password protected and with the following minimum functions:

a) Assigns "load-add sequence priority" to each load control relay with designation for relay operation after a set number of generator sets are online.

b) Assigns "load-shed sequence priority" to each load control relay with designation for relay operation depending on number of generator sets online.

10) Alarm Summary and Run Report Screen:

a) Lists most recent alarm conditions and status changes. b) Lists a minimum of the most recent 32 alarm conditions by name and

time/date; acknowledges alarm conditions with time/date. c) For each start signal, lists start time and date, stop time and date,

maximum kilowatt and ampere load on system during run time, and start and stop times of individual generator sets.

4. Solid-State System Status Panel:

a. Provides visual alarm status indicator and alarm horn with silence/acknowledge push button.

b. Annunciates the following conditions:

1) Status, Light Only:

a) Running Status: Display generator set number and "green" running-status light.

b) Load demand mode (green). c) Priority Load Status: Display load number and "green" on-status

light. d) System test (green). e) Remote system start (red). f) Normal source available (green). g) Connected to normal (green). h) Generator source available (green). i) Connected to generator source (green).

2) Status, Light and Alarm:


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


a) Load-Shed Level Status: Displays load number and red load-shed, status light.

b) Generator Alarm Status: Displays generator number and red "Check Generator" status light.

c) Controller malfunction (red). d) Check station battery (red). e) Bus overload (red). f) System not in auto (red).

D. Description of System Operation:

1. Loss of Normal Power:

a. System receives "start" signal; all generator sets start and achieve rated voltage and frequency.

b. System closes the first generator set achieving 90 percent of rated voltage to paralleling bus.

c. "Priority load add" controls prevent overloading of system. d. Remaining generator sets switched to synchronizers that control and then allow

closure of generator sets to paralleling bus. e. On closure to paralleling bus, each generator set assumes its proportional share of

total load.

2. Failure of a Generator Set to Start or Synchronize:

a. After expiration of overcrank time delay, generator set shuts down and alarm is initiated.

b. Priority controller prevents overload of system bus. c. Manual override of priority controller at HMI allows addition of low-priority load

to bus. d. Bus overload monitor protects bus from manual overloading.

3. Bus Overload:

a. On bus overload, load-shed control initiates load shedding. b. If bus does not return to normal frequency within adjustable time period, additional

load continues to be shed until bus returns to normal frequency. c. Loads shed can be reconnected to bus only by manual reset at HMI.

4. Load-Demand Mode:

a. With "load-demand" function activated, controller continuously monitors total bus load.

b. If bus load is below preset limits for 15 minutes, demand controller shuts down generator sets in predetermined order until minimum number of sets are operating.

c. On sensing available bus capacity diminished to set point, controller starts and closes generator sets to bus to accommodate load.

5. Return to Normal Power:

a. Process starts on removal of start signals from system.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


b. When no load remains on paralleling bus, all generator breakers open, go through cool-down period, and shut down.

c. If start signal is received during cool-down period, one generator set is reconnected to bus, and system operation follows that of "loss of normal power."


A. Description: Factory assembled and tested and complying with IEEE C37.20.1 and UL 1558.

B. Ratings: Suitable for application in 3-phase, 60-Hz, solidly grounded neutral system.

C. Indoor Enclosure Material: Steel.

D. Access: Fabricate enclosure with hinged, rear cover panels to allow access to rear interior of switchgear.

E. Phase-, Neutral-, and Ground-Bus Materials: Extend full length of switchgear.

1. Phase and Neutral Bus: Copper, silver plated at connection points. 2. Ground Bus: Copper, silver, tin plated; minimum size 1/4 by 2 inches (6 by 50 mm).

F. Switchgear Components: Incorporate components as indicated on Drawings.

1. Instrument Transformers: Comply with IEEE C57.13.

a. Potential Transformers: Secondary-voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy class of 0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y.

b. Current Transformers: Burden and accuracy class suitable for connected relays, meters, and instruments.

2. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems, listed and labeled by UL, and with the following features:

a. Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential terminals rated to 600 V.

b. Switch-selectable digital display with the following features:

1) Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. 2) Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. 3) Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. 4) Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent. 5) Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent. 6) Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent. 7) Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. 8) Integrated Demand, with Demand Interval Selectable from 5 to 60 Minutes:

Plus or minus 2 percent. 9) Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours (joules), plus or minus 2 percent;

stored values unaffected by power outages for up to 72 hours.

c. Mounting: Display and control unit that is flush or semi-flush mounted in instrument compartment door.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


3. Relays: Comply with IEEE C37.90, integrated digital type; with test blocks and plugs. 4. Control Power Supply: Control power transformer supplies 120-V control circuits

through secondary disconnect devices. Include the following features:

a. Dry-type transformers, in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA, including primary and secondary fuses.

b. Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses provide current-limiting and overload protection.

5. Control Wiring: Factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and protection; and complying with the following:

a. Flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.

G. Identification: Electrical identification devices and installation requirements are specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify units, devices, controls, and wiring. 2. Mimic Bus: Continuous mimic bus, applied to front of switchgear, arranged in one-line

diagram format, using symbols and lettered designations consistent with approved mimic-bus diagram.

H. Control Battery System:

1. System Requirements: Battery shall have number of cells and ampere-hour capacity based on an initial specific gravity of 1.210 at 25 deg C with electrolyte at normal level and minimum ambient temperature of 13 deg C. Cycle battery before shipment to guarantee rated capacity on installation. Arrange battery to operate ungrounded.

2. Battery: Lead-calcium type in sealed, clear plastic or glass containers, complete with electrolyte, fully charged, and arranged for shipment with electrolyte in cells. Limit weight of each container to not more than 70 lb (32 kg) and cells per container to not more than 3. System batteries shall be suitable for service at an ambient temperature ranging from minus 18 to 25 deg C. Limit variation of current output to 0.8 percent for each degree below 25 deg C down to minus 8 deg C.

3. Rack: Two-step rack with electrical connections between battery cells and between rows of cells; include two flexible connectors with bolted-type terminals for output leads. [Rate battery rack, cell supports, and anchorage for seismic requirements.]

4. Accessories:

a. Thermometers with specific-gravity correction scales. b. Hydrometer syringes. c. Set of socket wrenches and other tools required for battery maintenance. d. Wall-mounting, nonmetallic storage rack fitted to store above items.

5. Charger: Provide La Marche products. Static-type silicon rectifier equipped with automatic regulation and provision for manual and automatic adjustment of charging rate. Unit shall automatically maintain output voltage within 0.5 percent from no load to rated charger output current, with ac input-voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent and input-frequency variation of plus or minus 3 Hz. Other features include the following:

a. DC ammeter.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


b. DC Voltmeter: Maximum error of 5 percent at full-charge voltage; operates with toggle switch to select between battery and charger voltages.

c. Ground Indication: Two appropriately labeled lights to indicate circuit ground, connected in series between negative and positive terminals, and with midpoint junction connected to ground by normally open push-button contact.

d. Capacity: Sufficient to supply steady load, float-charge battery between 2.20 and 2.25 V per cell and equalizing charge at 2.33 V per cell.

e. Charging-Rate Switch: Manually operated switch provides for transferring to higher charging rate. Charger operates automatically after switch operation until manually reset.

f. AC power supply is 120 V, 60 Hz, subject to plus or minus 10 percent variation in voltage and plus or minus 3-Hz variation in frequency. After loss of ac power supply for any interval, charger automatically resumes charging battery. Charger regulates rate of charge to prevent damage due to overload and to prevent fuses or circuit breakers from opening.

g. Protective Feature: Current-limiting device or circuit, which limits output current to rating of charger but does not disconnect charger from either battery or ac supply; protects charger from damage due to overload, including short circuit on output terminals.

h. Electrical Filtering: Reduces charger's audible noise to less than 26 dB.

2.3 METAL-CLAD, CIRCUIT-BREAKER SWITCHGEAR (1000 V AND LESS)

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified: [manufacturer selected shall match that of other electrical equipment specified for the project] 1. Cutler-Hammer; Eaton Corporation. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Factory assembled and tested, and complying with IEEE C37.20.1 and UL 1558.

C. Nominal System Voltage: 480/277 V, 4 wire, 60 Hz.

D. Main-Bus Continuous: <Insert rating> A.

E. Short-Time and Short-Circuit Current: Match rating of highest-rated circuit breaker in switchgear assembly.

F. Switchgear Fabrication:

1. Bus isolation barriers shall be arranged to isolate line bus from load bus at each main and tie circuit breaker.

2. Circuit-breaker compartments shall be equipped to house drawout-type circuit breakers and shall be fitted with hinged outer doors.

3. Auxiliary Compartments: Match and align with basic switchgear assembly. Include the following:

a. Bus transition sections. b. Pull sections. c. Hinged front panels for access to accessory and blank compartments.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=2801&mf=04&src=wd





ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


4. Bus bars connect between vertical sections and between compartments. Cable connections are not permitted.

a. Main Phase Bus: Uniform capacity the entire length of assembly. b. Neutral Bus: 100 percent of phase-bus ampacity, except as indicated. Equip bus

with pressure-connector terminations for outgoing neutral conductors. c. Vertical Section Bus Size: Comply with IEEE C37.20.1, including allowance for

spare circuit breakers and spaces for future circuit breakers. d. Supports and Bracing for Buses: Adequate strength for indicated short-circuit

currents. e. Neutral Disconnect Link: Bolted, un-insulated, 1/4-by-2-inch (6-by-50-mm)

copper bus, arranged to connect neutral bus to ground bus. f. Provide for future extensions from either end of main phase, neutral, and ground

bus by means of predrilled bolt-holes and connecting links. g. Bus-Bar Insulation: Individual bus bars wrapped with factory-applied, flame-

retardant tape or spray-applied, flame-retardant insulation.

1) Sprayed Insulation Thickness: 3 mils (0.08 mm), minimum. 2) Bolted Bus Joints: Insulate with secure joint covers that can easily be

removed and reinstalled.

5. Circuit-Breaker Terminals for Cable Connections: Silver-plated copper bus extensions equipped with pressure connectors for conductors.

G. Circuit Breakers: Comply with IEEE C37.13 and UL 1066.

1. Ratings: As indicated for continuous, interrupting, and short-time current ratings for each circuit breaker; voltage and frequency ratings same as switchgear.

2. Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating mechanism with the following features:

a. Normal Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator. b. Slow Closing Speed: Optional with operator for inspection and adjustment. c. Stored-Energy Mechanism: Manually charged. d. Operation counter.

3. Trip Devices: Solid-state, overcurrent trip-device system consisting of one or two current transformers or sensors per phase, a release mechanism, and the following features:

a. Eaton Digi-Trip 1150 plus or equal by General Electric or Square D. b. Functions: Long-time-delay, short-time-delay, and instantaneous-trip functions,

independent of each other in both action and adjustment c. Temperature Compensation: Ensures accuracy and calibration stability from

minus 5 to plus 40 deg C. d. Field-adjustable, time-current characteristics. e. Current Adjustability: Dial settings and rating plugs on trip units or sensors on

circuit breakers, or a combination of these methods. f. Three bands, minimum, for long-time- and short-time-delay functions; marked

"minimum," "intermediate," and "maximum." g. Pickup Points: Five minimum, for long-time- and short-time-trip functions. Equip

short-time-trip function for switchable I2t operation. h. Pickup Points: Five minimum, for instantaneous-trip functions.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


i. Ground-fault protection with at least three short-time-delay settings and three trip-time-delay bands; adjustable current pickup. Arrange to provide protection for the following: 1) Four-wire circuit or system. 2) Four-wire, double-ended substation.

j. Trip Indication: Labeled, battery-powered lights or mechanical targets on trip device to indicate type of fault.

k. Maintenance mode switched trip units: The trip unit shall utilize Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance System to reduce the instantaneous pickup value when activated. The ARMS shall provide a clearing time of 0.04 seconds with a minimum of settings from 2.5X to 10X of the sensor value. The ARMS shall be enabled by a switch on the trip unit with blue indicator LED. A remote communication link shall also be provided for enable/disable and confirmation.

4. Auxiliary Contacts: For interlocking or remote indication of circuit-breaker position, with spare auxiliary switches and other auxiliary switches required for normal circuit-breaker operation, quantity as indicated. Each consists of two type "a" and two type "b" stages (contacts) wired through secondary disconnect devices to a terminal block in stationary housing.

5. Drawout Features: Circuit-breaker mounting assembly equipped with a racking mechanism to position circuit breaker and hold it rigidly in connected, test, and disconnected positions. Include the following features:

a. Interlocks: Prevent movement of circuit breaker to or from connected position when it is closed.

b. Circuit-Breaker Positioning: An open circuit breaker may be racked to or from connected, test, and disconnected positions only with the associated compartment door closed, unless live parts are covered by a full dead-front shield. An open circuit breaker may be manually withdrawn to a position for removal from the structure with the door open. Status for connection devices for different positions includes the following:

1) Test Position: Primary disconnect devices disengaged, and secondary disconnect devices and ground contact engaged.

2) Disconnected Position: Primary and secondary devices and ground contact disengaged.

6. Arc Chutes: Readily removable from associated circuit breaker when it is in disconnected position; arranged to permit inspection of contacts without removing circuit breaker from switchgear.

7. Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least three padlocks on each circuit breaker to secure its enclosure and prevent movement of drawout mechanism.

8. Operating Handle: One for each circuit breaker capable of manual operation. 9. Electric Close Button: One for each electrically operated circuit breaker. 10. Mechanical Interlocking of Circuit Breakers: Uses a mechanical tripping lever or

equivalent design and electrical interlocks. 11. Key Interlocks: Arranged so keys are attached at devices indicated. Mountings and

hardware are included where future installation of key-interlock devices is indicated. 12. Undervoltage Trip Devices: Where indicated, adjustable time-delay and pickup voltage. 13. Shunt-Trip Devices: Where indicated.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


14. Indicating Lights: To indicate circuit breaker is open or closed, for main and bus tie circuit breakers interlocked either with each other or with external devices.

15. Lugs: Mechanical style, rated for Copper conductors only, suitable for number, size, and trip ratings.

16. Grounding Ball Studs: provide on incoming lug pad and outgoing lug pad. 17. Provide shorting blocks for maintenance.

H. Accessories: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for circuit-breaker and switchgear tests, inspections, maintenance, and operation.

1. Racking handle to manually move circuit breaker between connected and disconnected positions.

2. Portable test set for testing all functions of circuit-breaker, solid-state trip devices without removal from switchgear.

3. Relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchgear meters and switchgear class relays.

I. Circuit-Breaker Removal Apparatus: Portable, floor-supported, roller-base, elevating carriage arranged for moving circuit breakers in and out of compartments.

J. Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Identified and compartmented steel box or cabinet with lockable door.

K. Storage for Manual: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a copy of maintenance manual.

L. Provision for Future Devices: Equip compartments with rails, mounting brackets, supports, necessary appurtenances, and bus connections to accept Circuit Breaker without field changes.



B. Connect remote monitoring communication modules to Cleveland Clinic’s data network through appropriate network interface unit.


2.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Mimic Bus: Continuous mimic bus, arranged in single-line diagram format, using symbols and lettered designations consistent with approved mimic-bus diagram.


2. Medium: Painted graphics, as selected by Architect.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


3. Color: Contrasting with factory-finish background; as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution components, and major loads. Include as-built data for low-voltage power switchgear and connections as follows:

1. Frame size of each circuit breaker. 2. Trip rating for each circuit breaker. 3. Conduit and wire size for each feeder.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with applicable portions in NECA 400.

B. Install switchgear assembly on a concrete base. Anchor according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more than 3 inches (75 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switchgear unless otherwise indicated [or unless required for seismic anchor support.] Construct concrete bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" and Division 3 Concrete Sections

2. [Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and according to seismic-restraint details. See Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for seismic-restraint requirements.]

3.2 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.


D. Provide all communications wiring between remote monitoring communication modules and the Cleveland Clinic’s data network. Verify that each circuit breaker’s address for microprocessor-communication packages corresponds to Division 26 Section “Electrical Power Monitoring and Control Systems” requirements.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


1. Frame and mount under clear acrylic plastic on the front of switchgear.









1. Inspect switchgear installation, including wiring, components, connections, and equipment. Test and adjust components and equipment.

2. Verify that electrical control wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal by means of point-to-point continuity testing. Verify that wiring installation complies with requirements in other electrical Sections.

3. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of equipment and

components. 5. Report results in writing.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for each of the following NETA categories:

a. Switchgear. b. Circuit breakers. c. Protective relays. d. Instrument transformers. e. Metering and instrumentation. f. Ground-fault systems.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


g. Battery systems. h. Surge arresters.

2. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

D. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchgear line-up. Remove front and rear panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 1. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switchgear checked

and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics according to results in Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Cleveland Clinic’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear.



SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 1

SECTION 262413 - SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less. 2. Surge suppression devices. 3. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. 4. Instrumentation. 5. Control power. 6. Accessory components and features. 7. Identification. 8. Mimic bus.


communication and metering. 2. Division 26 Section "Surge Protective Devices for Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Circuits" for transient voltage surge suppressors for low-voltage power, control, and communication equipment located in the switchgear.


1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT CONDITIONS]

A. [Seismic Performance: Switchboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."]




A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, surge suppression device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Detailed short-circuits current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical insulation

and isolation. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

8. Include diagram and details of proposed mimic bus. 9. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified material and finish, for color selection.


A. [Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:




B. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices. 3. Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective

device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Potential Transformer Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.

2. Control-Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Indicating Lights: One of each size and type.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by UL and marked for intended location and application.

D. Use of series rated equipment is prohibited.

E. Comply with NEMA PB 2.


G. Comply with UL 891.

H. Comply with FM Global requirements.

I. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.




A. Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchboards.

C. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NEMA PB 2.1.


A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.

B. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

C. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

D. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: [DELETE THIS PARAGRAPH IF NOT REQUIRED] Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Cleveland Clinic or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:


2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Cleveland Clinic’s written

permission. 4. Cleveland Clinic Lock-out/Tag-out procedures shall be used with Contractor controlled

locks and tags. 5. Comply with NFPA 70E.



1.11 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS



1. Eaton Corp. Electrical Group. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards:

1. Main Devices: [Draw-out] [Fixed, individually mounted]. 2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted. 3. Sections front and rear aligned.

C. Front- and Rear-Accessible Switchboards:

1. Main Devices: [Drawout] [Fixed, individually mounted]. 2. Branch Devices: Panel and fixed, individually mounted. 3. Sections front and rear aligned.



D. Nominal System Voltage: [480Y/277 V] [208Y/120 V].

E. Main-Bus Continuous: <Insert ampere rating> A. [2500 A maximum]

F. Factory certified 30 cycle rating.

G. [Seismic Requirements: Fabricate and test switchboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."]

H. Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1.

I. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

J. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.

K. Insulation and isolation for main bus of main section and main and vertical buses of feeder sections.

L. [Customer Metering Compartment: A separate customer metering compartment and section with front hinged door, for indicated metering, and current transformers for each meter. Current transformer secondary wiring shall be terminated on shorting-type terminal blocks. Include potential transformers having primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means and secondary wiring terminated on terminal blocks.]

M. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard.

N. Rear Accessible Switchboards: Removable, Hinged Rear Doors and Compartment Covers: Secured by captive thumb-screws, for access to rear interior of switchboard.

O. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments.

P. Buses and Connections: Three-phase, four-wire unless otherwise indicated.

1. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, silver-plated, with tin-plated aluminum or copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.

2. Load Terminals: Insulated, rigidly braced, runback bus extensions, of same material as through buses, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit conductors. Provide load terminals for future circuit-breaker positions at full-ampere rating of circuit-breaker position.

3. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch- (6-by-50-mm-) hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with mechanical connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run.

4. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.



5. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus extensions for busway feeder neutral bus.

6. Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking of bus-bolt tightness.

Q. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.

R. [Optional] Bus-Bar Insulation: Factory-applied, flame-retardant, tape wrapping of individual bus bars or flame-retardant, spray-applied insulation. Minimum insulation temperature rating of 105 deg C.

S. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components including instruments and instrument transformers.[FOR TROPICAL LOCATIONS ONLY]

2.2 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES

A. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant externally mounted, UL 1449 3rd edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the switchboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories:

1. Comply with Division 26 Section “Surge Protective Devices”. 2. Provide a dedicated three pole circuit breaker for the SPD in the switchboard.



1. Eaton Corp. Electrical Group. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Square D (Schneider).

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) Up To 1600 A: Comply with UL 489, 100% rated to meet available fault currents. Use of series rated equipment is prohibited.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Less Than 225 A: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.

2. Electronic trip circuit breakers, 225 A and larger shall have RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

3. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Options:



a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, dual rated CU/AL, suitable for number, size, and trip

ratings. [EDIT FOR PROJECT REQUIREMENTS]

c. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

d. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function.

e. Communication Capability: Communication modules with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

f. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage. Provide for source breakers for Closed Transition Transfer Switches.

g. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay.

h. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

i. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

2.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS – MAIN DEVICES OVER 1600A

A. Description: Comply with IEEE C37.13 AND UL 1066.

1. Eaton “Magnum DS” or equal by General Electric or Square D, draw out type power circuit breaker.

B. Ratings: As indicated, fully rated, for continuous, interrupting, and short-time current ratings for each circuit breaker; voltage and frequency ratings same as switchgear.

1. Minimum frame size shall be 1600 A.

C. Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating mechanism with the following features:

1. Normal Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator. 2. Slow Closing Speed: Optional with operator for inspection and adjustment. 3. Stored-Energy Mechanism: [Manually charged] [Electrically charged, with optional

manual charging (FOR ‘Main-Tie-Main’ ARRANGEMENTS)]. 4. Operation counter.

D. Trip Devices: Solid-state, overcurrent trip-device system consisting of one or two current transformers or sensors per phase, a release mechanism, and the following features:

1. Eaton Digi-Trip 1150 plus or equal by General Electric or Square D. 2. Functions: Long-time-delay, short-time-delay, and instantaneous-trip functions,

independent of each other in both action and adjustment.



3. Temperature Compensation: Ensures accuracy and calibration stability from minus 5 to plus 40 deg C.

4. Field-adjustable, time-current characteristics. 5. Current Adjustability: Dial settings and rating plugs on trip units or sensors on circuit

breakers, or a combination of these methods. 6. Three bands, minimum, for long-time- and short-time-delay functions; marked

"minimum," "intermediate," and "maximum." 7. Pickup Points: Five minimum, for long-time- and short-time-trip functions. Equip short-

time-trip function for switchable I2t operation. 8. Pickup Points: Five minimum, for instantaneous-trip functions. 9. Ground-fault protection with at least three short-time-delay settings and three trip-time-

delay bands; adjustable current pickup. Arrange to provide protection for the following:

a. Three-wire circuit or system. b. Four-wire circuit or system. c. Four-wire, double-ended substation.

10. Trip Indication: Labeled, battery-powered lights or mechanical targets on trip device to indicate type of fault.

11. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking phase and ground-fault protection function.

12. Maintenance mode switched trip units: The trip unit shall utilize Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance System to reduce the instantaneous pickup value when activated. The ARMS shall provide a clearing time of 0.04 seconds with a minimum of settings from 2.5X to 10X of the sensor value. The ARMS shall be enabled by a switch on the trip unit with blue indicator LED. A remote communication link shall also be provided for enable/disable and confirmation.

E. Auxiliary Contacts: For interlocking or remote indication of circuit-breaker position, with spare auxiliary switches and other auxiliary switches required for normal circuit-breaker operation, quantity as indicated. Each consists of two-type "a" and two-type "b" stages (contacts) wired through secondary disconnect devices to a terminal block in stationary housing.

F. Drawout Features: Circuit-breaker mounting assembly equipped with a racking mechanism to position circuit breaker and hold it rigidly in connected, test, and disconnected positions. Include the following features:

1. Interlocks: Prevent movement of circuit breaker to or from connected position when it is closed, and prevent closure of circuit breaker unless it is in connected, test, or disconnected position.

2. Circuit-Breaker Positioning: An open circuit breaker may be racked to or from connected, test, and disconnected positions only with the associated compartment door closed unless live parts are covered by a full dead-front shield. An open circuit breaker may be manually withdrawn to a position for removal from the structure with the door open. Status for connection devices for different positions includes the following:

a. Test Position: Primary disconnecting devices disengaged, and secondary disconnect devices and ground contact engaged.



b. Disconnected Position: Primary and secondary devices and ground contact disengaged.

G. Arc Chutes: Readily removable from associated circuit breaker when it is in disconnected position, and arranged to permit inspection of contacts without removing circuit breaker from switchgear.

H. Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least three padlocks on each circuit breaker to secure its enclosure and prevent movement of drawout mechanism. Provisions shall be included for padlocking the breaker in the open or closed position.

I. Operating Handle: One for each circuit breaker capable of manual operation.

J. Electric Close Button: One for each electrically operated circuit breaker.

K. Mechanical Interlocking of Circuit Breakers: Uses a mechanical tripping lever or equivalent design and electrical interlocks.

L. Key Interlocks: Arranged so keys are attached at devices indicated. Mountings and hardware are included where future installation of key-interlock devices is indicated.

M. Undervoltage Trip Devices: Where indicated, adjustable time-delay and pickup voltage.

N. Shunt-Trip Devices: Where indicated.

O. Indicating Lights: To indicate circuit breaker is open or closed, for main and bus tie circuit breakers interlocked either with each other or with external devices.

P. Lugs: Mechanical style, rated for Copper conductors only, suitable for number, size, and trip ratings.

Q. Grounding Ball Studs: provide on incoming lug pad and outgoing lug pad.

R. Provide shorting blocks for maintenance.

2.5 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following:

1. Potential Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 120 V, 60 Hz, disconnecting type with integral fuse mountings. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices.

2. Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 Amp, 60 Hz, secondary and secondary shorting device. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices.

3. Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA.

4. Current Transformers for Neutral and Ground-Fault Current Sensing: Connect secondary wiring to ground overcurrent relays, via shorting terminals, to provide selective tripping



of main and tie circuit breaker. Coordinate with feeder circuit-breaker, ground-fault protection.

B. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for four-wire systems and with the following features:

1. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy tolerances as indicated:

a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. d. Megawatts: Plus or minus 2 percent. e. Megavars: Plus or minus 2 percent. f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent. g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. h. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated

values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours. i. Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from

five to 60 minutes. j. Contact devices to operate remote impulse-totalizing demand meter.

2. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semi-flush mounted in instrument compartment door.



B. Connect remote monitoring communication modules to Cleveland Clinic’s data network through appropriate network interface unit to the Building Automation System.

C. The manufacturer shall wire between all communications capable devices within the switchboard, including electronic meters with the same protocol and wire to a set of easily accessible terminal blocks.

2.7 CONTROL POWER

A. Control Circuits: 120-VAC, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from control-power transformer.

B. Control-Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload protection of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits.



C. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.


A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from switchboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchboard meters and switchboard class relays.

C. Portable Circuit-Breaker Lifting Device: Floor-supported, roller-based, elevating carriage arranged for movement of circuit breakers in and out of compartments for present and future circuit breakers.

2.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Mimic Bus: Entire single-line switchboard bus work, as depicted on factory record drawing, on an engraved laminated-plastic nameplate.

B. Coordinate mimic-bus segments with devices in switchboard sections to which they are applied. Produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchboard components and connections.

C. Presentation Media: Painted graphics in color contrasting with background color to represent bus and components complete with lettered designations.

D. Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment where required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1.

B. Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 2.1.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete bases, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness. Extend base no more than 3 inches (75 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switchboards unless otherwise indicated [or unless required for seismic anchor support.] Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems” and Division 03 Concrete Sections.

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor, install to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.

D. [Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."]

E. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of switchboards.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.

G. Install overcurrent protective devices, transient voltage suppression devices, and instrumentation.

H. Verify tightness and torque all accessible bolted electrical connections to manufacturer’s specified values using a calibrated torque wrench.

I. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."





1. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.





3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard. Remove front and rear panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection report, including a certified report that identifies switchboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.



3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Cleveland Clinic’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, instrumentation, and accessories, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-based trip, monitoring, and communication units.



PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards.

2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

3. Electronic-grade panelboards.


1. Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for interfacing

communication and metering.

2. Division 26 Section "Surge Protective Devices for Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Circuits" for transient voltage surge suppressors for low-voltage power, control, and

communication equipment located in the switchgear.

3. Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study" for short-circuit

rating of devices and for setting of overcurrent protective devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. SPD: Surge Protective Device.


1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of

any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit

will be fully operational after the seismic event]."


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, surge

suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and



manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and

finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of

installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper;

include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


A. [DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED] [Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification

that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will


for Electrical Systems." Include the following:


test of assembled components or on calculation.




based and their installation requirements.]

B. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load

balancing.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section

"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:



1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device that allows adjustments.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and

accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for

panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.

Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.




A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work

in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary

HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions

at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise

indicated:



a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) to plus

104 deg F (plus 40 deg C).

b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.

2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: [DELETE THIS PARAGRAPH IF NOT

REQUIRED] Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Cleveland Clinic or

others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide

temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Cleveland Clinic no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of

electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Cleveland Clinic’s written

permission.

3. Cleveland Clinic Lock-out/Tag-out procedures shall be used with Contractor controlled

locks and tags.


1.12 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that

penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,

raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.

Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors

and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-

bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in

Division 03.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within

specified warranty period.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. [DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED] [Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to


for Electrical Systems."]

B. Enclosures: Flush and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

c. Kitchen, Food Service and Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless

steel.

d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

e. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive

Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.

2. Full Piano Hinge - Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim continuous piano hinged to box

and with standard continuous piano hinged door within piano hinged trim cover.

3. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral

with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

4. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after

cleaning and pre-treating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish

consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.

c. Fungus Proofing: [FOR TROPICAL LOCATIONS] Permanent fungicidal

treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components.

5. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent

protective cover.

C. Incoming Mains Location: Top or bottom.

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.

3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated

from box.

4. Fully rated Neutral bus.

5. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as

suitable for nonlinear loads.

E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.



1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.

3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.

4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate

at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

5. Sub-feed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material.

Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at

same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

7. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra-

capacity neutral bus.

F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load

centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances

required for future installation of devices.

H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit

current available at terminals.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS


following:

1. Eaton Corp. Electrical Group.

2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.


B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs as shown on One Line Diagram.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS


following:






B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without

disturbing adjacent units.

D. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically held, general-purpose controller,

with same short-circuits interrupting rating as panelboard.

1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and

secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.

E. Doors: Full Piano Hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.4 ELECTRONIC-GRADE PANELBOARDS


following:




B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; with factory-installed, integral TVSS; labeled by an NRTL for

compliance with UL 67 after installing TVSS.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

D. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on thermal-magnetic circuit breakers.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on thermal-magnetic circuit breakers.

F. Buses:

1. Copper phase and neutral buses; 200 percent capacity neutral bus and lugs.

2. Copper equipment and isolated ground buses.

G. Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62.41-compliant, externally mounted, complying with

UL 1449, 3rd edition and Specification 264313.



following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.





B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to

meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable

magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes up to 250 A.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-

mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-

replicable electronic trip for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger; and the

following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip.

b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.

c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault

protection (6-mA trip).

5. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole

configurations with Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

6. Multi-pole circuit breakers shall have common trip, use of handle ties is not permitted.

7. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

8. Application Listing: Appropriate for application. (e.g. HACR, SWD)

9. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials.

10. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

[EDIT FOR PROJECT REQUIREMENTS]

a. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable

pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

b. Communication Capability: Communication module with functions and features

compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Division 26

Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

c. Shunt Trip: 120 -V trip coil energized from separate circuit.

d. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with field-

adjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay.

e. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts

mimic circuit-breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-

breaker contacts.

f. Alarm Switch: Single-pole, normally open contact that actuates only when circuit

breaker trips.

g. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key

shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

h. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking

ground-fault protection function with other upstream or downstream devices.

i. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handles

in on or off position.

j. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handles in on

position.



2.6 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, Surge Protection Devices shall be IEEE C62.41-

compliant, externally mounted, and complying with UL 1449, 3rd edition and Specification

264313.

2.7 RETRO-FIT PANELBOARD KITS

A. The panelboard kit shall be specifically designed for retrofit applications in existing panelboard

boxes. Trims for retrofit panelboards shall be designed specifically for retrofit applications.

Trim mounting shall not be dependent nor attached to the existing enclosure. The trim and door

shall attach directly to the panelboard dead-front assembly so that no external trim-fastening

hardware shall be required. Panelboards shall be fully rated.

B. Interiors shall have field adjustable height and depth.

C. Factory installed neutral and ground bars, field bondable for Service Entrance applications.

D. Bolt-on type, heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, single- and multi-pole circuit breakers of

the types specified herein, shall be provided for each circuit.

E. Existing enclosures shall be identified for retrofit suitability in advance. The structural integrity

of all existing enclosures shall be verified. Any enclosure that is damaged shall be replaced with

a new enclosure and panelboard.


A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective

device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from

panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and

switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have

been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Wall Mounted Panelboards: Do not attach directly to walls or structural surfaces. Attach

panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard on channels such

as “Unistrut”.

C. Floor Mounted Panelboards: Install panelboards on 4 inch high concrete bases. Comply with

requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Sections.

1. For panelboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and

anchor into structural concrete floor.

2. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards.

D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

E. [DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED] [Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements

specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."]

F. Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

G. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed

panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

H. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

I. Provide GFI circuit breakers with 30 mA sensitivity trip for all freeze protection, temperature

maintenance, and heat tracing circuits.

J. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

K. Circuit breaker handle locks shall be provided for all circuits that supply exit signs, emergency

lights, energy management, and control system (EMCS) panels and fire alarm panels.

L. Stub six 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or

space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits

into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

M. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing

load balancing.

N. Comply with NECA 1.



O. New circuit breakers installed in existing panelboards shall be of standard manufacture, shall

match existing, and shall have an interrupting rating of not less than the lowest rated circuit

breaker in the panelboard.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads;

incorporate Cleveland Clinic's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use

a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements

for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a

nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section

"Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,

and control circuit.


3. Comply with NETS.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

C. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, perform infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front so joints and connections

are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Instrument: Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect

significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

2. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies panelboards

checked and that describes infrared-scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies

detected, remedial actions taken, and observations after remedial action.

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards

included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial

action taken and observations after remedial action.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris from panelboard tubs; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as

recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent

Protective Device Coordination Study."

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.

2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax

machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings

before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is

not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's

written instructions.



ROLL UP GENERATOR TERMINATION CABINET 262419 Page - 1

SECTION 262417 ROLL - UP GENERATOR TERMINATION CABINET

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes Roll-Up Generator Termination Cabinets (RUGTC) for use with AC circuits rated 600 V and less and having termination/lug landings for phase, neutral, and ground conductors for transitioning between portable load bank or portable generator and the building.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RUGTC: Roll Up Generator Termination Cabinet.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For termination cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For each unit. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. 1. Connection Wiring Diagrams. 2. Nameplate legends. 3. Bus capacities. 4. Features, characteristics, ratings of each installed unit. 5. Sample of proposed instructional signage.

C. Product certificates.

D. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain termination cabinet of a single type from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by UL and marked for intended location and application.






A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: [DELETE THIS PARAGRAPH IF NOT REQUIRED] Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Cleveland Clinic or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:


2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Cleveland Clinic’s written



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Eaton Corp. Electrical Group. 2. Berthold Electric Company.

B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.

C. General Requirements: UL 1773 listed, marked “Suitable for use on line side of service equipment”.

2.2 FUNCTIONAL FEATURES

A. Description: An arrangement of buswork mounted on insulators in a weatherproof, permanently mounted cabinet with terminations for the temporary connection of a portable generator or portable load bank on the line side and permanent connections on the load side to the facility switchgear.

2.3 LINE (TEMPORARY)TERMINATIONS

A. Incoming Mains Access Location: Front.



B. Main Lugs, Incoming: Conductor connectors suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical set screw type, CU only.

2.4 LOAD (PERMANENT)TERMINATIONS

A. Outgoing Mains Access Location: Bottom.

B. Main Lugs, outgoing: Conductor connectors suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Main and Neutral Lugs: Two-hole, long barrel compression type, CU only.

2.5 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosures: Freestanding steel or aluminum cabinet unless otherwise indicated. NEMA 250, Type 3R unless otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. Enclosure shall maintain NEMA 3R rating with temporary cables installed.

B. Enclosure Finish: Factory-applied polyester powder coat finish in manufacturer's standard ANSI 62 gray over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

C. Compartments: Access to the wiring compartment is through a full front, sturdy, continuous hinged door with padlock provisions.

D. Wiring Spaces:

1. Access to the line side terminations is through a hinged door in the front of the enclosure. Front door must be opened. Access panel shall have up to 10 – 3” bushed openings with safety caps.

2. The load side access is through a fixed bottom plate for terminating outgoing conduits.

2.6 CHARACTERISTICS AND RATINGS

A. Nominal System Voltage: [480/277] [208/120] V, three phase, four wire.

B. Assembly Short-Circuit Current Rating: minimum 35,000 kA.

C. Continuous Rating: [800] [1200] [1600] [2000] [2500] A.

D. Phase and Neutral Buses: Uniform capacity for entire usable length.

E. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, silver-plated, 1000A/sq.in. current density mounted on insulators.

F. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses, equipped with compression connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables and mechanical connectors for incoming circuit neutral cables.



G. Ground Bus: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with mechanical connectors for equipment grounding conductors.

H. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible.


A. Testing: Inspect and test according to requirements in NEMA standard.

B. RUGTC will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports, submit to Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install RUGTC on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Sections. 1. The top of the concrete slab shall be approximately 4 inches (100-mm) above the finished

grade. Edges shall be chamfered. 2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that anchor into structural

concrete pad. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 5. Provide concrete filled bollards for protection from vehicular traffic, painted safety

yellow, minimum two.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" for identification of components and wiring.

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label with engraved nameplate. 3. Label with instructional sign.



3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between terminal busses and switchgear. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for installation of conduit in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Verify tightness and torque all accessible bolted electrical connections to manufacturer’s specified values using a calibrated torque wrench.




1. Inspect wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. 2. Test insulation resistance for each connecting supply circuit. 3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.



MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 262419 - 1

SECTION 262419 - MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Division 26 Section "Enclosed Controllers" for full voltage motor controller requirements.

C. Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for interfacing communication and metering requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes MCC’s for use with ac circuits rated 600 V and less and having the following factory-installed components:

1. Incoming main lugs and OCPD’s. 2. Full-voltage magnetic controllers. 3. Reduced-voltage, solid-state controllers. 4. Multispeed controllers. 5. Feeder-tap units. 6. Instrumentation. 7. Auxiliary devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. LED: Light-emitting diode.

C. MCC: Motor-control center.

D. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

E. NC: Normally closed.

F. NO: Normally open.

G. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.



1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT CONDITIONS]

A. [Seismic Performance: MCCs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.



A. Product Data: For each type of controller and each type of MCC.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EA 5: For continuous metering equipment for energy consumption.

2. Comply with Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for metering requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: For each MCC, manufacturer's approval drawings as defined in UL 845. In addition to requirements specified in UL 845, include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment.

1. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring for

each installed controller. 3. Nameplate legends. 4. Vertical and horizontal bus capacities. 5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed unit.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around MCC’s where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show MCC layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.

B. [Seismic Qualification Certificates: For MCC’s, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.] [NOT REQUIRED IF PARAGRAPH 1.4 IS DELETED]

C. Product certificates.

D. Source quality-control reports.



E. Field quality-control reports.




A. Products Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for motor control centers including clearances between MCC’s and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain MCC’s and controllers of a single type from single source from single manufacturer.




E. [IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."] [NOT REQUIRED IF PARAGRAPH 1.4 IS DELETED]

1.10 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Corp. Electrical Group, Model Freedom 2100.




2. General Electric Company; 8000 Series. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric, Model 6.

B. General Requirements for MCC’s: Comply with NEMA ICS 18 and UL 845.

2.2 FUNCTIONAL FEATURES

A. Description: Modular arrangement of main units, controller units, control devices, feeder-tap units, instruments, metering, auxiliary devices, and other items mounted in vertical sections of MCC.

B. Controller Units: Combination controller units.

1. Install units up to and including Size 3 on drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical-section buses while being racked into their normal, energized positions.

2. Equip units in Type B with pull-apart terminal strips for external control connections.

C. Feeder-Tap Units: Through 225-A rating shall have drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical-section buses while being racked into their normal, energized positions.

D. Future Units: Compartments fully bused and equipped with guide rails or equivalent, ready for insertion of drawout units.

E. Spare Units: Installed in compartments indicated "spare."

2.3 INCOMING MAINS

A. Incoming Mains Location: [Top] [bottom].

B. Main Lugs Only: Conductor connectors suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.

C. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Electronic trip circuit breakers with RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-

replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. [Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.]

2. MCCB Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.





b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.

c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application. d. [Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with

adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.]

e. [Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage.]

f. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

2.4 COMBINATION CONTROLLERS

A. Full-Voltage Controllers:

1. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Enclosed Controllers: Comply with Section 262913.

B. Reduced-Voltage, Solid-State Controllers:

1. General Requirements for Reduced-Voltage, Solid-State Controllers: Comply with Section 262913.

C. Multispeed Magnetic Controllers:

1. General Requirements for Multispeed Magnetic Controllers: Comply with Section 262913.

D. Disconnecting Means and OCPD’s:

1. Fusible Disconnecting Means:

a. Comply with Section 262913.

2. MCCB Disconnecting Means:

a. Comply with Section 262913.

E. Control Power:

1. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.

a. CPT Spare Capacity: 50 VA.



2.5 FEEDER-TAP UNITS

A. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A up to 400 A.

2. Electronic trip circuit breakers, 400 A and larger, with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. [Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response].

3. MCCB Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

material. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application. d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable

pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. e. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent

of rated voltage. f. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts

mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

2.6 INSTRUMENTATION (OPTIONAL, edit per project requirements)

A. [Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:

1. Listed or recognized by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. 2. Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondary’s, and potential

terminals rated to 600 V. 3. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with the indicated maximum

accuracy tolerances:

a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. d. Three-Phase Real Power (Megawatts): Plus or minus 2 percent. e. Three-Phase Reactive Power (Megavars): Plus or minus 2 percent. f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent. g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. h. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent;

accumulated values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours.]



4. [Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semi-flush mounted in instrument compartment door.]

5. [Provide metering module on individual motor starter or feeder compartments indicated on Drawings.]

2.7 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosures: Freestanding steel cabinets unless otherwise indicated. NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

B. Enclosure Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's ANSI 61 grey finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

C. Compartments: Modular; individual doors with concealed hinges and quick-captive screw fasteners. Interlocks on units requiring disconnecting means in off position before door can be opened or closed, except by operating a permissive release device.

D. Interchangeability: Compartments constructed to allow for removal of units without opening adjacent doors, disconnecting adjacent compartments, or disturbing operation of other units in MCC; same size compartments to permit interchangeability and ready rearrangement of units, such as replacing three single units with a unit requiring three spaces, without cutting or welding.

E. Wiring Spaces:

1. Vertical wireways in each vertical section for vertical wiring to each unit compartment; supports to hold wiring in place.

2. Horizontal wireways in bottom and top of each vertical section for horizontal wiring between vertical sections; supports to hold wiring in place.

2.8 AUXILIARY DEVICES

A. General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with Section 262913.

B. Communications Modules: Where indicated provide communication modules, energy metering and control in motor starters with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control." Communications link shall be via Cleveland Clinic’s energy management software.

C. Space heaters, with NC auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.

D. Terminals for connecting power factor correction capacitors to the load side of overload relays.

E. Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with Section 262813 “Fuses”.



2.9 CHARACTERISTICS AND RATINGS

A. Wiring: NEMA ICS 18, Class I, Type B.

B. Control and Load Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.

C. Nominal System Voltage: 480Y/277 V, three phase, four wire.

D. Short-Circuit Current Rating for Each Unit: Fully rated.

E. Short-Circuit Current Rating of MCC: Fully rated.

F. Environmental Ratings:

1. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C), with an average value not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C) over a 24-hour period.

2. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (non-condensing). 3. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m), or 3300 feet (1000 m) if MCC

includes solid-state devices.

G. Main-Bus Continuous Rating: <Insert value> A.

H. Horizontal and Vertical Bus Bracing (Short-Circuit Current Rating): Match MCC short-circuit current rating.

I. Main Horizontal and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of MCC's main and vertical sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.

J. Vertical Phase and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire usable height of vertical sections, except for sections incorporating single units.

K. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, silver plated.

L. Neutral Buses: 50 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables.

M. Ground Bus: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, ¼ inch by 1 inch, extending the length of the assembly, equipped with mechanical connectors for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors. The ground bus shall be located in the bottom horizontal wireway.

N. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible MCC’s:

1. Main Devices: Drawout mounted. 2. Controller Units: Drawout mounted. 3. Feeder-Tap Units: Drawout mounted. 4. Sections front and rear aligned.



O. Pull Box on Top of MCC [WHERE REQUIRED]:

1. Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as MCC. 2. Set back from front to clear circuit-breaker removal mechanism. 3. Removable covers forming top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear easily removable for

drilling and cutting. 4. Cable supports arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables, including

those for future installation.

P. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of unit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install MCC’s on 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness concrete base.

1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more than 3 inches (75 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of motor control centers unless otherwise indicated [or unless required for seismic anchor support.] Construct concrete bases according to Division 26 Section “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.”

B. [Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."] [NOT REQUIRED IF PARAGRAPH 1.4 IS DELETED]

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in each fusible switch.

E. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Section 262813 "Fuses."

F. Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed.

G. Install power factor correction capacitors. Connect to the load side of overload relays. Adjust overload heater sizes to accommodate the reduced motor full-load currents.

H. Comply with NECA 1.



3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for identification of MCC, MCC components, and control wiring.


2. Label MCC and each cubicle with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

3.3 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers, remote devices, and facility's central-control system. Comply with requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

1. Install all low voltage wiring (CAT. 6, twisted pair, etc.) between energy metering devices and Cleveland Clinic’s network.


C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches within enclosed controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for installation of conduit in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Verify tightness and torque all accessible bolted electrical connections to manufacturer’s specified values using a calibrated torque wrench.


A. Perform tests and inspections. Inspect and test MCC’s according to requirements in NEMA ICS 18.


1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.



2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.

3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated

voltages. 5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 8. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform infrared scan of each MCC. Remove front and rear panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 1. Instrument: Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect

significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 2. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies MCC checked and

that describes infrared-scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial actions taken, and observations after remedial action.

D. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

B. Adjust overload relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays.

C. Adjust the trip settings of thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required).

D. Set field-adjustable switches and program microprocessors for required start and stop sequences in reduced-voltage, solid-state controllers.

E. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."



3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Cleveland Clinic's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers.



ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES 262500 - 1

SECTION 262500 - ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Feeder-bus assemblies. 2. Plug-in bus assemblies. 3. Bus plug-in devices.


A. Shop Drawings: For each type of bus assembly [and plug-in device].

1. Show fabrication and installation details for enclosed bus assemblies. Include plans, elevations, and sections of components. Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, connectors, straight lengths, and fittings.

2. Show fittings, materials, fabrication, and installation methods for listed fire-stop barriers. 3. Indicate required clearances, method of field assembly, and location and size of each

field connection. 4. Detail connections to switchgear, switchboards, and transformers. 5. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring. 6. Seismic-Restraint Details: [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT CONDITIONS]

Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints. b. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to

supported equipment.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale. Include scaled bus-assembly layouts and relationships between components and adjacent structural, mechanical, and electrical elements. Show the following:

1. Vertical and horizontal enclosed bus-assembly runs, offsets, and transitions. 2. Clearances for access above and to the side of enclosed bus assemblies. 3. Vertical elevation of enclosed bus assemblies above the floor or bottom of structure. 4. Support locations, type of support, and weight on each support.



B. Location of adjacent construction elements including light fixtures, HVAC and plumbing equipment, fire sprinklers and piping, signal and control devices, and other equipment.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of enclosed bus assembly, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT CONDITIONS] Submit certification that enclosed bus assemblies, [plug-in devices], accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of

any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."





A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed bus assemblies to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



1. [Plug-in Units: provide one (1) for each size installed, boxed and labeled.]

2. One set of joint covers for each busway, boxed and labeled.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed bus assemblies and plug-in devices through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NEC 368 and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with UL 857.

D. Comply with NEMA BU 1, "Busways."






A. Deliver, store, and handle enclosed bus assemblies according to NEMA BU 1.1, "General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Busway Rated 600 Volts or Less."


A. Derate enclosed bus assemblies for continuous operation at indicated ampere ratings for ambient temperature not exceeding 122 deg F (50 deg C) <Insert ambient temperature>.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed bus assemblies and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or floors or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete curbs around openings for vertical bus. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Corp. Electrical Group. 2. General Electric Company; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.

2.2 ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES

A. Feeder-Bus Assemblies: NEMA BU 1, low-impedance bus assemblies in non-ventilated housing; single-bolt joints; ratings as indicated.

1. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT CONDITIONS] Fabricate mounting provisions and attachments for feeder-bus assemblies with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" when mounting provisions and attachments are anchored to building structure

2. Voltage: [120/208] [277/480] V; 3 phase; 100 percent neutral capacity.



3. Temperature Rise: 55 deg C above 40 deg C ambient maximum for continuous rated current.

4. Bus Materials: High strength, 98% conductivity copper conductors fully insulated with Class B 130C insulation except at joints; plated surface at joints.

5. Ground: a. 50 percent capacity internal bus bars of material matching bus material.

6. Enclosure: Aluminum with finish of ANSI 61 epoxy powder paint.

7. Joints shall be designed such that access is required to only one side of the busway for tightening joint bolts. It shall be possible to remove any joint and busway section without disturbing adjacent busway lengths.

8. Fittings and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard. 9. Mounting: Arranged flat, edgewise, or vertically without derating.

B. Plug-in Bus Assemblies [delete if not required]: NEMA BU 1, low-impedance bus assemblies in non-ventilated housing; single-bolt joints; ratings as indicated.

1. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT CONDITIONS] Fabricate mounting provisions and attachments for switchboards with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" when mounting provisions and attachments are anchored to building structure.

2. Voltage: [120/208] [277/480] V; 3 phase; 100 percent neutral capacity. 3. Temperature Rise: 55 deg C above 40 deg C ambient maximum for continuous rated

current. 4. Bus Materials: High strength, 98% conductivity copper conductors fully insulated with

Class B 130C insulation except at stabs and joints; plated surface at stabs and joints. 5. Ground:

a. 50 percent capacity internal bus bar of material matching bus material.

6. Enclosure: Aluminum, with plug-in openings provided on both sides of the busway sections on 24-inch centers, hinged covers over unused openings. The design shall allow for ten (10) hinged cover outlets per ten (10) feet of plug-in length. Enclosure finish shall be ANSI 61 epoxy powder paint.

7. Joints shall be designed such that access is required to only one side of the busway for tightening joint bolts. It shall be possible to remove any joint and busway section without disturbing adjacent busway lengths.

8. Fittings and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard. 9. Mounting: Arranged flat, edgewise, or vertically without derating.

2.3 PLUG-IN DEVICES [delete if not required]

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1; hook stick-operated handle, lockable with two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents

B. Accessories: Adjustable hook stick operator.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Support bus assemblies independent of supports for other elements such as equipment enclosures at connections to switchgear, switchboards, pipes, conduits, ceilings, and ducts.

1. [Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and to comply with seismic-restraint details according to Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."]

2. Design each fastener and support to carry 200 lb (90 kg) or 4 times the weight of bus assembly, whichever is greater.

3. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading. 4. Support bus assembly with not less than 3/8-inch (10-mm) steel rods. Install side bracing

to prevent swaying or movement of bus assembly. Modify supports after completion to eliminate strains and stresses on bus bars and housings.

5. Fasten supports securely to building structure according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Install expansion fittings at locations where bus assemblies cross building expansion joints. Install at other locations so distance between expansion fittings does not exceed manufacturer's recommended distance between fittings.

C. Construct rated fire-stop assemblies where bus assemblies penetrate fire-rated elements such as walls, floors, and ceilings. Seal around penetrations according to Division 07 Firestopping Section and Cleveland Clinic Fire Protection Group requirements.

D. Install a concrete curb at least 4 inches (100 mm) high around bus-assembly floor penetrations.

E. Coordinate bus-assembly terminations to equipment enclosures to ensure proper phasing, connection, and closure.

F. Tighten bus-assembly joints with calibrated torque wrench to the values recommended by the bus-assembly manufacturer. Re-Tighten joints again after bus assemblies have been energized for 30 days.

G. Install bus-assembly, [plug-in units]. [Support connecting conduit independent of plug-in unit].

3.2 CONNECTIONS











D. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.

E. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but prior to beneficial occupancy, perform an infrared scan of all bus assembly including joints and plug-in units.

1. Uses an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.

2. Prepare a certified report identifying bus assembly checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action.

F. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

3.5 CLEANING


3.6 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection to ensure that moisture does not enter bus assembly.



POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS 262600 - 1

SECTION 262600 - POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes freestanding, prepackaged, power distribution units for transforming, conditioning, and distributing electrical power, usually associated with a UPS unit.


1. Division 26 Section “Static Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SPD: Surge Protective Device.

B. UPS: Uninterrupted power supply.

C. PDU: Power Distribution Unit.


A. Product Data: For power distribution units. Include system description, ratings, capacities, and performance characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.



A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of power distribution unit, signed by product manufacturer.

C. [ DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED ] [Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that power distribution units, accessories, and components will



withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:







1. For each factory test of power distribution units.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power distribution units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency on-site repairs in less than eight hours’ maximum response time.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain power distribution unit and associated components specified in this Section from a single manufacturer with responsibility for entire power distribution unit installation.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Product Selection for Restricted Spaces: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for PDU including clearances between PDU and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.






A. Store equipment in spaces with environments controlled within manufacturer's ambient temperature and humidity tolerances for non-operating equipment.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual power distribution unit provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate layout and installation of power distribution units with access flooring for proper support [and seismic restraint of units.]

C. Coordinate layout and installation of power distribution units with Cleveland Clinic equipment.

1. Meet jointly with electronic equipment representatives and Cleveland Clinic ITD representatives to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces.

2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to other participants. 3. Adjust arrangements and locations of power distribution units to accommodate and

optimize arrangement and space requirements of equipment.


A. Environmental Conditions: Units shall be capable of operating continuously in the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability.

1. Storage Temperature Range: Minus 67 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 55 to plus 85 deg C). 2. Operating Temperature Range: 32 to 104 deg F (0 to 40 deg C). 3. Relative Humidity Range: 0 to 95 percent, non-condensing. 4. Altitude: Sea level to 3600 feet (1100 m) above sea level.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson.




A. Description: Integrated and coordinated assembly of power-line-conditioning and distribution components packaged in a single cabinet or modular assembly of cabinets. Include the following components:

1. Input-power, circuit-breaker section. 2. [Isolation transformer.] 3. Surge protection system. 4. Output panelboard(s). 5. Alarm, monitoring, and control system.

B. [ DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED ]Provide units that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Unit Capacity Rating: Unit shall carry indicated RMS kilovolt-ampere load continuously without exceeding rated insulation temperature for the following input voltage and load current:

1. Output kVA: <insert rating> kVA. 2. Input Voltage: [480] [208] VAC, three phase, 60 Hz. 3. Output Voltage: [480/277] [208/120] VAC, three phase, four wire, 60 Hz.

2.3 INPUT-POWER, CIRCUIT-BREAKER SECTION

A. Description: 3-pole, shunt-tripped, thermal-magnetic-type circuit breaker, rated for indicated interrupting capacity and 125 percent of input current of unit at 100 percent rated load.

2.4 ISOLATION TRANSFORMER SECTION [ OPTIONAL ]

A. Description: Dry-type, electro-statically shielded, three-phase, common-core, convection-air-cooled isolation transformer.

1. Comply with UL 1561. 2. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel, one leg per phase. 3. Coil Material and Insulation: Copper windings with a 220 deg C insulation class. 4. Temperature Rise: Designed for 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient. 5. Thermal overload protection. 6. Output Impedance: 3.5 plus or minus 0.5 percent. 7. Regulation: 2 to 4 percent maximum, at full-resistive load; 5 percent maximum, at rated

nonlinear load. 8. Taps: 6 full-capacity compensation taps at 2.5 percent increments; 2 above and 4 below

nominal voltage. 9. Full-Load Efficiency: Minimum 96 percent at rated nonlinear load. 10. Magnetic-Field Strength External to Transformer Enclosure: Less than 0.1 gauss at 450

mm. 11. Audible Noise: Comply with NEMA ST 20. 12. Electrostatic Shielding: Independently shield each winding with a double-copper,

electrostatic shield arranged to minimize inter-winding capacitance.



a. Coil leads and terminal trips shall be arranged to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output connections.

b. Shield Terminal: Separate, and marked "Shield" for grounding connection. c. Capacitance: Limit capacitance between primary and secondary windings to a

maximum of 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz. d. Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: 120 dB minimum, 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minus 65

dB minimum, 1.5 to 100 kHz. e. Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minus 52 dB minimum, 1.5 to 10 kHz.

13. Neutral Rating: 1.732 times the system full-load ampere rating.

2.5 SPD SYSTEM

A. Description: Integrated SPD system complying with Division 26 Section "Surge Protective Devices for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits," to protect unit panelboard, and having the following features:

1. Disconnect Device: Manual, three-pole, fused disconnect switch to de-energize SPD system while permitting power distribution units to continue operation. Fuses are rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.

2. Nonlinear Loading: System shall accommodate rated-load current with a minimum 3.0 crest factor and 85 percent total harmonic distortion.

2.6 OUTPUT PANELBOARDS

A. Description: Panelboards complying with Division 26 Section "Panelboards" except for mounting provisions. Mount in front of power distribution units behind flush doors. Include the following features:

1. Construction: 42 pole, 208/120 V, 3 phase; capable of accepting branch circuit breakers rated to 100 A.

2. Panelboard Rating: 225 A, with main circuit breaker. 3. Panelboard Phase, Neutral and Ground Buses: Copper, with neutral bus at least 1.732

times the nominal phase bus rating. 4. Isolated Ground Bus: Copper, adequate for branch-circuit equipment ground conductors;

insulated from supports. 5. Branch Circuit Breakers: Bolt on. 6. Cable Racks: Removable and arranged for supporting and routing cables for panelboard

entrance. 7. Access Panels: Arranged so additional branch-circuit wiring can be installed and

connected in the future.

2.7 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT CONTROLS

A. Include the following control features:

1. Emergency Power Off: local EPO shall include a fully guarded and illuminated “Emergency Power Off” pushbutton. Pressing the EPO switch shall immediately shut



down the unit by activating the shunt trip of the main input circuit breaker. As part of the EPO circuit, an interface shall also be provided for connecting one or more normally open or normally closed remote EPO switches to the EPO circuit. For flexibility in meeting shutdown control schemes, the local EPO (unit shutdown) circuit shall be isolated from the remote EPO (room shutdown) circuit. The remote EPO circuit shall be designed to allow direct connection of multiple units with single and multiple shutdown control contacts.

2. Over-under alarm shutdown with automatic unit disconnection for the following alarm conditions:

a. High temperature. b. High and low input or output voltage. c. Phase loss. d. Ground fault. e. Reverse phase rotation.

3. Ground-fault protection with automatic system shutdown. 4. Alarm Contacts: Electrically isolated, Form C (one normally open and one normally

closed), summary alarm; contact set shall change state if any monitored function goes into alarm mode.

2.8 MONITORING, STATUS, AND ALARM ANNUNCIATION

A. Description: the PDU shall be equipped with a microprocessor-based power monitor panel. The monitor panel shall gather and process information from electrical and environmental sensors, relays and switches both internal and external to the unit. The monitored parameters and alarms shall be displayed on the unit monitor panel and shall also be available for communication to a Liebert centralized monitoring system using a two-wire, twisted-pair, low-voltage signal circuit having an RS-422 format for reliable communication up to 1000 meters. Additionally, the monitor panel shall be equipped with an RS-232 service port for adjusting parameters and performing diagnostics and an isolated RS-232 ASCII port for communication to other monitoring systems:

1. Power Monitoring:

a. Input Voltage: Line to line, rms. b. Output Voltage: Line to line, rms. c. Output Voltage: Line to neutral, rms. d. Output current: All phases. e. Output kVA. f. Output kW. g. Output current THD. h. Output PF. i. Output frequency. j. Output kW hours. k. Percent load. l. Date/time.

2. Status Indication: Unit on. 3. Alarm Annunciation:



a. High temperature. b. High and low input voltage. c. High and low output voltage. d. Phase loss. e. Ground fault. f. Frequency. g. Phase rotation. h. SPD module failure.

4. Audible Alarm and Silencing Switch: Alarm sounds when alarm indication occurs. Silencing switch shall silence audible alarm but leave visual indication active until failure or other alarm conditions are corrected.

2.9 SOUND LEVEL

A. General: Fully assembled products have a minimum of 3 dB less than the maximum sound levels prescribed for transformers of corresponding ratings when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.

2.10 FINISHES

A. Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and primer.


A. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91 and NEMA ST 20.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Arrange power distribution units to provide adequate access to equipment and circulation of cooling air.

B. Anchor or restrain floor-mounting power distribution units according to manufacturer's written instructions, [seismic codes applicable to Project, and requirements in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."]

C. Identify equipment and install warning signs according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



3.2 CONNECTIONS


1. Separately Derived Systems: Make grounding connections to grounding electrodes as indicated; comply with NFPA 70.






1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification for circuit breakers, molded case; and for transformers, dry type, air cooled, low voltage, small. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Perform functional tests of power distribution units throughout their operating ranges. Test each monitoring, status, and alarm function.

C. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.

D. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Verify that power distribution units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.

2. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and with written installation requirements in Division 26 Sections.

3. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.



B. Adjust power distribution units to provide optimum voltage to equipment served throughout normal operating cycle of loads served. Record input and output voltages and adjustment settings, and incorporate into test results.

3.6 CLEANING


3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Cleveland Clinic personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain power distribution units. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."




ELECTRICITY METERING 262713 - 1

SECTION 262713 - ELECTRICITY METERING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes equipment for electricity metering by Utility Company.



B. Shop Drawings: For electricity-metering equipment.

1. Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. Identify terminals and wiring

designations and color-codes to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by UL and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Cleveland Clinic or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:


2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Cleveland Clinic's written permission.



ELECTRICITY METERING 262713 - 2

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Electrical Service Connections: Coordinate with Utility Companies and components they furnish as follows:

1. Comply with requirements of Utilities providing electrical power services. 2. Coordinate installation and connection of utilities and services, including provision for

electricity-metering components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY UTILITY COMPANY

A. Meters will be furnished by Utility Company.

B. Current-Transformer Cabinets: Comply with requirements of electrical-power Utility Company.

C. Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical-power Utility Company.

D. Meter Sockets: Steady-state and short-circuit current ratings shall meet indicated circuit ratings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with equipment installation requirements in NECA 1.

B. Install meters furnished by Utility Company. Install raceways and equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide empty conduits for metering leads and extend grounding connections as required by Utility Company.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Comply with Utility Company requirements.

B. Electricity metering will be considered defective if it does not pass Utility’s tests and inspections.




WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. “Lighting Control Devices” for wall box dimmers and wall box occupancy sensors.

C. Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards for Telecommunications devices.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist-locking receptacles. 3. Isolated-ground receptacles. 4. Hospital-grade receptacles. 5. Tamper-resistant receptacles. 6. Weather-resistant receptacles. 7. Pendant cord-connector devices. 8. Cord and plug sets. 9. Toggle Switches. 10. Wall switch occupancy sensors. 11. Floor service outlets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Receptacles for Cleveland Clinic-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.









E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for pre-marking wall plates.

C. [Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.]


A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: UL listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location and application.

B. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.




2.2 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Heavy duty specification grade complying with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex). c. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex). d. Leviton Mfg. Company; 5891(single), 5352 (duplex).

B. Hospital-Grade, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement SD, and FS W-C-596.


a. Cooper; 8310 (single), 8300 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL8310 (single), HBL8300 (duplex). c. Pass & Seymour; 8301 (single), 8300H (duplex). d. Leviton Mfg. Company; 8310 (single), 8300(duplex).

C. Hospital-Grade for use in MRI rooms, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Designed for use in high magnetic field environments, constructed of non ferrous materials, nickel–brass mounting strap, brass power contacts, brass screws, single-piece, rivet-less, nickel-plated, all-brass grounding system. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498 Supplement SD. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper. b. Hubbell. c. Pass & Seymour.

D. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.


a. Cooper; IG5362RN. b. Hubbell; IG5362. c. Pass & Seymour; IG5362. d. Leviton Mfg. Company; 5362IG.

2. Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.

E. Isolated-Ground, Hospital-Grade, Duplex Convenience Receptacles:





a. Cooper; IG8300H. b. Hubbell; IG8362. c. Pass & Seymour; IG8300. d. Leviton Mfg. Company; 8380-IG.

2. Description:

a. Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R. b. Comply with UL 498-Supplement SD. c. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding

screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.

F. Tamper-Resistant, Hospital Grade, Duplex, Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement SD, and FS W-C-596.


a. Cooper; TR8300. b. Hubbell; HBL8300SGA. c. Pass & Seymour; TR63H. d. Leviton Mfg. Company; 8300-SGG.

2. Description: Labeled shall comply with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article, and “Pediatric Locations" Section.

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. Straight blade, non-feed through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943, Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include correct wiring/trip indicator light.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; VGF20. b. Hubbell; GFR5352L. c. Pass & Seymour; 2095. d. Leviton Mfg. Company; 7590.

C. Tamper-Resistant GFCI, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Hubbell; GFTR20. b. Pass & Seymour; 2095TR.




D. Hospital-Grade, Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R, UL 498-Supplement SD and FS W-C-596.


a. Cooper; VGFH20. b. Hubbell; HFR8300HL. c. Pass & Seymour; 2095HG. d. Leviton Mfg. Company; 7899HG.

2.4 RECEPTACLES FOR SPECIAL EQUIPMENT

A. Specialized Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 for standard configurations and UL 498.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Cooper. 2. Hubbell. 3. Pass & Seymour.

2.5 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION RECEPTACLES

A. Wiring Devices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with NEMA FB 11 and UL 1010.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds. b. EGS/Appleton Electric. c. Killark; Division of Hubbell Inc.

2.6 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Single Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A for use in Isolated Power System Panels: Hospital Use, Locking Type.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Hubbell: 23000 HG.

B. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.


a. Cooper; CWL520R. b. Hubbell; HBL2310. c. Pass & Seymour; L520-R. d. Leviton Mfg. Company; 2310.




C. Isolated-Ground, Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; IGL520R. b. Hubbell; IG2310. c. Pass & Seymour; IG4700. d. Leviton Mfg. Company; 2310-IG.

2. Description:

a. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498. b. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding

screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.

2.7 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES

A. Description:

1. Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector. 2. NEMA WD 6 Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade, and FS W-C-596. 3. Body: Nylon, with screw-open, cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external

cable grip. 4. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength, galvanized-steel

wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector.

2.8 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description:

1. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.

2. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating.

3. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.

2.9 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:





a. Single Pole:

1) Cooper; AH1221. 2) Hubbell; HBL1221. 3) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1. 4) Leviton Mfg. Company; 1221-2.

b. Two Pole:


c. Three Way:


d. Four Way:


C. Pilot-Light Switches, 20 A:


a. Cooper; AH1221PL for 120 and 277 V. b. Hubbell; HBL1201PL for 120 and 277 V. c. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1RPL for 120 V, PS20AC1RPL7 for 277 V. d. Leviton Mfg. Company; 1221-LH1.

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off."

D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :

a. Cooper; AH1221L. b. Hubbell; HBL1221L. c. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L. d. Leviton Mfg. Company; 1221-2L.

2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle. Provide six (6) spare keys.




2.10 WALL BOX OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Line voltage dual technology wall-switch sensors with power pack:


a. Watt Stopper (The) DW-100- Dual Technology. b. Hubbell. c. Leviton.

2. Description: Line Voltage Dual Technology type, 120/230/277 VAC, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 180-degree field of view, UL Listed with a minimum PIR coverage area of 300 sq. ft and a minimum UV coverage area of 225 sq. ft.

3. Operating Environment: Operating temperature 32-104 degrees F with a relative humidity (non-condensing) of 0% to 95%.

4. Finish: White 5. Warranty: 5 Years

B. Line voltage dual technology dual relay wall-switch sensors.


a. Watt Stopper (The) DW 200 - Dual Technology dual relay output. b. Hubbell. c. Leviton.

2. Description: Line voltage dual technology type, 120/230/277 VAC, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 180-degree field of view, UL listed with a minimum PIR coverage area of 300 sq. ft. and a minimum UV coverage area of 225 sq. ft. Contains two relays.

3. Operating Environment: Operating temperature 32-104 degrees F with a relative humidity (non-condensing) of 0% to 95%.

4. Two relays. 5. Dual on/off buttons. 6. Finish: White 7. Warranty: 5 Years.

2.11 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces:

a. Offices and administrative areas: Smooth, flexible, thermoplastic nylon. b. Clinical, laboratories: patient care areas: 0.035-inch- (1-mm-) thick, satin-finished,

Type 302 stainless steel. c. MRI suites: non-magnetic plates and screws.

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: 0.035-inch- (1-mm-) thick, satin-finished, Type 302 stainless steel.




4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

5. Receptacles for use with computers: Use engraved machine printing with 0.188” high black-filled lettering on face of plate to read “COMPUTER ONLY”.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof-in-use Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.12 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Coordinate fittings with floor boxes as described in Section 260533.

B. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.

C. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.

D. Service Plate: Rectangular die-cast aluminum with satin finish.

E. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Comply with Cleveland Clinic ITD Department Standards.

2.13 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. 3. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange. 4. UPS: Blue.

B. Wall Plate Color: For non-metallic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.




2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pig-tailing existing conductors are permitted, provided the outlet box is large

enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length.

5. “Daisy-chaining” of receptacles is not permitted. 6. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.

7. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 8. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 9. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 10. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.




G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multi-gang wall plates.

H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with white-filled lettering on black field, self adhesive nameplate attached to face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99. 2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 3. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Test straight-blade hospital-grade convenience outlets for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFPA 99. Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz. (115 g).

D. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.



ISSUED: 00/00/20XX

FUSES 262813 - 1

SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits, enclosed switches, enclosed controllers, and motor-control centers.

2. Spare-fuse cabinets.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.

a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based.

2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings.

3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. 5. Coordination charts and tables and related data. 6. Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01, include the following:

1. Ambient temperature adjustment information.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX

FUSES 262813 - 2

2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. 4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.



1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three (3) of each size and type.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.


C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.




A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than [40 deg F (5 deg C)] <Insert temperature> or more than [100 deg F (38 deg C)] <Insert temperature>, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX

FUSES 262813 - 3

2. Mersen USA (Ferraz Shawmut)

B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

2.3 SPARE-FUSE CABINET

A. Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and key-coded cam lock and pull.

1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity minimum.

2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel. 3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high letters on exterior of

door. 4. Fuse Pullers: Provide for each size of fuse.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.


3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Provide fuses in accordance with Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study".


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX

FUSES 262813 - 4

B. Cartridge Fuses: 1. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 2. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 3. Control Circuits: Class CC, time delay.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

B. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s) in electric rooms and mechanical rooms, stock with spares and fuse pullers.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, and holder.



ISSUED: 00/00/20XX

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches. 2. Non-fusible switches. 3. Shunt trip switches. 4. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 5. Molded-case switches. 6. Enclosures.


1. Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for interfacing communication and metering requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Seismic Performance: [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT CONDITIONS] Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX



A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. 5. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of

overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. [NOT REQUIRED IF PARAGRAPH 1.4 IS DELETED]





1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

C. Manufacturer's field service report.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.



1. Fuses no fewer than three (3) of each size and type. 2. Fuse Pullers: one for each size and type.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by UL and marked for intended location and application.



A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: [DELETE THIS PARAGRAPH IF NOT REQUIRED] Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Cleveland Clinic or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:


2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Cleveland Clinic's written


locks and tags.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX



1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, [240] [600]-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories: [EDIT FOR PROJECT REQUIREMENTS]

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

6. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 7. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 8. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 9. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 120-V ac.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, [240] [600]-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories: [EDIT FOR PROJECT REQUIREMENTS]

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

5. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 6. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 7. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 120-V ac.

2.3 SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES [VERIFY LOCAL CODE REQUIERMENTS]


1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Mersen USA (Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.) 3. Eaton Corp. Electrical Group.

B. General Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, UL 50, and UL 98, with 200-kA interrupting and short-circuit current rating when fitted with Class J fuses.

C. Switches: Three-pole, horsepower rated, with integral shunt trip mechanism and Class J fuse block; lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Control Circuit: 120-V ac; obtained from integral control power transformer, with primary and secondary fuses, with a control power transformer of enough capacity to operate shunt trip, connected pilot, and indicating and control devices.

E. Accessories: [EDIT FOR PROJECT REQUIREMENTS]

1. Oiltight key switch for key-to-test function. 2. Oiltight red ON pilot light. 3. Isolated neutral lug; 100 percent rating. 4. Mechanically interlocked auxiliary contacts that change state when switch is opened and

closed. 5. Form C alarm contacts that change state when switch is tripped.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


6. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-safety and alarm relay; [120-V ac] [24-V dc] coil voltage.

7. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-alarm voltage monitoring relay complying with NFPA 72.

2.4 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS


1. Eaton Corp. Electrical Group. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A up to 400 A.

D. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: 400 A and larger. Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings:

1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3. Long- and short-time time adjustments. 4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

F. Ground-Fault, Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

G. Ground-Fault, Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

H. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits. [EDIT FOR PROJECT REQUIREMENTS]

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


5. Communication Capability: Integral communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system, specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

6. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact. 7. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional

time delay. 8. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic

circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts. 9. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be

removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. 10. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-

fault protection function. 11. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations. 12. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered.

I. New Circuit Breakers in Existing Panelboards:

1. Circuit breakers shall be of standard manufacture and match existing devices. 2. Circuit breakers shall have an AIC rating of not less than the lowest rated device in the

panelboard.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Communication modules: Where indicated provide communication modules, energy metering and control for circuit breakers and switches, with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control." Communications link shall be via Cleveland Clinic’s energy management software.

2.6 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Kitchen, Wash-Down Areas, Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250,

Type 4X, stainless steel. 4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12. 5. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, [Type 7] [Type 9].


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. [Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."] [NOT REQUIRED IF PARAGRAPH 1.4 IS DELETED]

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

A. Install wiring between circuit breakers and switches, and facility's EPMC system. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

1. Install all low voltage wiring (CAT. 6, twisted pair, etc.) between energy metering devices and Cleveland Clinic’s network

B. Install fuses in fusible devices in accordance with Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study".

C. Provide GFI circuit breakers with 30 mA sensitivity trip for all freeze protection, temperature maintenance, and heat tracing circuits.

D. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


2. Label each enclosure with engraved laminated-plastic nameplate.




ISSUED: 00/00/20XX




1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.






D. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform infrared scan of each device. Remove front and rear panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 1. Instrument: Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect

significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 2. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies devices checked


E. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection report, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study".



ISSUED: 00/00/20XX

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 1

SECTION 262913 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes controllers mounted in a MCC or separately enclosed, rated 600 V and less:

1. Full-voltage manual. 2. Full-voltage magnetic. 3. Reduced-voltage magnetic. 4. Multispeed.

B. Related Section:

1. Division 23 Section "Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers" for general-purpose, ac, adjustable-frequency, pulse-width-modulated controllers for use on variable torque loads in ranges up to 200 hp.

2. Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for interfacing communication and metering requirements.

3. Division 26 Section "Motor Control Centers".

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

C. N.C.: Normally closed.

D. N.O.: Normally open.

E. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

1.4 [PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT CONDITIONS]

A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed controllers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX




A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures.

1. Show tabulations of the following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. c. Nameplate legends. d. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit. e. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating of OCPD’s

in combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPD’s in combination controllers.



A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT CONDITIONS] for enclosed controllers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.





C. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCCB

trip settings. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.

1.8 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS


1. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.




C. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.

D. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." [NOT REQUIRED IF PARAGRAPH 1.4 IS DELETED]

E. Use of IEC rated components is prohibited.

F. Controllers shall be a minimum of NEMA size 1.


A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).

B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: [DELETE THIS PARAGRAPH IF NOT REQUIRED] Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities occupied by Cleveland Clinic or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Cleveland Clinic no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical systems.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without Cleveland Clinic’s written



1.12 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

B. Motor-Starting Switches: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off or on.


a. Eaton Corp. Electrical Group. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. Configuration: [Non-reversing] [Reversing] [Two speed].


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


3. Surface or flush mounting as indicated on drawings. 4. Red “running” pilot light. 5. Additional Nameplates: [FORWARD and REVERSE for reversing switches] [HIGH

and LOW for two-speed switches].

C. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.


a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. Configuration: [Non-reversing] [Reversing] [Two speed]. 3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping

characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor; external reset push button; bimetallic type.

4. [Flush] or [Surface] mounting. 5. Red “running” pilot light. 6. Additional Nameplates: [FORWARD and REVERSE for reversing switches] [HIGH

and LOW for two-speed controllers].

D. Integral Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.



2. Configuration: [Non-reversing] [Reversing] [Two speed]. 3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 20 tripping

characteristics; heaters and sensors in each phase, matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and having appropriate adjustment for duty cycle; external reset push button; bimetallic type.

4. [Flush] or [Surface] mounting. 5. Red “running” pilot light. 6. [N.O.] [N.C.] auxiliary contact.

E. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held.




ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


2. Configuration: Non-reversing. 3. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.

a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.

4. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.

5. Control Circuits 120 V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.


6. Bi -Metallic Thermal Overload Relays:

a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 20 tripping characteristic. c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected

motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. d. Isolated alarm contact.

7. External overload reset push button.

F. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means [SELECT PARAGRAPH 2 or 3].

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Eaton Corp. Electrical Group. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.


a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to accommodate Class R fuses.

b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

c. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O. /N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.


a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents; thermal-magnetic MCCB, with inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.

b. Front-mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

c. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

d. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


2.2 REDUCED-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Reduced-Voltage Magnetic Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A; closed-transition; adjustable time delay on transition.

B. Reduced-Voltage Controllers:



C. Reduced-Voltage Solid State Controllers: 1. Reduced-Voltage Solid-State Controllers: An integrated unit with power SCRs, heat

sink, microprocessor logic board, door-mounted digital display and keypad, bypass contactor, and overload relay; suitable for use with NEMA MG 1, Design B, polyphase, medium induction motors.

2. Control Circuits: 120 -V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary

fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices. CPT Spare Capacity: 100 VA.

3. Solid-State Overload Relay:

a. Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection. b. Sensors in each phase. c. Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection. d. Class 20 tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against voltage and

current unbalance and single phasing.

D. Reduced-Voltage Magnetic Controllers: Reduced voltage electrically held.

1. Configuration: a. Part-Winding Controller: Separate START and RUN contactors, field-selectable

for 1/2- or 2/3-winding start mode, with either six- or nine-lead motors; with separate overload relays for starting and running sequences.

b. Autotransformer Reduced-Voltage Controller: Medium-duty service, with integral over-temperature protection; taps for starting at 50, 65, and 80 percent of line voltage; two START and one RUN contactors.

2. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.


3. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


4. Control Circuits: 120 -V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.


5. Bi-Metallic Overload Relays:

a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 20 tripping characteristic. c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected

motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. d. Isolated alarm contact.

6. External overload reset push button.

E. Combination Reduced-Voltage Controller: Factory-assembled combination of reduced-voltage magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means [SELECT PARAGRAPH 2 or 3].

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following :












ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


2.3 MULTISPEED MAGNETIC CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Multispeed Magnetic Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

B. Combination Multispeed Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of two-speed magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means [SELECT PARAGRAPH 2 or 3].



2. Configuration: Non-reversing; [consequent pole] [two winding]. 3. Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.


4. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.

5. Control Circuits: 120 -V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.


6. Compelling relays shall ensure that motor will start only at low speed.











ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Separately Mounted Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. 3. Kitchens, Wash-Down Areas, Other Wet Indoor Locations: Type 4X, stainless steel. 4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

Type 12. 5. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: Type 7 or Type 9 as indicated.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy, oil-tight type.

a. Push Buttons: Shrouded types; [maintained] or [momentary] as indicated. b. Pilot Lights: LED types; colors as indicated; push to test. c. Selector Switches: Rotary type.

B. Reversible N.C. /N.O. auxiliary contact(s) as indicated.

C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays as indicated.

D. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays as indicated: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.

E. Communications Modules: Where indicated provide communication modules, energy metering and control in motor starters with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control." Communications link shall be via Cleveland Clinic’s energy management software.

F. Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in Type 4X, Type 7, Type 9 enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.

G. [Space heaters, with N.C. auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in Type 3R enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.]

H. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.

I. Terminals for connecting power factor correction capacitors to the load side of overload relays.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, and by mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Floor-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on 4-inch (100-mm) nominal-thickness concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Sections.

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

C. [Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.”]

D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

E. Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller in accordance with Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study”.

F. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Fuses."

G. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed.

H. Install power factor correction capacitors on all motors 50 HP and larger. Connect to the load side of overload relays; adjust overload heater sizes to accommodate the reduced motor full-load currents.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX


1. Do not install capacitors on any installation where the motor is controlled by a solid state device such as a VFC.

I. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices and facility's central control system. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

1. Install all low voltage wiring (CAT. 6, twisted pair, etc.) between energy metering devices and Cleveland Clinic’s network.


C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.

3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor

nameplate rated voltages. 5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.


ISSUED: 00/00/20XX




B. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

B. Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays.

C. Adjust the trip settings of thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load ampere ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required.

D. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

3.7 CLEANING


3.8 PROTECTION

A. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Cleveland Clinic's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers.




ENGINE GENERATORS 263213 - 1

SECTION 263213 - ENGINE GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged, outdoor, engine-generator sets for Level 1[all projects unless variance approved in writing by the Senior Director of Facilities] emergency power supply with the following features:

1. Diesel engine. 2. Unit-mounted cooling system. 3. Unit-mounted control and monitoring. 4. Performance requirements for sensitive loads. 5. Integral fuel tank. 6. Network Communications. 7. [Outdoor enclosure].

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section 231113 “Facility Fuel Oil Piping” for fuel storage, pumping systems

and piping. 2. Division 26 Section 263600 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors

and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets. 3. Division 26 Section 262313 “Paralleling Low Voltage Switchgear” for requirements for

paralleling of multiple generator installations. 4. Division 26 Section 260913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for

communication features of power distribution system devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include the following:




1. Thermal damage curve for generator. 2. Catalog data for generator protective device. 3. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.

B. Shop Drawings: “Typical” drawings are not acceptable. Provide project specific drawings for engine-generator and all specified components. Drawings shall detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other components specified including enclosure.

2. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights.


C. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.


1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report. 2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not

identical, to those tested on prototype unit. 3. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified requirement

to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads. 4. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of

compliance with specified requirements. 5. Report of sound generation. 6. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations. 7. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.


F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.

G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for vibration isolators and seismic restraints of engine skid mounts, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and




engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 50 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by UL and marked for intended use.

E. Comply with ASME B15.1.


G. Comply with NFPA 37.

H. Comply with NFPA 70.

I. Comply with NFPA 99.

J. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.

K. Comply with latest EPA Tier requirements.

L. Comply with FM Global requirements.

M. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.

N. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements.

O. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation.


A. Products Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for generators including clearances between generators and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

B. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability:

1. Ambient Temperature: Minus 15 to plus 40 deg C. 2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet (300 m).




1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include quarterly exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for proper operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fuses: Three for each battery charger and control panel. 2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than two of each. 3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Caterpillar; Engine – Generator Division.

2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET

A. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.

B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation; and have lifting attachments.




1. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and generator-set center of gravity.

C. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated, with capacity as required to operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.

2. Each engine-generator specified for parallel operation shall be configured for automatic parallel operation. Each engine-generator shall be capable of parallel operation with one or more engine-generators on an isolated bus.

3. Each engine-generator specified for parallel operation shall be configured to automatically load-share with other engine-generators by proportional loading.

4. Output Connections: Three-phase, four-wire. 5. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and

address, and model and serial number of component.

D. Generator-Set Performance:

1. Oversizing generator compared with the rated power output of the engine is permissible to meet specified performance.

a. Nameplate Data for Oversized Generator: Show ratings required by the Contract Documents rather than ratings that would normally be applied to generator size installed.

2. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 1 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load.

3. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 10 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within 0.5 second.

4. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: Plus or minus 0.25 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load.

5. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.

6. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 2-Hz variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds.

7. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to neutral shall not exceed 2 percent with no slot ripple. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.

8. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to winding insulation or other generator system components.

9. Excitation System: Performance shall be unaffected by voltage distortion caused by nonlinear load.

a. Provide permanent magnet excitation for power source to voltage regulator.




10. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.

11. Accept rated load in one step.

2.3 ENGINE

A. Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF-2.

B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.

C. Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm (11.4 m/s).

D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:

1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while passing full flow.

2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.

3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances.

E. Engine Fuel System:

1. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions.

2. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel to source.

F. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity.

G. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.

H. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-generator-set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.

1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.

2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition.

3. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock.

4. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer.

5. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric.




a. Rating: 50-psig (345-kPa) maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F (82 deg C), and non-collapsible under vacuum.

b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment connections.

I. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements.

1. Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB at 500 Hz. 2. Sound level measured at a distance of 10 feet (3 m) from exhaust discharge after

installation is complete shall be 85 dBA or less. 3. Factory installed and piped. 4. Weather-cap on outlet. [DELETE FOR INDOOR UNITS]

J. Air-Intake Filter: Heavy-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and "blocked filter" indicator.

K. Starting System: [up to and including 250 kW] 12-V electric, with negative ground; [greater than 250 KW] 24-V electric, with negative ground.

1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article.

2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding.

3. Dual cranking motors. [FOR UNITS > 1000 KW] 4. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified. 5. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project

Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least three times without recharging. Battery shall be maintenance free, sealed lead acid type. [NO WET CELL OR NiCad]

6. Battery bank for each cranking motor. [FOR UNITS > 1000 KW] 7. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated.

Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories. 8. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish and thermal

insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above 10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries in place.

9. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.

10. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features:

a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.

b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.




c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.

d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging rates.

e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel.

f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet. g. Provide one charger for each battery bank, provide products by La Marche.

2.4 FUEL OIL STORAGE

A. Comply with NFPA 30, NFPA 37, and < Ohio > Code.

B. [FOR HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PROVIDE A FUEL SYSTEM CAPABLE OF PROVIDING A MINIMUM OF 96 HOURS RUN TIME AT 100% RATED POWER OUTPUT OF THE GENERATOR(S). REFER TO DESIGN GUIDELINES]

C. Skid Base Day Tank for units greater than 500 kW: Comply with UL 142, skid base, factory-fabricated fuel tank assembly, with integral, float-controlled transfer pump and the following features:

1. Containment: Integral rupture basin with a capacity of 150 percent of nominal capacity of tank.

a. Leak Detector: Locate in rupture basin and connect to provide audible and visual alarm in the event of day-tank leak.

2. Tank Capacity: As recommended by engine manufacturer for an uninterrupted period of minimum 8 hours' operation at 100 percent of rated power output of engine-generator system without being refilled, or to a maximum of 660 gallons. The skid base tank shall not be less than 12 inches in height

3. Pump Capacity: Exceeds maximum flow of fuel drawn by engine-mounted fuel supply pump at 110 percent of rated capacity, including fuel returned from engine.

4. A reverse pumping system driven by AC power supply derived from the generator output shall furnish an overflow return of fuel to the main storage tank on a critical high level in the skid base day tank. Electrical contacts for starting and stopping the reverse pumping system shall be with the skid base day tank unit

5. Low-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm contacts at 25 percent of normal fuel level.

6. High-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm and redundant fuel shutoff contacts at midpoint between overflow level and 100 percent of normal fuel level.

7. Piping Connections: Factory-installed fuel supply and return lines from tank to engine; local fuel fill, vent line, overflow line; and tank drain line with shutoff valve. Emergency/maintenance raised manual fill cap; 2-inch NPT with 8-inch long riser.

8. All fuel piping for fuel supply to each skid base day tank, and fuel overflow return from each skid base day tank to the remote main storage tank shall connect within the generator set’s fuel piping block-out area.




9. The fuel tank shall be equipped with a manual fuel level gauge capable of being seen by the operator to determine the fuel level in the tank.

10. The tank and all accessories shall be suitable for indoor or outdoor use. 11. Provide a manually operated transfer pump connected in parallel with electric pumps to

allow oil to be pumped to day tank in event the electric driven pumps are in-operable.

D. Fuel Supply Tank for units 500 kW and less: Comply with UL 142, skid base, factory-fabricated fuel tank assembly, with integral, float-controlled transfer pump and the following features:

1. Containment: Integral rupture basin with a capacity of 150 percent of nominal capacity of tank.

a. Leak Detector: Locate in rupture basin and connect to provide audible and visual alarm in the event of day-tank leak.

2. Tank Capacity: As recommended by engine manufacturer for an uninterrupted period of minimum 24 hours' operation at 100 percent of rated power output of engine-generator system without being refilled, or to a maximum of 660 gallons. The skid base tank shall not be less than 12 inches in height

3. Pump Capacity: Exceeds maximum flow of fuel drawn by engine-mounted fuel supply pump at 110 percent of rated capacity, including fuel returned from engine.

4. Low-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm contacts at 25 percent of normal fuel level.

5. High-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm and redundant fuel shutoff contacts at midpoint between overflow level and 100 percent of normal fuel level.

6. Piping Connections: Factory-installed fuel supply and return lines from tank to engine; local fuel fill, vent line, overflow line; and tank drain line with shutoff valve. The fuel tank shall be equipped with a manual fuel level gauge capable of being seen by the operator to determine the fuel level in the tank.

2.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING

A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.

B. Manual Starting System Sequence of Operation: Switching on-off switch on the generator control panel to the on position starts generator set. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.

C. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring pane, microprocessor based,




mounted on the generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration.

D. The control panel shall be designed and built by the engine manufacturer.

E. The control panel shall provide real time digital communications to all engine and regulator controls.

F. Control panel: 1. The control shall include a backlight graphical display with text-based alarm/event

descriptions. 2. Audible horn for alarm and shutdown with horn silence switch 3. Remote start/stop control 4. Local run/off/auto control integral to system microprocessor 5. Cool-down timer 6. Speed adjust 7. Lamp test 8. Voltage adjust 9. Voltage regulator V/Hz slope - adjustable 10. Password protected system programming

G. Indicating Digital Readouts: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 system and the following:

1. AC volts. 2. AC amps. 3. AC frequency. 4. KW 5. kVA. 6. kVAR. 7. Power Factor. 8. KWH. 9. Exciter voltage and current. 10. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 11. Engine-coolant temperature. 12. Engine lubricating-oil pressure. 13. Engine lubricating-oil temperature. 14. Running-time meter. 15. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switches. 16. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat. 17. Fuel tank derangement alarm. 18. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm. 19. Generator overload. 20. Engine RPM.

H. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Network Communications: Communication Gateway, discrete I/O module, for each alarm and status indication for data-link transmission of indications to remote data terminals and control




network. Generator shall be capable of communicating with Cleveland Clinic’s existing data collection and control network. 1. The network shall be MOD-bus isolated data link through a standard RS-485 connection. 2. The distributed control and monitoring shall be capable of being monitored by an IBM

compatible PC. 3. The network media shall be a transformer coupled twisted pair with category 6

transmission capabilities. 4. The network shall monitor real time generator operating data, status, and alarms. 5. Provide remote control capability for the generator through the network. 6. Remote communications: provide devices, wiring, software and equipment for remote

communications from the generator to the Building Automation System. 7. The Controller shall be capable of accepting digital input signals and operate

programmable outputs integral to the Controller.

J. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 systems. Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and monitoring panel.

1. Overcrank shutdown. 2. Coolant low-temperature alarm. 3. Coolant high-temperature alarm. 4. Coolant high-temperature shutdown. 5. Low coolant level. 6. Loss of coolant shutdown. 7. Control switch not in auto position. 8. Battery-charger malfunction alarm. 9. Battery low-voltage alarm. 10. Battery high-voltage alarm. 11. Low oil pressure warning. 12. Low oil pressure shutdown. 13. Overspeed shutdown.

K. Generator Alarm/Shutdown. 1. Generator over voltage. 2. Generator under voltage 3. Generator over frequency 4. Generator under frequency 5. Generator reverse power 6. Generator overcurrent

L. Voltage Regulator Alarm/Shutdown 1. Loss of excitation alarm/shutdown 2. Instantaneous over excitation alarm/shutdown 3. Time over excitation alarm/shutdown 4. Rotating diode failure 5. Loss of sensing 6. Loss of PMG

M. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper alarm conditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will




reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flush-mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated. The annunciator shall have the ability to be located up to 800 ft. from the generator set.

N. Generator exerciser: 1. Programmable cycle timer that starts and runs the generator for a predetermined time.

The timer shall use 14 user-programmable sequences that are repeated in a 7-day cy-cle. Each sequence shall have the following programmable set points:

a. Day of week

b. Time of day to start

c. Duration of Cycle.

O. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Flush; wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated; and labeled. Push button shall be protected from accidental operation.

2.6 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION

A. Generator Circuit Breaker: [Molded Case, up to and including 400 A] [Insulated-case, above 400 A], electronic-trip type; 100 percent rated; complying with UL 489.

1. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time, short-time delay and instantaneous. a. Provide bypass switch to defeat instantaneous trip.

2. Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage curve. 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other

protective devices. 4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel.

B. Ground-Fault Indication: Comply with NFPA 70, "Emergency System" signals for ground-fault. Integrate ground-fault alarm indication with other generator-set alarm indications.

2.7 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1.

B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor.

C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.

D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required.

E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity.

F. Enclosure: Drip-proof.




G. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.

H. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified.

1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent adjustment of output-voltage operating band.

I. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew point.

J. Windings: 0.7333 pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.

K. Sub-transient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum.

2.8 MOTORS

A. General requirements for motors are specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven loads will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.

2.9 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES

A. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

2.10 OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE [DELETE FOR INDOOR INSTALLATIONS]

A. Housing: Description: Vandal-resistant, weatherproof, [walk-in type] [non-walk-in type], aluminum housing; wind resistant up to 100 mph (160 km/h). Instruments and control shall be mounted within enclosure. Acoustically rated, Level 2 (75dBa @ 23 feet). Enclosure with the following features: 1. [FOR WALK-IN UNITS] [Space Heater: Thermostatically controlled and sized to

prevent condensation, minimum 5 kW or as recommended by manufacturer.] 2. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions.




3. Ventilation: Louvers equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents.

4. [FOR WALK-IN UNITS] [The enclosure shall be designed such that all normal maintenance and operation shall be accessed from within the enclosure without the need to open access panels. Provide permanent access stairs and platform at each door].

B. [FOR NON-WALK-IN UNITS] [For non-walk-in type enclosures where access to controls and maintainable items require use of a ladder, a permanent service platform shall be provided which surrounds the enclosure on three sides, complete with access ladder and railings that meets the standards of OSHA 3124 - Stairways and Ladders. 1. The platform shall be manufactured by Generator Systems Support or approved

equal. 2. The platform shall be cantilever supported off of the engine generator sub-base with

formed aluminum frame, structural members, toe plates, railing posts, rails and floor assemblies, Platform shall be of the U construction with 2 "walk" assemblies (outside of all generator set service doors), connected together with a "rear" platform at the control panel end. A "ship's ladder" shall be used to access the platform.

3. No connection to the sub-base tank is permitted but rather all connections shall be through the engine base.

4. Platform shall provide for 180 degree "full swing opening" of all side service doors and at least 135 degree opening of the rear control panel door.

5. The platform frame, railings and all components shall be of .125 gauge formed aluminum.]

C. Muffler Location: Within enclosure.

D. [FOR UNITS 750 KW AND LARGER] Provide 100 Amp, 208/120 V, 3 phase , 4 wire, load center with main breaker and sufficient branch circuit breakers for all generator accessories plus two spare 20A/1P.

E. Interior Lights with Switch: Factory-wired, vapor-proof-type fluorescent fixtures within housing; arranged to illuminate controls and accessible interior. Provide switch at all access doors. Electrical connection [to load center] [to external source].

F. Convenience Outlets: Factory wired, GFCI, four required, electrical connection [to load center] [to external source].

G. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions.

H. Louvers: motor operated cooling-air inlet and discharge. Storm-proof and drainable louvers prevent entry of rain and snow, exterior dust, birds, and rodents.

2.11 FINISHES

A. Indoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.




B. Outdoor Enclosures and Components: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard finishes.


A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.

1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.

B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator set and other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests:

1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability.

2. Full load run. 3. Maximum power. 4. Voltage regulation. 5. Transient and steady-state governing. 6. Single-step load pickup. 7. Safety shutdown. 8. Provide 14 days' advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests by the

Cleveland Clinic's representative. 9. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine-generator installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110.

B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance.




C. Install indoor engine generators on 4-inch- (100-mm-) high concrete base. Secure sets to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Construct concrete bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems and as specified in Division 3.

D. Install outdoor engine generators on a concrete pad designed by the Structural Engineer.

E. Install service platforms for outdoor non-walk- in enclosures.

F. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.

G. Coordinate installation of fuel oil piping from main storage tank to generators and all associated work with Division 23 Contractor. This Contractor shall be responsible to provide a complete working system.

H. Install remote Annunciator in building security command center or as indicated. Provide all interconnecting wiring.

3.3 CONNECTIONS



C. Tighten electrical joints, electrical connectors, and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values using a calibrated torque wrench. Provide a list of all torqued connections and values.

D. Furnish and install wiring from communications devices to Cleveland Clinic’s data collection and control network.

E. Furnish and install control and power wiring for remote fuel oil pumping systems.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set engine-generator circuit breaker and relay protective functions per Division 26 Section “OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY.”








C. This Contractor is responsible for the following tests and inspections:

1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection for "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems" specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test.

3. The diesel generator set shall operate under full load conditions for a minimum of four (4) hours. The generator set shall maintain rated voltage and rated frequency per Specifications for the duration of the full load test. Voltage, amperage and frequency measurements, as well as engine gauge and monitor points, shall be recorded at 15 minute intervals. [All doors of the weatherproof housing shall remain closed during testing.]

4. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.

a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions.

b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery.

c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.

5. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-charging conditions.

6. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.

7. Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale exceeding 40-inch wg (120 kPa). Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that back pressure at full-rated load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the engine.

8. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria. 9. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure

voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified.




10. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits.

11. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator-set installation, including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at four locations on the property line, and compare measured levels with required values.

D. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.

E. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

F. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

G. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

H. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met.

J. This Contractor shall top off all fuel tanks at completion of testing. Fill all engine fluids to levels as recommended by manufacturer.

K. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations.

L. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each power wiring termination and each bus connection. Remove all access panels so terminations and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Cleveland Clinic maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators.



CENTRAL BATTERY EQUIPMENT 263323 - 1

SECTION 263323 - CENTRAL BATTERY EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes [slow-transfer] [fast-transfer] [UPS] central battery inverters used for emergency lighting circuits with the following features:

1. Output distribution section. 2. Internal maintenance bypass/isolation switch. 3. External maintenance bypass/isolation switch. 4. Multiple output voltages. 5. Emergency-only circuits. 6. Remote monitoring provisions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LCD: Liquid-crystal display.

B. LED: Light-emitting diode.

C. THD: Total harmonic distortion.

D. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.



1. Electrical ratings, including the following:

a. Capacity to provide power during failure of normal AC. b. Inverter voltage regulation and THD of output current. c. Rectifier data. d. Transfer time of transfer switch. e. Data for specified optional features.

2. Transfer switch.



3. Inverter. 4. Battery charger. 5. Batteries. 6. Battery monitoring.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, components, and location and identification of each field connection. Show access, workspace, and clearance requirements; details of control panels; and battery arrangement.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail internal and interconnecting wiring; and power, signal, and control wiring.

2. Elevation and details of control and indication displays. 3. Output distribution section.


A. DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED [Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that central battery inverter equipment will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:





3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. ]



D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For central battery inverter equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.




A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.

1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than three of each. 2. Cabinet Ventilation Filters: One complete set. 3. One spare circuit board for each critical circuit boxed and labeled.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by UL and marked for intended use.

B. Central Battery Inverter System: UL 924 and UL 1778 listed.

C. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.



A. Deliver equipment in fully enclosed vehicles.

B. Store equipment in spaces having environments controlled within manufacturers' written instructions for ambient temperature and humidity conditions for non-operating equipment.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace batteries that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Special warranty, applying to batteries only, applies to materials only, on a prorated basis, for period specified.

1. Warranty Period: Include the following warranty periods, from date of Substantial Completion:

a. Premium, sealed, lead-calcium batteries:

1) Full Warranty: One year. 2) Pro Rata: 15 years.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Chloride Systems. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc.; Sure-Lites Division. 3. Control Power Co. 4. Dual-Lite. 5. Hubbell Incorporated; Hubbell Lighting. 6. Lithonia Lighting; Emergency Lighting Systems. 7. Thomas & Betts Corporation; Emergi-Lite Division.

2.2 INVERTER PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Slow-Transfer Central Battery Inverters: Automatically sense loss of normal AC supply and use an electromechanical switch to transfer loads. Transfer in one second or less from normal supply to battery-inverter supply.

1. Operation: Unit supplies power to output circuits from a single, external, normal supply source. Unit automatically transfers load from normal source to internal battery/inverter source. Retransfer to normal is automatic when normal power is restored.

B. Fast-Transfer Central Battery Inverters: Automatically sense loss of normal AC supply and use a solid-state switch to transfer loads. Transfer in 0.004 second or less from normal supply to battery-inverter supply.

1. Operation: Unit supplies power to output circuits from a single, external, normal supply source. Unit automatically transfers load from normal source to internal battery/inverter source. Retransfer to normal is automatic when normal power is restored.

C. UPS-Type Central Battery Inverters: Continuously provide AC power to connected electrical system.

1. Automatic Operation:

a. Normal Conditions: Supply the load with AC power flowing from normal AC power input terminals, through rectifier-charger and inverter, with battery connected in parallel with rectifier-charger output.

b. Abnormal Supply Conditions: If normal AC supply deviates from specified and adjustable voltage, voltage waveform, or frequency limits, battery supplies constant, regulated, inverter AC power output to the load without switching or disturbance.

c. If normal power fails, battery continues supply-regulated AC power through the inverter to the load without switching or disturbance.

d. When power is restored at normal supply terminals of system, controls automatically synchronize inverter with the external source before transferring the



load. Rectifier-charger then supplies power to the load through the inverter and simultaneously recharges battery.

e. If battery becomes discharged and normal supply is available, rectifier-charger charges battery. When battery is fully charged, rectifier-charger automatically shifts to float-charge mode.

f. If any element of central battery inverter system fails and power is available at normal supply terminals of system, static bypass transfer switch transfers the load to normal AC supply circuit without disturbance or interruption of supply.

g. If a fault occurs in system supplied by central battery inverter and current flows in excess of the overload rating of central battery inverter system, static bypass transfer switch operates to bypass fault current to normal AC supply circuit for fault clearing.

h. When fault has cleared, static bypass transfer switch returns the load to central battery inverter system.

i. If battery is disconnected, central battery inverter continues to supply power to the load with no degradation of its regulation of voltage and frequency of output bus.

2. Manual Operation:

a. Turning inverter off causes static bypass transfer switch to transfer the load directly to normal AC supply circuit without disturbance or interruption.

b. Turning inverter on causes static bypass transfer switch to transfer the load to inverter.

D. Maximum Acoustical Noise: less than 50 dB, "A" weighting, emanating from any component under any condition of normal operation, measured 39 inches (990 mm) from nearest surface of component enclosure.

2.3 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions: Inverter system shall be capable of operating continuously in the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability:

1. Ambient Temperature for Electronic Components: 32 to 98 deg F (0 to 37 deg C). 2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent, non-condensing. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 4000 feet (1220 m).

2.4 INVERTERS

A. Description: Solid-state type, with the following operational features:

1. Automatically regulate output voltage to within plus or minus 5 percent. 2. Automatically regulate output frequency to within plus or minus 1 Hz, from no load to

full load at unit power factor over the operating range of battery voltage. 3. Output Voltage Waveform of Unit: Sine wave with maximum 10 percent THD

throughout battery operating-voltage range, from no load to full load.



a. THD may not exceed 5 percent when serving a resistive load of 100 percent of unit rating.

4. Output Protection: Current-limiting and short-circuit protection. 5. Output Protection: Ferroresonant transformer to provide inherent overload and short-

circuit protection. 6. Surge Protection: Panelboard suppressors specified in Division 26 Section "Transient-

Voltage Suppression for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits." 7. Overload Capability: 125 percent for 10 minutes; 150 percent surge. 8. Brownout Protection: Produces rated power without draining batteries when input

voltage is down to 75 percent of normal.

2.5 BATTERY CHARGER

A. Description: Solid-state, automatically maintaining batteries in fully charged condition when normal power is available. With LED indicators for "float" and "high-charge" modes.

2.6 BATTERIES

A. Description: Premium, maintenance free, sealed lead-calcium batteries.

1. Capable of sustaining full-capacity output of inverter unit for minimum of 90 minutes.

2.7 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA 250, Type 1 steel cabinets with access to components through hinged doors with flush tumbler lock and latch.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel finish over corrosion-resistant prime treatment.

2.8 [SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS] DELETE IF NOT REQURIED

A. [Central battery inverter assemblies, subassemblies, components, fastenings, supports, and mounting and anchorage devices shall be designed and fabricated to withstand seismic forces. The term "withstand" is defined in the "Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification" Paragraph in Part 1 "Informational Submittals" Article.]

2.9 CONTROL AND INDICATION

A. Description: Group displays, indications, and basic system controls on common control panel on front of central battery inverter enclosure.

B. Minimum displays, indicating devices, and controls shall include those in lists below. Provide sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and wiring required to support listed items. Alarms shall include an audible signal and a visual display.



C. Indications: Plain-language messages on a digital LCD or LED (typically for units >10 KVA). [edit list for project requirements]

1. Quantitative Indications:

a. Input voltage, each phase, line to line. b. Input current, each phase, line to line. c. System output voltage, each phase, line to line. d. System output current, each phase. e. System output frequency. f. DC bus voltage. g. Battery current and direction (charge/discharge). h. Elapsed time-discharging battery.

2. Basic Status Condition Indications:

a. Normal operation. b. Load-on bypass. c. Load-on battery. d. Inverter off. e. Alarm condition exists.

3. Alarm Indications:

a. Battery system alarm. b. Control power failure. c. Fan failure. d. Overload. e. Battery-charging control faulty. f. Input overvoltage or undervoltage. g. Approaching end of battery operation. h. Battery undervoltage shutdown. i. Inverter fuse blown. j. Inverter transformer overtemperature. k. Inverter overtemperature. l. Static bypass transfer switch overtemperature. m. Inverter power supply fault. n. Inverter output overvoltage or undervoltage. o. System overload shutdown. p. Inverter output contactor open. q. Inverter current limit.

4. Controls:

a. Inverter on-off. b. Start. c. Battery test. d. Alarm silence/reset. e. Output-voltage adjustment.



D. Dry-form "C" contacts shall be available for remote indication of the following conditions:

1. Inverter on battery. 2. Inverter on-line. 3. Inverter load-on bypass. 4. Inverter in alarm condition. 5. Inverter off (maintenance bypass closed).

E. Include the following minimum array:

1. Ready, normal-power on light. 2. Charge light. 3. Inverter supply load light. 4. Battery voltmeter. 5. AC output voltmeter with minimum accuracy of 2 percent of full scale. 6. Load ammeter. 7. Test switch to simulate AC failure.

F. Enclosure: Steel, with hinged lockable doors, suitable for [wall] [floor] mounting. Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant finish.

2.10 OPTIONAL FEATURES

A. Multiple Output Voltages: Supply unit branch circuits at different voltage levels if required. Transform voltages internally as required to produce indicated output voltages.

B. Emergency-Only Circuits: Automatically energize only when normal supply has failed. Disconnect emergency-only circuits when normal power is restored.

C. Maintenance Bypass/Isolation Switch: Switch is interlocked so it cannot be operated unless static bypass transfer switch is in bypass mode. Switch provides manual selection among the following three conditions without interrupting supply to the load during switching:

1. Full Isolation: Load is supplied, bypassing central battery inverter system. Normal AC input circuit, static bypass transfer switch, and central battery inverter load terminals are completely disconnected from external circuits.

2. Maintenance Bypass: Load is supplied, bypassing central battery inverter system. Central battery inverter AC supply terminals are energized to permit operational checking, but system load terminals are isolated from the load.

3. Normal: Normal central battery inverter AC supply terminals are energized and the load is supplied either through static bypass transfer switch and central battery inverter rectifier-charger and inverter or through battery and inverter.

2.11 OUTPUT DISTRIBUTION SECTION

A. Panelboard: Comply with Division 26 Section "Panelboards" except provide assembly integral to equipment cabinet.



2.12 SYSTEM MONITORING AND ALARMS

A. Remote Status and Alarm Panel: Labeled LED’s on panel faceplate shall indicate five basic status conditions. Audible signal indicates alarm conditions. Silencing switch in face of panel silences signal without altering visual indication.

1. Cabinet and Faceplate: Surface or flush mounted to suit mounting conditions indicated.

B. Provisions for Remote Computer Monitoring: Communication module in unit control panel provides capability for remote monitoring of status, parameters, and alarms specified in Part 2 "Control and Indication" Article. Include the following features:

1. Connectors and network interface units or modems for data transmission via RS-232 link. 2. Software shall be designed to control and monitor inverter system functions and to

provide on-screen explanations, interpretations, diagnosis, action guidance, and instructions for use of monitoring indications and development of reports. Include capability for storage and analysis of power-line transient records. Software shall be compatible with requirements in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" and the operating system and configuration of Cleveland Clinic computers.

C. Battery Ground-Fault Detector: Initiates alarm when resistance to ground of positive or negative bus of battery is less than 5000 ohms.

1. Annunciation of Alarms: At inverter system control panel.

D. Battery Monitoring: Battery Monitoring and Data Management System by Alber shall monitor the battery system. The system shall be capable of automatically monitoring, displaying, and recording all battery parameters described in this specification. The battery monitoring system shall transmit all battery data to a Remote Central Computer RCC via USB or RS-232, or be capable of being polled over a LAN/WAN connection using TCP/IP.

1. Basic Functional Performance: Automatically measures and records each discharge event, classifies it according to duration category, and totals discharges according to warranty criteria, displaying remaining warranted battery life on integral display.

2. Additional monitoring functions and features shall include the following:

a. Measuring and recording of total voltage at battery terminals; providing alarm for excursions outside proper float voltage level.

b. Monitoring of ambient temperature at battery and initiating an alarm if temperature deviates from normally acceptable range.

c. Alarm contacts arranged to alarm for battery discharge events, abnormal temperature, abnormal battery voltage or temperature.

d. Memory device to store recorded data in nonvolatile electronic memory.

E. Factory test complete inverter system, including battery, before shipment. Include the following:

1. Functional test and demonstration of all functions, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective devices.

2. Full-load test.



3. Transient-load response test. 4. Overload test. 5. Power failure test.

F. Report test results. Include the following data:

1. Description of input source and output loads used. Describe actions required to simulate source load variation and various operating conditions and malfunctions.

2. List of indications, parameter values, and system responses considered satisfactory for each test action. Include tabulation of actual observations during test.

3. List of instruments and equipment used in factory tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature, humidity, and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been permanently established in spaces where equipment will be installed, before installation begins.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall mounted system components. Do not attach directly to walls. Attach by bolting to steel channels.

B. Install floor mounted system components on concrete base and attach by bolting.

1. DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED [Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and according to seismic-restraint details. See Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for seismic-restraint requirements.]

2. Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more than 3 inches (75 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switchgear unless otherwise indicated [or unless required for seismic anchor support]. Construct concrete bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.



4. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa) 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as

specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions and NFPA 70.

D. Install remote mounted status panels where indicated.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connections: Interconnect system components. Make connections to supply and load circuits according to manufacturer's wiring diagrams, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide wiring between unit and remote status monitoring panel.


1. Separately Derived Systems: Make grounding connections to grounding electrodes and bonding connections to metallic piping systems as indicated; comply with NFPA 70.

C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify equipment and components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."





1. Inspect interiors of enclosures for integrity of mechanical and electrical connections, component type and labeling verification, and ratings of installed components.

2. Test manual and automatic operational features and system protective and alarm functions.

3. Test communication of status and alarms to remote monitoring equipment. 4. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications. Certify compliance with test parameters.



5. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.


3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. Verify that central battery inverter is installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.

C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements in Division 26 Sections.

D. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

B. Install new filters in each equipment cabinet within 14 days from date of Substantial Completion.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Cleveland Clinic's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain central battery inverters.



STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 263353 – Page 1

SECTION 263353 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Three-phase, on-line, double-conversion, static-type, UPS units with the following features:

a. Surge suppression. b. Rectifier-charger. c. Inverter. d. Static bypass transfer switch. e. Maintenance Bypass/Isolation switch cabinet. f. Battery and battery disconnect device. g. Battery monitoring. h. Output circuit breaker.


1. Division 26 Section “Power Distribution Units (PDU)”.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on features, components, ratings, and performance.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, components, and location and identification of each field connection. Show access, workspace, and clearance requirements; details of control panels; and battery arrangement. Include wiring diagrams.

C. Factory Test Reports: Comply with specified requirements.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data:

F. Warranties.




A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location and application.

B. UL Compliance: Listed and labeled under UL 1778.

C. NFPA Compliance: Mark UPS components as suitable for installation in computer rooms according to NFPA 75.

D. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards and ITD Standards.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Battery Warranties: Specified form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace UPS system storage batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranted Cycle Life for Premium Valve-Regulated, Lead-calcium Batteries: Equal to or

greater than that represented in manufacturer's published table, including figures corresponding to the following, based on annual average battery temperature of 77 deg F (25 deg C):

Discharge Rate Discharge Duration Discharge End

Voltage Cycle Life

8 hours 8 hours 1.67 40 cycles 30 minutes 30 minutes 1.67 125 cycles 15 minutes 1.5 minutes 1.67 750 cycles

B. Special UPS Warranties: Specified form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within special warranty period.

1. Special Warranty Period: one year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Automatic operation includes the following:

1. Normal Conditions: Load is supplied with power flowing from the normal power input terminals, through the rectifier-charger and inverter, with the battery connected in parallel with the rectifier-charger output.

2. Abnormal Supply Conditions: If normal supply deviates from specified and adjustable voltage, voltage waveform, or frequency limits, the battery supplies energy to maintain constant, regulated inverter power output to the load without switching or disturbance.



3. If normal power fails, energy supplied by the battery through the inverter continues supply-regulated power to the load without switching or disturbance.

4. When power is restored at the normal supply terminals of the system, controls automatically synchronize the inverter with the external source before transferring the load. The rectifier-charger then supplies power to the load through the inverter and simultaneously recharges the battery.

5. If the battery becomes discharged and normal supply is available, the rectifier-charger charges the battery. On reaching full charge, the rectifier-charger automatically shifts to float-charge mode.

6. If any element of the UPS system fails and power is available at the normal supply terminals of the system, the static bypass transfer switch switches the load to the normal ac supply circuit without disturbance or interruption.

7. If a fault occurs in the system supplied by the UPS, and current flows in excess of the overload rating of the UPS system, the static bypass transfer switch operates to bypass the fault current to the normal ac supply circuit for fault clearing.

8. When the fault has cleared, the static bypass transfer switch returns the load to the UPS system.

9. If the battery is disconnected, the UPS continues to supply power to the load with no degradation of its regulation of voltage and frequency of the output bus.

B. Manual operation includes the following:

1. Turning the inverter off causes the static bypass transfer switch to transfer the load directly to the normal ac supply circuit without disturbance or interruption.

C. Maintenance Bypass/Isolation Switch Operation: Switch is interlocked so it cannot be operated unless the static bypass transfer switch is in the bypass mode. Device provides manual selection among the three conditions in subparagraphs below without interrupting supply to the load during switching:

1. Full Isolation: Load is supplied, bypassing the UPS. Normal UPS ac input circuit, static bypass transfer switch, and UPS load terminals are completely disconnected from external circuits.

2. Maintenance Bypass: Load is supplied, bypassing the UPS. UPS ac supply terminals are energized to permit operational checking, but system load terminals are isolated from the load.

3. Normal: Normal UPS ac supply terminals are energized and the load is supplied through either the static bypass transfer switch and the UPS rectifier-charger and inverter, or the battery and the inverter.

D. Environmental Conditions: The UPS shall be capable of operating continuously in the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability, except battery performance. 1. Ambient Temperature for Battery: 77+/- 9 Deg F (25 +/- 5 deg C). 2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent, non-condensing. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 4000 feet (1220 m).




A. The UPS shall perform as specified in this article while supplying rated full-load current, composed of any combination of linear and nonlinear load, up to 100 percent nonlinear load with a load crest factor of 3.0, under the following conditions or combinations of the following conditions:

1. Inverter is switched to battery source. 2. Steady-state ac input voltage deviates up to plus or minus 10 percent from nominal

voltage. 3. Steady-state input frequency deviates up to plus or minus 5 percent from nominal

frequency. 4. THD of input voltage is 15 percent or more with a minimum crest factor of 3.0, and the

largest single harmonic component is a minimum of 5 percent of the fundamental value. 5. Load is 100 percent unbalanced continuously.

B. Minimum Duration of Supply: If battery is sole energy source supplying rated full UPS load current at 90 percent power factor, duration of supply is 11 minutes.

C. Input Voltage Tolerance: System steady-state and transient output performance remains within specified tolerances when steady-state ac input voltage varies plus 15, minus 20 percent from nominal voltage.

D. Overall UPS Efficiency: Equal to or greater than 94 percent at 100 percent load, 75 percent load, and 50 percent load.

E. Maximum Acoustical Noise: 68 dBa, emanating from any UPS component under any condition of normal operation, measured 3 feet from nearest surface of component enclosure.

F. Maximum Energizing Inrush Current: Six times the full-load current.

G. Maximum AC Output-Voltage Regulation for Loads up to 100 Percent Unbalanced: Plus or minus 2 percent over the full range of battery voltage.

H. Output Frequency: 60 Hz, plus or minus 0.5 percent over the full range of input voltage, load, and battery voltage.

I. Limitation of harmonic distortion of input current to the UPS shall be as follows:

1. Description: Either a tuned harmonic filter or an arrangement of rectifier-charger circuits shall limit THD to 5 percent, maximum, at rated full UPS load current, for power sources with X/R ratio between 2 and 30.

J. Maximum Harmonic Content of Output-Voltage Waveform: 1% total harmonic distortion (THD) for linear loads, 5% THD for 100% non linear loads crest factor of 3.1 without m\kW/kVA derating.

K. Minimum Overload Capacity of UPS at Rated Voltage: 110% for 60 minutes, 125 percent for 10 minutes, and 150 percent for 60 seconds in all operating modes.



L. Maximum Output-Voltage Transient Excursions from Rated Value: For the following instantaneous load changes, stated as percentages of rated full UPS load, voltage shall remain within stated percentages of rated value and recover to, and remain within, plus or minus 2 percent of that value within 100 ms:

1. 50 Percent: Plus or minus 5 percent. 2. 100 Percent: Plus or minus 5 percent. 3. Loss of AC Input Power: Plus or minus 1 percent. 4. Restoration of AC Input Power: Plus or minus 1 percent.

M. Input Power Factor: 0.70 lagging to 1.0 when supply voltage and current are at nominal rated values and the UPS is supplying rated full-load current.

N. EMI Emissions: Comply with FCC Rules and Regulations and with 47 CFR 15 for Class A equipment.

2.3 UPS SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: [LIEBERT is the preferred Vendor for IT projects, coordinate with Cleveland Clinic ITD] 1. Eaton “Power Ware”. 2. LTI Power Systems Inc. 3. Liebert Corporation “NX” series.

B. Electronic Equipment: Solid-state devices using hermetically sealed, semiconductor elements. Devices include rectifier-charger, inverter, static bypass transfer switch, and system controls.

C. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Control Assemblies: Mount on modular plug-ins, readily accessible for maintenance.

E. Surge Suppression: Protect rectifier-charger, inverter, controls, and output components. Input surges should be sustained without damage per criteria listed in IEC 1000-4-5.

2.4 RECTIFIER-CHARGER

A. Capacity: Adequate to supply the inverter during rated full output load conditions and simultaneously recharge the battery from fully discharged condition to 95 percent of full charge within 10 times the rated discharge time for duration of supply under battery power at full load.

B. Output Ripple: Limited by output filtration to less than 0.5 percent of rated current peak-to-peak.

C. Control Circuits: Immune to frequency variations within rated frequency ranges of normal and emergency power sources. Rectifier restarts and walks in and gradually assumes the battery recharge and inverter loads. Adjustable up to 30 seconds and is visibly displayed on the front panel.



D. Battery Float-Charging Conditions: Comply with battery manufacturer's written instructions for battery terminal voltage and charging current required for maximum battery life.

2.5 INVERTER

A. Description: Pulse-width modulated, utilizing IGBT’s with sinusoidal output.

2.6 OUTPUT CIRCUIT BREAKER

A. Single output circuit breaker.

B. Thermal magnetic, three-pole, molded case circuit breaker:

1. Internal to system cabinet. 2. Full size.

C. Rating: 100% Continuous duty at rated full UPS load current, sized per Manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.7 STATIC BYPASS TRANSFER SWITCH

A. Description: Solid-state switching device providing uninterrupted transfer. A contactor or electrically operated circuit breaker automatically provides electrical isolation for the switch.

B. Switch Rating: Continuous duty at the rated full UPS load current, minimum.

2.8 BATTERY

A. Description: Valve-regulated, recombinant, lead-calcium units, factory assembled in an isolated compartment of UPS cabinet, complete with battery disconnect switch.

1. Arrange for drawout removal of battery assembly from cabinet for testing and inspecting.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. C&D Technologies, Inc.; Standby Power Division. 2. Enersys.

2.9 MAINTENANCE BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCH

A. Description: Manually operated switch or arrangement of switching devices with mechanically actuated contact mechanism arranged to route the flow of power to the load around the rectifier-charger, inverter, and static bypass transfer switch.



1. Switch shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked to prevent interrupting power to the load when switching to bypass mode.

2. Switch shall electrically isolate other UPS components to permit safe servicing.

B. Comply with NEMA PB 2 and UL 891.

C. Switch Rating: Continuous duty at rated full UPS load current.

D. Mounting Provisions: Matching system cabinet.

E. Key interlock requires unlocking maintenance bypass/isolation switch before switching from normal position with key that is released only when the UPS is bypassed by the static bypass transfer switch. Lock is designed specifically for mechanical and electrical component interlocking.

2.10 CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS

A. Description: Group displays, indications, and basic system controls on a common control panel on front of UPS enclosure.

B. Minimum displays, indicating devices, and controls include those in lists below. Provide sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and wiring required to support listed items. Alarms include audible signals and visual displays.

C. Indications: Plain-language messages on a digital LCD. [edit list for project requirements]

1. Quantitative indications shall include the following:

a. Input voltage, each phase, line to line. b. Input current, each phase, line to line. c. Bypass input voltage, each phase, line to line. d. Bypass input frequency. e. System output voltage, each phase, line to line. f. System output current, each phase. g. System output frequency. h. DC bus voltage. i. Battery current and direction (charge/discharge). j. Elapsed time discharging battery. k. Time remaining on discharge.

2. Basic status condition indications shall include the following:

a. Normal operation. b. Load-on bypass. c. Load-on battery. d. Inverter off. e. Alarm condition.

3. Alarm indications shall include the following:



a. Bypass ac input overvoltage or undervoltage. b. Bypass ac input overfrequency or underfrequency. c. Bypass ac input and inverter out of synchronization. d. Bypass ac input wrong-phase rotation. e. Bypass ac input single-phase condition. f. Battery system alarm. g. Control power failure. h. Fan failure. i. UPS overload. j. Battery-charging control faulty. k. Input overvoltage or undervoltage. l. Input circuit breaker tripped. m. Input wrong-phase rotation. n. Approaching end of battery operation. o. Battery undervoltage shutdown. p. Maximum battery voltage. q. Inverter fuse blown. r. Inverter inductor overtemperature. s. Inverter overtemperature. t. Inverter output overvoltage or undervoltage. u. UPS overload shutdown. v. Inverter output contactor open. w. Inverter current limit.

4. Controls shall include the following:

a. Inverter on-off. b. UPS start. c. Battery test. d. Alarm silence/reset. e. Output-voltage adjustment.

D. Dry-form "C" contacts shall be available for remote indication of the following conditions:

1. UPS on battery. 2. UPS on-line. 3. UPS load-on bypass. 4. UPS in alarm condition. 5. UPS off (maintenance bypass closed).

2.11 MONITORING BY REMOTE COMPUTER

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Liebert Corporation “Site Scan” series.

B. Coordinate remote monitoring communication module package with power monitoring equipment specified in Section 260913 for successful transmission and remote readout of monitoring data. Connect remote monitoring communication module to Cleveland Clinic’s data network through appropriate network interface unit. The manufacturer shall wire between all



communications capable devices within the switchgear, including electronic meters with the same protocol and wire to a set of easily accessible terminal blocks

C. Description: Communication module in unit control panel provides capability for remote monitoring of status, parameters, and alarms specified in "Controls and Indications" Article. The remote computer and the connecting signal wiring are not included in this Section. Include the following features:

1. Include Web-Card for communications outputs for SNMP and other network management systems.

2. Site Scan interface units for data transmission via SNMP over TCP/IP.

2.12 EMERGENCY MODULE OFF

A. Emergency-Power-Off Switch: Capable of local operation by means of activation by red pushbutton under protective cover on UPS module control panel.

B. Provisions for a remote emergency power off function by means of activation by external dry contacts which completely removes power from the critical bus.

2.13 MAINTENANCE BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCH CABINET

A. Description: Manually operated switch or arrangement of switching devices with mechanically actuated contact mechanism arranged to route the flow of power to the load around the rectifier-charger, inverter, and static bypass transfer switch.

1. Switch shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked to prevent interrupting power to the load when switching to bypass mode.

2. Switch shall electrically isolate other UPS components to permit safe servicing.

B. Switch Rating: Continuous duty at rated full UPS load current.

C. Mounting Provisions: Matching cabinet for right side location see drawings and one-line for 2 breaker requirement and voltages.

D. Key interlock requires unlocking maintenance bypass/isolation switch before switching from normal position with key that is released only when the UPS is bypassed by the static bypass transfer switch. Lock is designed specifically for mechanical and electrical component interlocking.

2.14 BASIC BATTERY MONITORING


1. Albercorp.



B. Battery compartment high-temperature detector initiates an alarm when a temperature greater than 75 deg C occurs within the compartment.

C. Cell/Jar DC Resistance, and Inter-tier Resistance readings.

D. The BMS hardware shall be integrated into the battery cabinet and installed at the manufacturer’s factory. Diagnostic monitoring software provided for installation on customer provided PC/ server with monitor display.

E. The BMS input AC power shall wire directly from a fused output in the UPS.

F. Annunciation of Alarms: through BMS Diagnostic software at Alber system central monitoring point sent via Ethernet network connection.

G. Auxiliary contacts for connection to Site Scan monitoring as described in earlier paragraphs.


A. Factory test complete UPS system before shipment. Use simulated battery testing. Include the following:

1. Test and demonstration of all functions, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective devices.

2. Full-load test. 3. Transient-load response test. 4. Overload test. 5. Power failure test.

B. Report test results.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting: Examine UPS system before installation. Reject equipment that is moisture damaged or physically damaged. Examine elements and surfaces to receive UPS for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work Comply with requirements for installation as specified by supplier.

B. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions and NFPA 70.

C. Connections: Interconnect system components. Make connections to supply and load circuits according to manufacturer's wiring diagrams unless otherwise indicated.



D. Grounding Separately Derived Systems: If not part of a listed power supply for a data-processing room, comply with NFPA 70 requirements for connecting to grounding electrodes and for bonding to metallic piping near isolation transformer.

E. Identify components and wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."





1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Inspect interiors of enclosures, including the following:

a. Integrity of mechanical and electrical connections. b. Component type and labeling verification. c. Ratings of installed components.

3. Inspect batteries and chargers according to requirements in NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications.

4. Test manual and automatic operational features and system protective and alarm functions.

5. Test communication of status and alarms to remote monitoring equipment. 6. Provide load bank test per Manufacturer’s recommendation. Record results.

C. The UPS system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Record of Start up Tests and Inspections: Maintain and submit documentation of tests and inspections, including references to manufacturers' written instructions and other test and inspection criteria. Include results of start up tests, inspections, and retests.

E. Prepare start up test and inspection reports.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Cleveland Clinic's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the UPS.



POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT 263533 - 1

SECTION 263533 - POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes power and automatic power factor correction equipment rated 600 V and less.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 26 Section “Motor Control Centers”. 2. Division 26 Section “Electrical Power Monitoring and Control”.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS [DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED]

A. [Seismic Performance: Power factor correction equipment shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.



A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on features, ratings, and performance.

B. Shop Drawings: For automatic power factor correction units.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Show access and workspace requirements and required clearances.



A. [Seismic Qualification Certificates: For capacitors, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.



1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.



C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended for storage at Project site. 2. Detailed instructions covering operation under both normal and abnormal conditions.



1. Fuses: Three of each type and rating, boxed and labeled.



B. Comply with IEEE 18 and NEMA CP 1.


D. Comply with FM Global requirements.


1.9 COORDINATION




1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace capacitor-bank components that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CAPACITORS, GENERAL

A. Comply with UL 810.

B. Service Conditions: Capacitor equipment suitable for the following conditions:

1. Operating Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 115 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 46 deg C). 2. Maximum Altitude: 6000 feet (1800 m). 3. Humidity: 0 to 95 percent, non-condensing.

C. Construction: Multiple capacitor cells or elements, factory wired in three-phase groups and mounted in metal enclosures.

D. Cells: Dry metalized-dielectric, self-healing type. Each cell shall be encapsulated in thermosetting resin inside plastic container.

E. Rupture Protection: Pressure-sensitive circuit interrupter for each cell.

2.2 FIXED CAPACITORS

A. Description: Factory wired, ready for field connection to external circuits at a single set of pressure terminals. Comply with UL 810.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Corp. Electrical Group. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

C. Fuses: Current-limiting, non-interchangeable type; factory installed in each phase and located within the equipment enclosure. Features include the following:

1. Interrupting Capacity: 200,000 A 2. Fuse Ratings and Characteristics: As recommended by capacitor manufacturer. 3. Neon Indicator Lamp for Each Fuse: Connect to illuminate when fuse has opened, but is

still in place, and locate so it is visible from outside the enclosure.



D. Discharge Resistors: Factory installed and wired.

E. Enclosure: NEMA 250, steel, arranged to contain the fluid leakage from capacitor cells; factory equipped with mounting brackets suitable for type of mounting indicated.

1. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 12 or as indicated.

2.3 AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR CORRECTION UNITS

A. Description: Capacitors, contactors, controls, and accessories factory installed in motor-control center, with a connection to motor-control center bus complying with NEMA ICS 2. Comply with UL 810.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. Eaton Corp. Electrical Group. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

C. Performance Requirements: Controls permit selection of a target power factor, adjustable to any value between unity and 0.80 lagging. Controls continuously sense the power factor on circuits being corrected and, when the power factor differs from the target setting for more than 10 seconds, operate a contractor to switch a capacitor bank into or out of the circuit. Contactors are opened or closed as required to bring the corrected circuit power factor closer to the target setting. Current Transformer: Type, configuration, and ratio to suit sensing and mounting conditions.

D. Main Circuit Breaker: Thermal-magnetic, inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. Operable from outside the enclosure to disconnect the unit.

E. Controls: Solid-state, microprocessor-based controls, including the following:

1. Undervoltage relay that interrupts capacitor switching and disconnects capacitors for power-supply interruptions longer than 15 minutes.

2. "Advance" and "Retard" push buttons on the control panel to permit manually controlled capacitor-bank switching.

F. Contactors: Three pole; rated for the repetitive high-inrush-switching duty in the capacitor application.

G. Fuses for Protection of Capacitor Banks: Rated to protect contactor, interconnecting wiring, and capacitors.

1. Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Identified cabinet with hinged lockable door.

H. Discharge Resistors: Factory installed and wired.



I. Inductors: Air-core type connected in capacitor circuits; rated to limit switching surges to within contactor ratings.

J. Pre-charge Capacitor Circuit: Resistive, pre-charge circuit to charge capacitors prior to switching and to limit switching surges to within contactor ratings.

K. Enclosure: NEMA 250, steel, with hinged door and hand-operated catch. Key interlocking system shall be provided, to ensure safe access into the capacitor bank enclosure. Door shall be interlocked with controls or main circuit breaker to de-energize capacitors when door is opened.

1. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer coat.

L. Local Display: LED or liquid-crystal digital type, mounted in door of enclosure, indicating the following:

1. Target and actual power factors accurate to plus or minus 1 percent of reading. 2. Steps energized. 3. Step reconnection delay. 4. Real and reactive currents. 5. Voltage total harmonic distortion. 6. Alarm codes.

M. System Alarms: Alarm relay and local display indication of the following conditions:

1. Low power factor. 2. Leading power factor. 3. Frequency not detected. 4. Overcurrent. 5. Overvoltage. 6. Overtemperature. 7. Excessive voltage total harmonic distortion. 8. Capacitor overload. 9. Loss of capacitance.

N. Remote Monitoring Components: Sensors, associated communication modules, and network interface units, matched to and compatible with Cleveland Clinic’s electrical power monitoring and control network. Communication module shall have capability to transmit the following data to remote monitoring devices using TCP/IP interfaces with MODBUS protocol:

1. System in alarm. 2. Power factor set point. 3. Corrected power factor. 4. Number of capacitor steps activated.


A. Factory test power factor correction equipment before shipment. Comply with NEMA CP 1. Include the following:



1. Routine capacitor production tests, including short-time overvoltage, capacitance, leak, and dissipation-factor tests.

2. Functional test of all operations, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective devices.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install power factor correction capacitors on all motors 50 HP and larger. Do not install capacitors on any installation where the motor is controlled by a solid state device such as a VFC.

B. [Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."]

C. Connect remote monitoring communication module to Cleveland Clinic’s electrical power monitoring and control data network through appropriate network interface unit.

D. Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."




2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in the following Sections, except optional tests, in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Connect and run installed motors and equipment to verify the automatic switching of the

capacitors. Verification shall include automatic switching of the total capacity of installed capacitors.

a. Provide sufficient inductive/reactive load banks, in combination with resistive load banks, for the test.



TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 – Page 1

SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:

1. Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS). 2. Closed Transition Transfer Switches (CTTS). 3. Bypass/isolation switches.


communication and metering. 2. Division 26 Section "Engine Generators" for interfacing with Emergency Power Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, accessories and catalog data sheets.

B. Shop Drawings: “Typical” drawings are not acceptable. Provide project specific drawings for each transfer switch. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch, power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch.



C. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.




E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions,

including software, where applicable.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches and bypass/isolation switches through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

E. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.


G. Comply with NFPA 99 [for healthcare projects].

H. Comply with NFPA 110.

I. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.

J. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. The automatic transfer switch shall be provided with a five year warranty, covering all parts, labor, travel and expenses during the first two years, followed by three years of replacement parts coverage. Warranty shall commence on startup or six months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first. Warranty shall not be dependent upon customer purchase of additional equipment or preventive maintenance contracts.



1.6 COORDINATION


B. Floor mounted switches: Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Contactor Transfer Switches: a. Russelectric, Inc. “RTS” type.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transfer switches shall be seismic certified, capable of operating successfully after being subjected to a minimum IBC 200% g Earthquake Test. Testing shall be performed and verified by an independent, A2LA accredited, testing laboratory, in accordance with IBC 2006.

C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C. 1. A color, ¼ VGA minimum, graphical display shall be provided for viewing data and setting

operational parameters. Parameters shall also be available for viewing remotely and limited control through a front accessible USB communications port with keypad.

2. All control components and wiring shall be front accessible. All control wires shall be multi-conductor 18 gauge 600-volt SIS switchboard type point to point harness. All control wire terminations shall be identified with tubular sleeve-type markers.

3. The Controller shall provide high intensity LED’s for the following:

a. Source Availability - Indicates the source voltage and frequency are within pre-set parameters.

b. Source Connected - Indicates the source main contacts closed and the load being served from the source.

c. XFER Inhibit - Indicates that the ATS is being inhibited from automatic operation to the unconnected source.

d. Alarm: Indicates an alarm condition is active.



e. TD Active: Indicates that a transfer switch time delay is actively timing.

4. For ease of navigation, the display shall include the following:

a. Soft Keys – Change function based on user location in the menu structure. b. Dedicated Navigational Keys – Home, Scroll Up, End, Escape and Enter.

c. Dedicated Pushbuttons for Alarm Reset, Test, Control and Information.

D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a non-fused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.

F. The automatic transfer switch shall be capable of transferring successfully in either direction with 70% of rated voltage applied to the switch terminals.

G. Switches shall be four-pole as indicated on the drawings. A true four pole switch shall be supplied, with all four poles mounted on a common shaft. The entire fourth pole assembly, including contacts, arc chutes, etc. shall be identical to the other power poles. The fourth pole shall be switched simultaneously with, and by the same mechanism as, the main power poles. The short circuit rating of the fourth pole shall be identical to the ratings of the main power poles. The complete assembly shall be factory tested to ensure proper operation and compliance with the specifications requirements.

H. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current between active power sources.

1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case circuit-breaker components are not acceptable.

2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. 3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. All automatic

transfer-switch shall have separate arcing contacts.

I. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: The transfer switch shall be UL listed in accordance with UL 1008 for 3 and 30 cycle close and withstand ratings for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated. Switches that are not tested and labeled by UL for 3 and 30 cycle ratings are not acceptable. In accordance with UL-1008, after completion of the short time closing and withstand testing, the same sample shall successfully pass the Temperature Test and the Dielectric Voltage-Withstand Test to verify the ability of the ATS to carry full rated current after completing the short time tests. The minimum UL listed close and withstand ratings at 480 VAC shall be as follows:

1. Current Size Amps 3 Cycle 30 Cycle Limiting Fuses 100 – 400 42 Ka 30 Ka 200,000 a 600 – 800 65 Ka 42 Ka 200,000 a 1000 – 1200 85 Ka 65 Ka 200,000 a 1600 – 3000 100 Ka 85 Ka 200,000 a



J. Annunciation, Control, and Programming Interface Components: Devices at transfer switches for communicating with annunciator.

K. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations. Color-coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated.

2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.

3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.

L. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, or in a switchboard assembly in accordance with UL 891, unless otherwise indicated. Enclosures shall be designed to allow installation against wall. Cable access shall be front and one side as indicated. Provide side a pullbox where shown on drawings. 1. Enclosure shall be constructed so that personnel are protected from energized bypass-

isolation components during automatic transfer switch maintenance. 2. Automatic transfer switch components shall be removable without disconnecting external

source or load power conductors. 3. Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting

primer on treated metal. 4. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and

other components including instruments and instrument transformers. [FOR TROPICAL LOCATIONS ONLY].

5. Viewing Ports: Provide viewing ports so that contacts may be inspected without disassembly.

6. The switch shall be operable from a dead-front location. Design switch so that it can be padlocked in the bypass/isolation position.

7. Permanently attach wiring diagrams and maintenance instructions on the inside of enclosure door in a mounting designed to hold the data. Instructions shall be laminated.

M. Switches shall be equipped with NEMA 2-hole compression type lugs. The compression lugs shall be furnished with the ATS and the UL listing of the switch shall not be compromised.

N. Communications Modules:

1. The Controller shall be capable of supporting Ethernet 10/100MBit communications via an internally mounted and self powered communications card. Include an RJ45 network connector. Ethernet communications shall be MODBUS protocol.

O. Power quality metering:

1. General Electric “Multilin” digital power quality meter on load circuit, model no. PQM-II -T20-C-A, or equal by Eaton, wired to EB-27 shorting type terminal block, six circuits, No. 69T0020002.



2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

B. The normal and emergency contacts shall be positively interlocked mechanically and electrically to prevent simultaneous closing. Main contacts shall be mechanically locked in position in both the normal and emergency positions without the use of hooks, latches, magnets, or springs, and shall be silver-tungsten alloy. Main contacts on all size switches shall be segmented, and shall have separate arcing contacts with magnetic blowouts for positive arc-quenching and maximum contact life.

C. Switching Arrangement: The automatic transfer switch shall be double throw, actuated by one or two electrical operators, momentarily energized and connected to the transfer mechanism by a simple over-center type linkage, providing inherent "quick-break", "quick-make" operation when operated electrically or manually.

1. Single operator for Life Safety and Critical Branch switches. 2. Dual operator for Equipment Branch switches, and Closed Transition for UPS loads. The

adjustable time delay between the opening of the closed contacts and the closing of the open contacts shall allow the loads to be demagnetized before transfer.

D. Manual Switch Operation: All open transition transfer switches shall be equipped with a safe manual operator designed to prevent injury to operating personnel. The manual operator shall provide the same contact to contact transfer speed as the electrical operator to prevent a flash-over from switching the main contacts slowly. Manual operation shall not require prior disconnection of electrical operators or control wiring, and shall be safe even if the electrical operator becomes energized during manual operation. The manual operator shall be external type, operable through the door of the enclosure. Safe manual transfer shall be possible under all load conditions, either energized or non-energized. The external manual operator is not required on transfer switches equipped with a bypass switch.

E. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features:

1. Programmable Undervoltage and Frequency Sensing for Each Phase of Normal and Emergency Source: Sense low phase-to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 70 to 98 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 72 to 100 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent. Over voltage to pick up at 102 to 110% and drop out at 100 to 108%. Over frequency sensing to pick up at 50.1 to 69.8 Hz and drop out at 50.0 to 69.7 Hz. Under –frequency sensing to pick up at 45.0 to 59.9 Hz and drop out at 45.1 to 60 .0 Hz (VFS1,2)

2. Contact to close on normal source failure to initiate engine start (CES).

3. Normal status relay (CS1A).

4. Emergency status relay (CS2A).

5. Bypass and transfer switch auxiliary contact in parallel with engine start to maintain start signal whenever load is connected to emergency source (CMES).



6. The controller shall monitor phase rotation of both sources and inhibit transfer if both sources are not the same phase rotation. Source rotation shall be field selectable as either ABC or CBA (PRR).

7. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for 3 seconds (TDES).

8. Adjustable Time Delay: transfer to emergency, adjustable 0 – 9999 seconds. Factory set at 3 seconds (TDNPS).

9. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 105 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95 percent (VFS2).

10. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and factory set for 5 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored (TDPS).

11. Time delays to control transition time delay on transfer and re-transfer (TDNNP, TDNP). For dual operator and closed transition types only.

12. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure (XT1G). 13. Switch-Position LED Pilot Lights: (LT1, LT2) Indicate source to which load is

connected (green for normal, red for emergency). 14. Bypass switch position: Green LED (LT16) to indicate bypass switch is in bypass to

normal position, flashing when ATS is isolated. Red LED (LT17) to indicate bypass switch is in bypass to emergency position.

15. Provisions to accept customer supplied remote contact closure or 24 VDC signal to initiate load test (LTR).

16. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and emergency-source sensing circuits.

a. Normal Power Supervision: (LT3) Amber light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available."

b. Emergency Power Supervision: (LT4) Amber light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source Available."

17. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally closed, single-pole, double-throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac (CS1P, CS2P).

18. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally closed, single-pole, double-throw contacts for emergency switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac (CS2P).

19. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two closed, single-pole, double-throw contacts when switch is bypassed to normal and emergency switch positions, rated 10 A at 240-VAC (CB1, CB2).

20. Pushbutton: to bypass re-transfer time delay (XP8). 21. Two position key operated switch to disconnect engine start, with manual mode LED

light and nameplate to read “Engine Lock-out Switch” (XK16). 22. Provide additional elevator signals on switches connected to emergency equipment

branch: a. Additional Form “C” contacts (two) to indicate ATS in Emergency position.



b. Form “C” time delay contacts (two) that change state simultaneously 0-3600 seconds before transfer in either direction and revert 0-3600 seconds after transfer is completed.

23. Engine Shutdown Timer: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory set for five minutes. Timer shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

24. Engine overrun to provide unloaded operation after retransfer to normal (2e), adjustable from 0 – 3600 seconds, factory set at 300 seconds. The transfer switch cool-down timer shall be coordinated with any engine control cool-down timers to avoid excessive unloaded operation. a. Engine-Generator Exerciser: The controller shall include a user configurable

exerciser. Exerciser shall be configurable for daily, 7 day, 14 day or 28 day exercise periods, each with (7) programmable events. The exerciser shall also be configurable as a full, 365 day exerciser with up to 24 independent exercise events. Each event shall be configurable for Test with Load and Test without Load. Each event shall include user adjustable start time, date and test duration. All time and date settings shall be stored in nonvolatile EEPROMM memory. The controller shall include full programmability for daylight savings time.

27. All pilot lights shall be LED, push-to-test type.

2.4 CLOSED TRANSITION TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Automatic Closed-Transition Transfer Switches: Include the following functions and characteristics:

1. Fully automatic make-before-break operation. 2. Load transfer without interruption, through momentary interconnection of both power

sources not exceeding 100 ms. 3. Initiation of No-Interruption Transfer: Controlled by in-phase monitor and sensors

confirming both sources are present and acceptable.

a. Initiation occurs without active control of generator. b. Controls ensure that closed-transition load transfer closure occurs only when the 2

sources are within plus or minus 5 electrical degrees maximum, and plus or minus 5 percent maximum voltage difference.

4. Failure of power source serving load initiates automatic break-before-make transfer.

B. In-Phase Monitor: Factory-wired, internal relay controls transfer so it occurs only when the two sources are synchronized in phase. Relay compares phase relationship and frequency difference between normal and emergency sources and initiates transfer when both sources are within 15 electrical degrees, and only if transfer can be completed within 60 electrical degrees. Transfer is initiated only if both sources are within 2 Hz of nominal frequency and 70 percent or more of nominal voltage.

C. Provide a safety signal (Dry contact outputs) for customer-connected alarm and remote breaker tripping through shunt trips on source circuit breakers.

D. The CTTS/BPS shall be UL listed in accordance with UL 1008.



2.5 BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCHES

A. Comply with requirements for Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

B. Description: Manual type, arranged to select and connect either source of power directly to load, isolating transfer switch from load and from both power sources. The bypass isolation switch shall provide a safe and convenient means of manually bypassing and isolating the automatic transfer switch, regardless of the condition of position of the automatic transfer switch. The bypass isolation switch shall have the ability to be used as an emergency backup system in the event of a transfer switch failure. Include the following features for each combined automatic transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch:

1. The bypass switch shall be load break design. Bypassing shall be by means of a single, externally operated handle. This handle shall allow direct, one step bypass to either Source 1 or Source 2, regardless of the position of the automatic transfer switch. The bypass isolation switch shall be purely mechanical, and bypass operation shall not be dependent upon any electrical device or interlocks for safety purposes or proper sequencing.

2. Means to lock bypass/isolation switch in the position that isolates transfer switch with an arrangement that permits complete electrical testing of transfer switch while isolated. While isolated, interlocks prevent transfer-switch operation, except for testing or maintenance.

3. Drawout Arrangement for Transfer Switch: Provide physical separation from live parts and accessibility for testing and maintenance operations.

4. Bypass/Isolation Switch Current, Voltage, Closing, and Short-Circuit Withstand Ratings: Equal to or greater than those of associated automatic transfer switch, and with same phase arrangement and number of poles.

5. Contact temperatures of bypass/isolation switches shall not exceed those of automatic transfer-switch contacts when they are carrying rated load.

6. Operability: Constructed so load bypass and transfer-switch isolation can be performed by 1 person in no more than 2 operations in 15 seconds or less.

7. Legend: Manufacturer's standard legend for control labels and instruction signs shall describe operating instructions.

8. Maintainability: Fabricate to allow convenient removal of major components from front without removing other parts or main power conductors.

9. Installation: Enclosure requires front and side access. 10.

C. Interconnection of Bypass/Isolation Switches with Automatic Transfer Switches: Factory-installed copper bus bars; plated at connection points and braced for the indicated available short-circuit current.


A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.

1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more than 4 inches (100 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switch, unless otherwise indicated. Construct concrete bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." Paint front edge yellow.

B. Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

C. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Cleveland Clinic if necessary to accommodate required wiring.


C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."




1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in testing.

2. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.


4. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.



a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of

barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation.

5. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings. e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch

operations. f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding

500 micro-ohms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.

g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.

6. Provide load bank testing of transfer switches installed in Level 1 emergency power systems prior to connecting building load.

7. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources.

a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Cleveland Clinic's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below.

B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.





LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES 264113 - 1

SECTION 264113 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes lightning protection for [structures] [structure elements] [building site components].



B. Shop Drawings: For air terminals and mounting accessories.

1. Layout of the lightning protection system, along with details of the components to be used in the installation.

2. Include indications for use of raceway, data on how concealment requirements will be met, and calculations required by NFPA 780 for bonding of grounded and isolated metal bodies.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. Include data on listing or certification by UL.

B. Certification, signed by Contractor, that roof adhesive is approved by manufacturer of roofing material.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Comply with recommendations in NFPA 780, Annex D, "Inspection and Maintenance of Lightning Protection Systems," for maintenance of the lightning protection system.

E. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features, including the following:

1. Ground rods. 2. Ground loop conductor.




A. Installer Qualifications: Certified by UL, trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. System Certificate:

1. [UL Master Label.] 2. [UL Master Label Recertification.]

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 780, "Definitions" Article.

D. Comply with FM Global requirements.


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systems and components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and building materials, metal bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, and building finishes.

B. Coordinate installation of air terminals attached to roof systems with roofing manufacturer and Installer.

C. Flashings of through-roof assemblies shall comply with roofing manufacturers' specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with UL 96 and NFPA 780.

B. Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: NFPA 780, [Class I] [Class II], [aluminum] [copper] unless otherwise indicated.


a. East Coast Lightning Equipment Inc. b. ERICO International Corporation. c. Harger. d. Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Co. Inc. e. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc.



2. Air Terminals More than 24 Inches (600 mm) Long: With brace attached to the terminal at not less than half the height of the terminal.

3. Single-Membrane, Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: Designed specifically for single-membrane roof system materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 roofing Sections.

C. Main and Bonding Conductors: [Copper] [Aluminum].

D. Ground Loop Conductor: The same size and type as the main conductor except tinned.

E. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter by 10 feet (3 m) long.

F. Heavy-Duty, Stack-Mounted, Lightning Protection Components: [Stainless steel] [Solid copper].

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to UL 96A and NFPA 780.

B. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid sharp bends.

C. Conceal the following conductors:

1. System conductors. 2. Down conductors. 3. Interior conductors. 4. Conductors within normal view of exterior locations at grade within 200 feet (60 m) of

building.

D. Cable Connections: Use crimped or bolted connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components. Use exothermic-welded connections in underground portions of the system.

E. Cable Connections: Use exothermic-welded connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components.

1. Exception: In single-ply membrane roofing, exothermic-welded connections may be used only below the roof level.

F. Air Terminals on Single-Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with roofing membrane and adhesive manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Bond extremities of vertical metal bodies exceeding 60 feet (18 m) in length to lightning protection components.



H. Ground Loop: Install ground-level, potential equalization conductor and extend around the perimeter of [structure] [area or item indicated].

1. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches (600 mm) from building foundation. 2. Bond ground terminals to the ground loop. 3. Bond grounded building systems to the ground loop conductor within 12 feet (3.6 m) of

grade level.

I. Bond lightning protection components with intermediate-level interconnection loop conductors to grounded metal bodies of building at 60-foot (18-m) intervals.

3.2 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such materials.

B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions cause deterioration or corrosion of conductors.


A. Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing lightning protection components.

B. UL Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain a UL Master Label Certificate for system and turn over to Cleveland Clinic.



SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

264313 - 1

SECTION 264313 – SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes field-mounted SPD for low-voltage (120 to 480 V) power distribution equipment.


1. Division 26 Section "Secondary Unit Substations" for factory-installed SPD.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. SPD: Surge Protective Device(s), both singular and plural.

C. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

D. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor(s), both singular and plural; also, transient voltage surge suppression.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating weights, electrical characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Verification that all SPD are UL tested and labeled with 20kA (In) nominal discharge rating for compliance to UL96A Lightning Protection Master Label and NFPA 780.


A. Product Certificates: For SPD devices, from manufacturer.




264313 - 2

C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For SPD devices to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



1. Replaceable Protection Modules: One for each SPD provided.



B. Comply with IEEE C62.41.2 and test devices according to IEEE C62.45.


D. Comply with NEMA LS 1.

E. Comply with UL 1449 and UL 1283 (Type 2 only).


G. Comply with FM Global requirements.

H. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: [DELETE THIS PARAGRAPH IF NOT REQUIRED] Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Cleveland Clinic or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Cleveland Clinic no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed electrical service interruptions.




264313 - 3

B. Service Conditions: Rate SPD devices for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of nominal system operating voltage.

2. Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg C). 3. Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, non-condensing. 4. Altitude: Less than 20,000 feet (6090 m) above sea level.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of field-mounted SPD devices to allow adequate clearances for maintenance.

B. Coordinate SPD devices with Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Current Technology Inc.; Danaher Power Solutions. 2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 3. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 4. LEA International. 5. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson Network Power. 6. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Surge Protection Devices Installed in Secondary Unit Substations:

1. Type 1, Complying with UL 1449, 3rd edition, with UL card. 2. Modular design (with field-replaceable modules). 3. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 4. SPD relying upon external or supplementary installed safety overcurrent protection do

not meet the intent of this specification. 5. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 6. Redundant suppression circuits.



264313 - 4

7. Redundant replaceable modules. 8. Arrangement with copper bus bars and for bolted connections to phase buses, neutral bus,

and ground bus. 9. Provide a three pole circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnecting means. 10. EMI/RFI filtering attenuation: Up to 50 dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz. 11. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 12. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 13. Form-C contacts rated at 5 Amp and 250-VAC, one normally open and one normally

closed. Contacts shall reverse on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.

14. Six-digit transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.

C. Minimum Surge Current Capacity Rating: 300 kA per phase.

D. Nominal discharge current (In): 20 kA.

E. Short circuit current rating (SCCR): 200 kA.

F. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV):

1. 480/277 V: 320 V. 2. 208/120 V: 150 V.

G. UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with [480Y/277 V] [208Y/120 V], 3-phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: [1200 V for 480Y/277 V] [700 V for 208Y/120 V]. 2. Line to Ground: [1200 V for 480Y/277 V] [700 V for 208Y/120 V]. 3. Neutral to Ground: [1200 V for 480Y/277 V] [700 V for 208Y/120 V]. 4. Line to Line: [1800 V for 480/277 V] [1200 V for 208/120 V].

2.2 SWITCHGEAR, SWITCHBOARD and PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Current Technology Inc. 2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 3. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 4. LEA International. 5. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson Network Power. 6. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Products shall be installed external to distribution and branch panel equipment. SPD must have the same or greater AIC, Interrupting, or Fault rating of the equipment the SPD is protecting.

C. Surge Protection Devices:

1. Type 2, Comply with UL 1449, 3rd edition with UL card.



264313 - 5

1. Externally mounted. 2. Modular design (with field-replaceable modules). 3. Short-circuit current rating complying with UL 1449, and matching or exceeding the

panelboard short-circuit rating and redundant suppression circuits; with individually fused metal-oxide varistors.

4. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 5. SPD relying upon external or supplementary installed safety overcurrent protection do

not meet the intent of this specification. 6. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 7. An integral fused and safety interlocked disconnect switch with an externally mounted

manual operator. 8. Redundant suppression circuits. 9. Redundant replaceable modules. 10. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. 11. EMI/RFI filtering attenuation: Up to 50 dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz. 12. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 13. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 14. Form-C contacts rated at 5 Amp and 250-VAC, one normally open and one normally

closed. Contacts shall reverse on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.

15. Six-digit transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.

D. Minimum Surge Current Capacity Rating: 1. LV switchgear, Switchboards, MCC’s, Distribution panels: minimum 200 kA. 2. Branch Circuit Panelboards: minimum 100 kA.

E. Nominal discharge current (In): 20 kA.

F. Short circuit current rating (SCCR): 200 kA

G. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV):

1. 480/277 V: 320 V. 2. 208/120 V: 150 V.

H. UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with [480Y/277 V] [208Y/120 V], 3-phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows :

1. Line to Neutral: [1200 V for 480Y/277 V] [700 V for 208Y/120 V]. 2. Line to Ground: [1200 V for 480Y/277 V] [700 V for 208Y/120 V]. 3. Neutral to Ground: [1200 V for 480Y/277 V] [700 V for 208Y/120 V]. 4. Line to Line: [1800 V for 480/277 V] [1200 V for 208/120 V].

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1.



264313 - 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Type 1 SPD devices at service entrance Secondary Unit Substations shall be factory installed on the line side, with ground lead bonded to service entrance ground.

B. Install type 2 SPD devices for LV switchgear, switchboards and panelboards with conductors or buses between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.

1. Provide a three pole circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnecting means for each SPD unless otherwise indicated.





1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, "Surge Arresters, Low-Voltage Surge Protection Devices" Section. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. After installing SPD devices but before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

3. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. SPD device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment or panelboards to their sources until SPD devices are installed and connected.

B. Do not perform insulation resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with the SPD installed. Disconnect before conducting insulation resistance tests, and reconnect immediately after the testing is over.



264313 - 7

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Cleveland Clinic’s maintenance personnel to maintain SPD devices.


PROJECT NAME FOR: CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #__________ ISSUED: 00/00/20XX

INTERIOR LIGHTING_2015 265100 - 1

SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior solid-state luminaires that use LED technology.

2. Emergency lighting units.

3. Exit signs.

4. Luminaire supports.


1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including

time switches, photosensors, occupancy sensors, lighting relays, contactors, and manual

wall box dimmers.


cabling.


A. Catalog numbers indicated in the Luminaire Schedule are a design series reference and do not

necessarily represent the exact catalog number, size, voltage, wattage, type of light bar, driver,

finish trim, ceiling type, mounting hardware or special requirements as specified or as required

by the particular installations. Provide complete luminaire to correspond with the features,

accessories, number of lamps, wattage and/or size specified in the text description of each

luminaire type. Additional features, accessories and options specified shall be included.

B. Provide all frames, supplementary support structures, hangers, spacers, stems, aligner canopies,

auxiliary junction boxes and other hardware as required for a complete and proper installation.

Recessed luminaires shall have frames that are compatible with the ceiling systems.

C. Luminaire voltage shall match the voltage of the circuit serving same.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color-rendering index.



C. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

D. LED: Light-emitting diode.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including lamp, reflector, and housing.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of luminaire, arranged in order of luminaire designation. Include

data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Material and physical description of luminaire including dimensions.

2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.

3. Energy-efficiency data.

4. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), Kelvin temperature, and energy-efficiency data for

lamps.

5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with

IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each luminaire type.

The adjustment factors shall be for light bars, drivers, and accessories identical to those

indicated for the luminaire as applied in this Project.

a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data shall

be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for

remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer. LM-79 and LM-80 data

for solid state lighting.

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a

manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National

Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting

Products.

6. Photometric data, certified by a qualified independent testing agency, in IESNA format,

based on certified results of laboratory tests of each luminaire type, outfitted with lamps,

drivers and accessories identical to those indicated for the luminaire as applied in the

Project.

7. Low voltage transformers.

8. LED power supplies.

9. Types of LED’s, including manufacturer, wattage, and Color Rendering Index (CRI) and

color temperature in degrees Kelvin (K).

B. Shop Drawings shall:

1. Show detail of nonstandard or custom luminaires.

2. Indicate dimensions, weights, method of field assembly, components, features and

accessories.

3. For custom luminaires, modified luminaires or linear luminaires mounted in continuous

rows, submit scaled drawings prepared by the manufacturer showing all details of



construction, lengths in runs, pendant or power feed locations, accessories, finishes and

lists of materials.

4. This Contractor shall provide the manufacturer with accurate field dimensions where

required.

5. Include wiring diagrams, power and control wiring.

C. Wiring diagrams shall detail wiring for luminaires and differentiate between manufacturer

installed and field installed wiring.

D. Product Certificates shall be signed by manufacturers of luminaires certifying that products

comply with requirements.

E. Dimming Driver Compatibility Certificates shall be signed by the manufacturer of driver

certifying that drivers are compatible with dimming systems and equipment with which they are

used. Product Certificates signed by product manufacturer shall be provided for each type of

driver for dimmer controlled luminaires.

F. Maintenance Data shall be provided for luminaires and equipment to include in emergency,

operation and maintenance manuals specified in specifications section describing Operations

and Maintenance Data.

G. Field quality control test reports.

H. Special Warranties specified in the Section.

I. Review of luminaire submittals which indicate voltage, mounting condition, or quantities shall

not be considered to be approval of said voltage, mounting condition or quantities. This

Contractor shall field verify voltage and actual mounting condition and method.

J. Product samples, complete with housing, trim, specified lamp and 8’ cord with plug shall be

submitted if requested.

1.6 CUSTOM LUMINAIRES

A. All custom luminaires require a prototype to be submitted prior to commencement of

fabrication. The purpose of the prototype will be to review construction, lamp placement within

luminaire, lamp type, optical assembly, finishes, etc. Modifications may be required as a result

of prototype review. These modifications and others that do not materially affect the cost of the

luminaire shall be incorporated at no additional cost to the Cleveland Clinic, Architect or

Architect/Engineer.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and luminaires to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all arrays and drivers types used on Project; use ANSI and

manufacturers' codes.



1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS



1. Glass, Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 10% or one dozen (whichever is less) of each type

and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

2. Globes and Guards: 5% of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each

type.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver luminaires individually wrapped in factory fabricated fiberboard type containers.

B. Handle luminaires carefully to prevent breakage, denting and scouring of the luminaire finish.

C. Store product in a clean, dry space, protected from weather.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent

agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as

defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.


Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to the Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and marked

for intended use.

C. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for

indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

D. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Guidelines.


F. Designated manufacturers are listed to define the requirements for quality and function of the

specified product.

G. Mockups: Provide interior luminaires for room or module mockups complete with power and

control connections.

1. Obtain Lighting Designer’s and Architect's approval of luminaires for mockups prior to

starting installations.

2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.

3. Remove mockups when directed. Luminaires may be reinstalled in the Work with

approval from the Cleveland Clinic.

4. Install luminaires for mockups with power and control connections.



5. Mockups evaluated on the Project site may become part of the complete Work with the

approval of the Cleveland Clinic, Lighting Designer and Architect if the mockup is

undisturbed at the time of substantial completion.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires with ceiling system and other construction that

penetrates ceilings or is supported by them including mechanical system, fire suppression, and

technology and partition assemblies.

B. Provide all frames, supplementary support structures, hangers, spacers, stems, aligner canopies,

auxiliary junction boxes and other hardware as required for a complete and proper installation.

C. Recessed luminaires shall have frames that are compatible with the ceiling system indicated on

the Architectural Drawings.

D. Coordination Meetings: This Contractor shall meet at least twice with the ceiling installer.

Hold first meeting before submittal of shop drawings to coordinate each luminaire mounting

condition with ceiling type. During second meeting, coordinate luminaire layout in each area.

This Contractor shall meet at least twice with the mechanical systems installer prior to

fabrication and installation of ductwork. Coordinate depth and location of all luminaires with

ductwork, fire suppression, and technology in all areas.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section shall not deprive the Cleveland

Clinic of other rights the Cleveland Clinic may have under other provisions of the Contract

Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by this

Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranty for LEDs’ and Drivers: Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer

of LED’s and drivers agrees to replace components that fails in materials or workmanship

within specified warranty period.

1. LED arrays: 5 years from date of substantial completion.

2. Drivers: 5 years from date of substantial completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as listed

in the Lighting Fixture Schedule or comparable products approved in writing by Cleveland

Clinic.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=6845&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd



2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES AND COMPONENTS

A. Recessed Luminaires: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed

luminaires.

B. Luminaires: Comply with UL 1598.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs, sharp corners and edges. Metal work shall be free of tool marks and

dents and shall have accurate angles bent as sharply as compatible with the gauges of the

required metal. Intersections and joints shall be formed true and of adequate strength and

structural rigidity to prevent any distortion after assembly. All miters shall be in accurate

alignment with abutting intersection members.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent

warping and sagging. Luminaires to be painted after fabrication. Finish ferrous mounting

hardware and accessories to prevent corrosion and discoloration to adjacent materials.

E. Luminaire hardware to comply with the following material standards: For steel and aluminum

luminaires, all screws, bolts, nuts and other fastening and latching hardware shall be cadmium

or equivalent plated. For stainless steel luminaires, all hardware shall be stainless steel.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to

prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during

relamping and when secured in operating position. Safety devices shall be detachable if

necessary and shall not interfere with luminaire performance, maintenance or the seating of any

luminaire element. Safety device shall not be visible during normal luminaire operation and

from normal viewing angles.

G. Luminaires provided shall have means for disconnection from power source during service, as

required in NEC Article 410.

H. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectance as follows, unless indicated otherwise:

1. White Surfaces: 85%

2. Specular Surfaces: 90%

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75%

I. Reflector cones shall adhere to the following:

1. Cones designed for vertically mounted lamps shall provide a minimum of 45 degree

cutoff of lamp and lamp image. Cones designed for horizontally mounted lamps shall

provide a minimum of 55 degree cutoff of lamp and lamp image. These shall be no

visible lamp flashing in the cone.

2. Plastic material shall not be used for reflector cones, unless otherwise specified.

3. Cones shall not be permanently fastened to the housing of ceiling and shall be removable

without tools. Retention devices shall not deform the cone or be visible from normal

viewing angles.

4. Trim shall be flush to ceiling without gaps or light leaks. Where the flange trim is

separate from the cone, it shall have the same finish as the reflector cone. Cones with

parabolic cross louvers shall be parallel and perpendicular to adjacent walls.



5. Reflector cones shall be uniform gauge, not less than 0.032” thick, high purity aluminum

Alcoa 3002 alloy. Cones shall be free from spin marks or other defects.

6. Manufacture cone using the Alzak process. Refer to Luminaire Schedule for cone color

and finish, i.e., specular or diffuse requirements. For compact fluorescent luminaires,

finish shall eliminate iridescence.

J. Lenses, Covers, Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100% virgin acrylic plastic. UV stabilized high resistance to

yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.

b. Lenses shall have uniform brightness throughout the entire visible area.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

K. Adjustable luminaires shall have positive locking devices to fix aiming angle. Luminaires shall

be capable of being relamped without adjusting aiming angle.

L. Each luminaire that has a lamp with an oval shape beam pattern or a spread lens that defines

beam orientation shall contain lamp or lens locking devices to insure that lamp or lens

orientation is not disturbed during lamp replacement or cleaning.

M. All luminaires and drivers shall operate within the temperature limits of their design and as

specified by UL in the applications and mounting conditions specified.

N. Luminaires recessed in suspended ceilings where the space above the ceiling is either an air

supply or return plenum shall conform to NEC Article 300-22.

O. Provide plaster frame for recessed luminaires mounted in other than T-bar ceilings. Verify

mounting with architectural reflected ceiling plan before ordering luminaires.

P. Provide wire guards on all open strip type luminaires in unfinished spaces.

Q. For weatherproof or vaportight installations, painted finishes of luminaires and accessories shall

be weather resistant enamel using proper primers or galvanized and bonded epoxy, so that the

entire assembly is completely corrosion resistant for the service intended. Exterior finishes

shall have an outdoor life expectancy of not less than 20 years without any visible rust or

corrosion. Where aluminum parts come in contact with bronze or steel parts, apply a coating

material to both surfaces to prevent corrosion.

R. Luminaires for use outdoors or in areas designated as damp locations shall be suitable gasketed

to prevent the entrance of moisture. Provide approved wire mesh screens for ventilation

openings. Dissimilar metals shall be separated by non-conductive material to prevent galvanic

action.

S. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Labels shall be located where they will be

readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in

place.

T. Luminaires shall be free of light leaks while providing sufficient ventilation of LED’s and

drivers to provide the required photometric performance.



U. Luminaires shall hold LED arrays securely against normal vibration and maintenance handling.

2.3 LUMINAIRES

A. Housing shall be minimum code gauge steel construction painted after fabrication with high

reflectance white paint unless otherwise indicated.

B. Shielding shall adhere to the following criteria:

1. Flat translucent diffuser shall be 100% virgin acrylic and shall have matte finish on

exterior side. Diffuser shall be of sufficient density to completely obscure lamp image.

2. Flat clear lenses shall be injection molded 100% virgin acrylic or clear tempered glass.

3. Clear patterned lenses shall be injection molded 100% virgin acrylic. For lenses with

convex pattern of prisms or cones, specified minimum thickness refers to distance from

the flat surface to the base of the pyramids or cones, or to the thickness of undisturbed

material. For lenses with concave pattern, specified minimum thickness refers to overall

thickness of the material. Lenses shall fully eliminate lamp image when viewed from all

directions between 45-90 degrees from vertical. From 0-45 degrees the ratio of

maximum brightness to minimum brightness shall not exceed 3:1. Minimum thickness

shall not be less than 0.125” with a minimum weight of 8 ounces per square foot.

C. Doorframes shall be supplied with concealed hinges and latches. Provide mitered corners with

no gaps or light leaks.

2.4 LUMINAIRES FOR OPERATING ROOMS

A. Anti-microbial painted aluminum housing, seam welded construction.

B. EMC certified to MILSTD461F without mesh grid.

C. Closed-cell silicone gasket to seal door to housing, and lens to door frame to prevent air leaks.

D. Smooth acrylic clear lens under primary lens for ease of cleaning.

E. Continuous piano hinge

F. NSF2 listed, IP65 certified.

G. Universal grid/flange for flexible mounting options without a conversion kit.

H. Universal input LED driver with 0 – 10 VDC standard dimming.

I. Fuse and holder.

J. Replaceable LED array with isolated thermal pads, 4000K.

K. Integral LED battery pack with charger.



2.5 EMERGENCY BATTERY FOR LUMINAIRES

A. Basis of Design Products:

1. Bodine or approved equal.

B. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within/top of

luminaire body and compatible with driver. Comply with UL 924.

1. Indicator light: Visible without opening luminaire or entering ceiling space. Indicator

Light: LED indicates normal power on.

2. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type, sized for ninety (90) minutes of

operation.

3. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state.

4. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code

required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is

annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

5. Universal Voltage input.

2.6 MESSAGE SIGNS

A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance and lettering size.

Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

B. Electrical: Internally mounted, universal 120/277V transformer.

C. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC operation: LED, 70,000 hours minimum rated life.

D. Heavy gauge steel housing and stenciled faceplate with thermoplastic color shield.

1. Legend: See Luminaire Schedule.

2.7 LED LUMINAIRES AND DRIVERS

A. All Luminaires

1. Comply with IES LM-79-08 Approved Method for measuring lumen maintenance of

LED light sources.

2. Comply with IES LM-80-08 Approved Method for electrical and photometric

measurement of SSL product.

3. Comply with In-Situ testing for more reliable results.

4. LED’s shall be Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHS) compliant.

5. LED arrays shall be sealed, high performance, long life type; minimum 70% rated output

at 50,000 hours.

6. LED luminaires shall deliver a minimum of 80 lumens per watt.

a. LED’s shall be “Bin No. 1” quality.



7. Drivers shall be solid state and accept 120 through 277 VAC at 60 Hz input.

8. The LED light source shall be fully dimmable with use of compatible dimmers switch

designated for low voltage loads.

9. LED color temperatures: CRI> 85, [3000/3500/other (requires approval)] as noted, +/-

275K.

10. Luminaires shall have internal thermal protection.

11. Luminaires shall not draw power in the off state. Luminaires with integral occupancy,

motion, photo-controls, or individually addressable luminaires with external control and

intelligence are exempt from this requirement. The power draw for such luminaires shall

not exceed 0.5 watts when in the off state.

12. Color spatial uniformity shall be within .004 of CIE 1976 diagram.

13. Color maintenance over rated life shall be within .007 of CIE 1976.

14. Indoor luminaires shall have a minimum CRI of 85.

15. Luminaire manufacturers shall adhere to device manufacturer guidelines, certification

programs, and test procedures for thermal management

16. LED package(s)/module(s)/array(s) used in qualified luminaires shall deliver a minimum

70% of initial lumens, when installed in-situ, for a minimum of 50,000 hours.

17. Luminaires shall be fully accessible from below ceiling plane for changing drivers, power

supplies and arrays.

B. Power Supplies and Drivers

1. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher

2. Maximum driver case temperature not to exceed driver manufacturer recommended in-

situ operation.

3. Output operating frequency: 60Hz.

4. Interference: EMI and RFI compliant with FCC 47 CFR Part 15.

5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: 20% Maximum.

6. Meet electrical and thermal conditions as described in LM-80 Section 5.0.

7. Fully dimmable, 0 – 10 VDC standard.

8. Secondary Current: Confirm secondary current specified by individual luminaire

manufacturers.

9. Compatibility of dimming switches: Certified by manufacturer for use with individually

specified luminaire and individually specified control components.

2.8 LED ARRAYS

A. All LED’s of the same type are to be provided by the same manufacturer.

B. Equip each luminaire with the proper LED array of the type shown or specified in the

Luminaire Schedule

2.9 WIRING

A. All flexible cord wiring between luminaire components or to electrical receptacles and not in

wireways shall have a minimum temperature rating of 105 degrees Celsius.

B. Cords shall be fitted with proper strain reliefs and watertight entries where required by

application.



C. No internal wiring shall be visible at normal viewing angles.

2.10 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Single-Stem Hangers shall be 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fitting and ceiling canopy.

Finish shall be the same as the luminaire.

B. Twin-Stem Hangers shall be two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy arranged to mount a

single fixture. Finish shall be the same as the luminaire.

C. Rod Hangers shall be 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated threaded steel rod.

D. Wires shall be ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc coated steel, 12 gauge.

E. Wires for humid spaces shall be ASTM A 580/A 580M, composition 302 or 304, annealed

stainless steel, 12 gauge.

F. Aircraft Cable Support shall use cable, anchorages, and intermediate supports recommended by

luminaire manufacturer.

G. Hangers for pendant industrial luminaires shall be heavy duty No. 8 jack chain with hangers,

"S” hooks, mounting straps, and all required accessories for complete installation.

2.11 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility,

luminance, and lettering size, comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Products: EcoSmart.

2. Lamps for AC Operation: LED, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. Green LED

type shall be utilized in new construction.

a. Individual LED modules shall not be visible.

3. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained

power pack.

a. LED, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. Green LED type shall be utilized in

new construction.

b. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.

c. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.

d. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage

drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored,

relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and

floated on charger.

e. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal

power and demonstrates unit operability.



f. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle

charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

g. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-



h. Individual LED modules shall not be visible.

2.12 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with

UL 924.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type.

2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.

3. Lamping: LED

4. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops

to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery

when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay

disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on

charger.

5. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and

demonstrates unit operability.

6. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;

bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

7. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard to protect lamp heads or units in areas

where subject to physical damage.

8. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power is

restored after an outage.

9. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Luminaires:

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls, and secure according to

manufacturers written instructions and approved submittal materials, unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires

for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary.

When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble,

clean thoroughly, and reinstall.



C. Remote Mounting of Drivers: Distance between the driver and fixture shall not exceed that

recommended by manufacturer. Verify, with manufacturers, maximum distance between driver

and luminaire.

D. Mounting height indicated from finished floor to bottom of pendant luminaire or to the center of

the outlet box for wall mounted luminaires unless otherwise noted. Verify mounting heights

with Architect and Lighting Designer.

E. Mounting height may also be indicated as the length of the pendant below finished ceiling.

F. Lay-in Ceiling Luminaire Supports: Use grid as a support element.

1. Luminaires of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling

plans or center in acoustical panel, and support luminaires independently with at least

two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. In addition, provide

slack earthquake safety wire hangers secured diagonally from opposite luminaire corners

to structural members above suspended ceiling.

G. Suspended Luminaire Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.

3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for

suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end.

4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to

building structure.

5. All power feeds shall originate from the same location/end of each run.

6. Where pendants or rods are longer than 48”, brace to limit luminaire swinging.

H. Provide all necessary hanging or mounting devices and accessories for all luminaires. Verify

the types needed for various ceiling conditions. Plaster rings shall be provided where required.

I. Verify weight and mounting method of all luminaires prior to ordering and provide suitable

support. Coordinate with General Contractor for luminaires that require additional blocking or

support. Luminaire mounting assemblies shall comply with all local seismic codes and

regulations.

J. Metal decking shall not be pierced for luminaire support.

K. Refer to architectural reflected ceiling plans for coordination of luminaire locations with

mechanical, fire protection, technology and fire safety equipment. Where conflicts occur,

coordinate with Architect, Architect/Engineer and Lighting Designer prior to installing any of

the Systems.

L. In accessible suspended ceilings, luminaire wiring connections, including equipment grounding

conductor, is to be through use of 72-inch (maximum) flexible conduit from a rigidly supported

junction box.

M. Wire per requirements of branch circuit installation. Properly ground each luminaire.



N. Luminaires located in recessed ceilings with a fire resistive rating of 1 hour or more shall be

enclosed in an approved fire resistive rated box equal to that of the ceiling. Acoustical ceiling

tiles are not acceptable.

O. Install luminaires with vent holes free of air blocking obstacles.

P. This Contractor shall be responsible for adjusting aperture flanges or rings on all recessed

luminaires to be flush with the finished ceiling. Trim shall completely conceal ceiling opening.

Q. Brace suspended luminaires installed near ducts or other elements so that they do not swing into

obstructions.

R. Wall mounted luminaires shall be supported from four-square outlet box plaster ring and from

wall at non-feed end with two 1/4-inch toggle bolts for gypsum board walls or 1/4-inch bolts to

pre-set inserts for concrete wall.

S. Luminaires shall not be secured to ductwork or other Systems.

T. Adjust variable position lampholders for proper lamp position prior to luminaire installation.

U. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."

3.2 DOWNLIGHT LUMINAIRES

A. Recessed Type in Accessible Ceilings: Mount in frames suitable for the ceiling with the

recessed portion of the luminaire securely supported from the ceiling opening by use of a metal

trim ring.

B. Recessed Type in Non-accessible Ceilings: As Specified for mounting in accessible ceilings,

except provide access to wiring and driver through the ceiling opening for the luminaire.

3.3 LUMINAIRES

A. Recessed Type: Support luminaires independent of the ceiling suspension system. Provide four

integral tabs (one at each corner) which rotate into position and lock on ceiling tees after

luminaire is lifted into the ceiling cavity or provide four clips similar to Caddy #535. Provide

mounting frames suitable for the ceiling type. In addition, provide slack earthquake safety wire

hangers secured diagonally from opposite luminaire corners to structural members above

suspended ceiling.

B. Wall Mounted Type: Support from four-square outlet box plaster ring and from wall at non-

feed end with two ¼ inch toggle bolts for gypsum board walls or ¼ inch bolts to pre-set inserts

for concrete wall.

C. If clearance above T-bar system is too restricted to "tip-in" luminaire, coordinate with acoustic

ceiling installer by leaving one cross T-bar off until the cross T-bar shall be secured into its

proper place. Fluorescent luminaires installed in hidden-spline-type ceilings shall have

supporting channels installed by Ceiling Contractor to adequately support the luminaire without

providing additional hangers from the structural ceiling above the suspended ceiling.



D. Surface Mounted Type:

1. Where mounted on accessible ceilings, support from structural members above ceiling by

means of hanger rods through ceiling or as approved.

2. Continuous Runs of Luminaires: Laser sight to insure luminaires are straight and true

when sighting from end to end, regardless of irregularities in the ceiling. Where

luminaires are so installed, omit ornamental ends between sections. All seams/ joints

shall be tightly fitted.

E. Pendant Mounted Type:

1. Provide strong back channel entire luminaire length unless luminaire is designed

specifically to be self-supporting.

2. Where suspended below accessible ceiling, provide structural support at suspended

ceiling level from structural members above ceiling. Do not run hanger rods through

ceiling.

3. Continuous Runs of Luminaires: Laser sight to insure luminaires are straight and true

when sighting from end to end, regardless of irregularities in the ceiling. Where

luminaires are so installed, omit ornamental ends between sections. All seams/joints

shall be tightly fitted.

4. All power feeds shall originate from the same location/end of each run.

F. Install luminaire diffusers only after construction work, painting and clean up are completed.

3.4 LED LUMINAIRES

A. Adhere to manufacturers installation guidelines regarding proper thermal management.

3.5 LIGHTING CONTROL

A. Provide branch circuiting in coordination with the requirements of Division 26 Lighting Control

and Dimming Sections and as indicated.

3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Remove protective plastic covers from luminaires and luminaire diffusers only after

construction work, painting and clean-up are completed. Remove, clean, and reinstall all dirty

lamps, reflectors and diffusers.

B. Clean luminaires internally and externally after installation. Use methods and materials

recommended by manufacturer for cleaning Alzak reflectors and other surfaces.

C. Make final adjustment of aimable luminaires and adjustable light settings under the direction of

the Architect and/or Lighting Designer during a scheduled period of time prior to the

completion of the Project, after normal business hours if required. Include all equipment and

personnel expenses including overtime required for focusing.



D. Luminaires, reflectors, louvers and accessories which are damaged, blemished, or impregnated

with fingerprints shall be replaced at this Contractor's expense. All finishes shall be unmarred

upon Project completion.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply

with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical

Systems."


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify

transfer from normal power to battery/generator and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and

interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate

compliance with standards.

C. Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components.

D. Replace all inoperable and burned out LED’s at the end of construction prior to Cleveland

Clinic occupancy.

E. Advance Notice: Give dates and times for field tests.

F. Provide instruments to make and record test results.

G. Malfunctioning Luminaires and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure

until units operate properly.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions.

Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

Some of this Work may be required after dark.

1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect.


PROJECT NAME CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #_________


EXTERIOR LIGHTING_2015 265600 - 1

SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section provides general requirements for a complete and fully operational Exterior

Lighting System including:

1. Exterior solid-state luminaires that use LED technology

2. Poles

3. Accessories

4. Luminaire supports


1. Section 265100 "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior

surfaces of buildings.

2. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including

time switches, photosensors, occupancy sensors, and lighting relays and contactors.


cabling.


A. Catalog numbers indicated in the Luminaire Schedule are a design series reference and do not

necessarily represent the exact catalog number, size, voltage, wattage, type of light bar, driver,

finish trim, ceiling type, mounting hardware or special requirements as Specified or as required

by the particular installations. Provide complete luminaire to correspond with the features,

accessories, number of light bars, wattage and/or size specified in the text description of each

luminaire type. Additional features, accessories and options specified shall be included.

B. Luminaire voltage shall match the voltage of the circuit serving same.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color-rendering index.




C. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

D. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including driver housing if provided.

E. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.

F. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above.

1.5 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION

A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and

supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.

B. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf, distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.

C. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft., applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M Ice Load Map.

D. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire and banners and banner arms, calculated

and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.

1. Basic wind speed of calculating wind load for poles 50 feet (15 M) high or less is 90

mph.

1. Wind Importance Factor: 1.3.

2. Minimum Design Life: 25 years.

3. Wind induced vibration.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. The authorized manufacturer’s representative for the Project area shall prepare Submittals for

each luminaire type. In addition to the luminaire Submittals, a list shall be provided identifying

the manufacturer representative for each luminaire type. Provide manufacturers’ names,

addresses, and telephone numbers. Requests for prior approval shall also include this

information. Submittals or requests for prior approval without this information will be rejected.

B. Product Data shall indicate that luminaire, light bars and drivers fully comply with Contract

Documents. Data shall be submitted for each type of luminaire indicated, arranged in order of

luminaire designation. For standard catalog luminaires provide original product catalog sheets

indicating data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Materials and dimensions of luminaires.

2. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on certified results of laboratory tests of each

luminaire type, outfitted with LED arrays, drivers and accessories identical to those

indicated for the luminaire as applied in the Project.

1. Photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. Low voltage transformers.

4. LED power supplies.

5. Types of LED’s, including manufacturer, wattage, and Color Rendering Index (CRI) and

color temperature in degrees Kelvin (K).

C. Shop Drawings shall:

1. Show details of nonstandard or custom luminaires.




2. Indicate dimensions, weights, method of field assembly, components, features, and

accessories.

3. This Contractor shall provide the manufacturer with accurate field dimensions where

required.

4. Include wiring diagrams, power and control wiring.

D. Wiring Diagrams shall detail wiring for luminaires and differentiate between manufacturer-

installed and field-installed wiring.

E. Product Certificates shall be signed by manufacturers of luminaires certifying that products

comply with requirements.

F. Maintenance Data shall be provided for luminaires and equipment to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals Specified in Specifications Section describing Operations

and Maintenance Data.

G. Field quality control test reports.

H. Special Warranties Specified in this Section.

I. Review of luminaire submittals which indicate voltage, mounting condition, or quantities shall

not be considered to be approval of said voltage, mounting condition, or quantities. This

Contractor shall field verify voltage and actual mounting condition and method.

J. Product samples complete with housing, trim, specified lamp, and 8’ cord with plug shall be

submitted if requested.

K. Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by Manufacturers of poles, certifying that

products are designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS-4-M and that load

imposed by luminaire and attachments has been included in design. The certification shall be

based on design calculations by a Professional Engineer.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and luminaires to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all light bar types used on Project; use manufacturers' codes.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS



1. Glass, Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 10% or one dozen (whichever is less) of each type

and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

2. Globes and Guards: 5% of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each

type.





A. Package poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.

B. Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation.

Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.

C. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation.

Handle with web fabric straps.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent

agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as

defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.


Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.


D. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for

indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

E. ARRA compliant.

F. All luminaires shall bear a UL 1598 Wet Location label.

G. Comply with IEEE C2, “National Electrical Safety Code.”

H. Designated manufacturers are listed to define the requirements for quality and function of the

specified product.

I. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Guidelines.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires with plantings, paving, site walls and other site

work elements.

B. Coordination Meetings: This Contractor shall meet at least twice with the sitework installer(s).

Hold first meeting before submittal of shop drawings to coordinate each luminaire mounting

condition and location. During second meeting, coordinate layout with other site components.

Coordinate depth and location of all luminaire pole bases in all areas.




1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain,

perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty

period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or

unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage.

1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

4. Warranty Period for LED arrays/drivers: Five years from date of Substantial

Completion.

5. Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in

finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but

not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as listed

in the Master Lighting Fixture Schedule or comparable products approved in writing by

Cleveland Clinic.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet

locations by an NRTL acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for

luminaires.

C. Comply with IESNA TM-15-07 Luminaire Classification System for Outdoor Luminaires.

D. Minimum 2G vibration rating.

E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

F. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or

deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to

prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during

relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or

replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect driver when door opens.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=6845&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd




H. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

I. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat,

and UV radiation.

J. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light

distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.

1. Provide house side shields where required to minimize spill light onto adjacent

properties.

K. Optical assemblies: full cutoff with zero uplight (ULOR=1), “dark sky” compliant. LED

assemblies shall comply with BUG rating system.

L. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.

2. Specular Surfaces: 90 percent.

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

M. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and

cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

N. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested

luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support

materials.

O. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes

Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and

designating finishes.

1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the

Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

2. Finish: premium 5 stage TGIC polyester powder coat paint.

1. Color: See Luminaire Schedule.

P. Outdoor Wall Mounted Area Luminaires

1. Shall have minimum 52 lumens per watt.

2. No more than 48% of the total luminaire output shall be within the forward 60-80º

zone.

3. No more than 3% of the total luminaire output shall be in the forward 80-90º zone.

4. ULOR = 0.

Q. Parking Structure Luminaires


2. At least 30% of total luminaire output shall be within the 60-80º zone.

3. No more than 20% of total luminaire output shall be above the 80º zone.

R. Canopy Luminaires





2. At least 30% of total luminaire output shall be within the 40-60º zone.

3. No more than 20% of total luminaire output shall be above the 80º zone.

2.3 LED DRIVERS AND ARRAYS

A. UL 1598 listing.

B. LED arrays shall have LED’s that produce minimum 80 lumens/watt @ 525mA.

1. Lumen Depreciation Data: maintain greater than 95% lumen maintenance at 60,000

hours per IES TM-21.

2. LED color: neutral white, 4000 deg K, minimum CRI of 70.

C. LED arrays shall have an IP66 enclosure rating.

D. Drivers shall accept 120 through 480 volts, 50/60 Hz.

E. Power Factor > 0.9.

F. THD < 20%.

G. Surge protection: 10kA/10kV per ANSI/IEEE C136.2-2014.

H. Minimum starting temperature: minus 30 deg C, 40 deg C ambient.

I. The housing shall have an integral thermal management system with extruded aluminum

radiation fins and lateral airways.

J. Comply with IES LM 79/ LM 80-08.

K. Comply with In-Situ testing for more reliable results.

L. LED’s shall be Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHS) compliant.

2.4 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS

A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.

B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory

set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc and off at 4.5 to 10 fc with 15-second minimum time delay.

Relay shall have directional lens in front of photocell to prevent artificial light sources from

causing false turnoff.

2.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4-M.




1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without

failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in

"Structural Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article, with a gust factor of 1.3.

2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of

luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be

used in pole selection strength analysis.

B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting

requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support

components.

1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points.

2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication unless otherwise indicated.

3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.

D. Handhole: Oval-shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches with cover secured

by stainless-steel captive screws.

E. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange.

Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork shall comply with Division 3 Concrete Sections.

2.6 ALUMINUM POLES

A. Poles: Seamless, extruded structural tube complying with ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-

T6 with access handhole in pole wall.

1. Shape: Refer to Luminaire Schedule or shall match existing site poles.

2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation.

B. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and

securely fastened to pole top.

C. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in

Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding

and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.

D. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, with pole and adapter fittings of cast aluminum. Adapter

fitting welded to pole and bracket, and then bolted together with stainless-steel bolts.

1. Tapered oval cross section, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire.

2. Finish: Match pole and luminaire material and finish.

E. Aluminum Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and

Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Finish designations prefixed by “AA", comply with the system established by the

Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.




2. Finish: Premium five (5) stage TGIC polyester powder coat paint.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range or to match

existing adjacent poles.

2.7 POLE ACCESSORIES

A. Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and

nuts. Finish same as pole.

B. Fusing: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current ratings as

recommended by driver manufacturer.

C. Banner Arms: Provide where indicated. Coordinate with manufacturer for maximum banner

size limitations to avoid banner arm or pole failure. Banner arms shall be break-away type to

design to fail before over stressing the pole.

D. Wind Mitigation Devices: provide in areas of consistent, high, uneven winds.

E. Duplex Receptacle: Where noted, provide a NEMA 5-20R Duplex Receptacle in a weatherproof

assembly complying with Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for ground-fault circuit-interrupter

(GFCI) type.

1. Recessed, nonmetallic polycarbonate plastic or reinforced fiberglass, weatherproof in use,

cover, color to match pole, with cord opening, that when mounted results in NEMA 250,

Type 3R enclosure. With lockable hasp and latch that complies with OSHA lockout and

tag-out requirements.

2. Where noted, provide minimum 1800-W transformer, 120V secondary, protected by

replaceable fuses, mounted behind access cover.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.

1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the

application and approved by manufacturer.

B. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric

device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources, favoring a north orientation.

3.2 POLE INSTALLATION

A. Alignment: Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires

and their mounting provisions on the pole.




B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and

underground features unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:

1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches.

2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet.

3. Trees: 15 feet from tree trunk.

C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by

pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements shall comply

with Division 3 Concrete Sections.

D. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level

recommended by pole manufacturer.

1. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use non-shrink or expanding concrete

grout firmly packed to fill space.

2. Install base covers unless otherwise indicated.

3. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange

to drain condensation from interior of pole.

E. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).

3.3 BOLLARD AND INDIVIDUAL GROUND MOUNTED LUMINAIRES

A. Align units for optimum directional alignment of light distribution.

B. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at bollard location.

Cast conduit into base, and shape base to match shape of bollard base. Finish by troweling and

rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing shall comply with Division 3

Concrete Sections.

3.4 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a

dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In

concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied

with a 50 percent overlap.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and

Bonding for Electrical Systems."

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding

system.




3. Install a suitably sized copper equipment grounding conductor in all exterior lighting

conduits.


A. Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components.

B. Replace all burned out or inoperative LED arrays at the end of Construction prior to Cleveland

Clinic occupancy.

C. Advance Notice: Give dates and times for field tests.

D. Provide instruments to make and record test results.

E. Test as follows:

1. Verify proper operation, switching and phasing of each luminaire after installation.

2. Emergency Lighting: Interrupt electrical supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify

normal transfer to generator and retransfer to normal.

3. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating

and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to the lighting system, retest to

demonstrate compliance with standards.

F. Malfunctioning Luminaires and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure

until units operate properly.

G. Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and

energizing circuits with normal power source.

1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.

H. Illumination Tests:

1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST

standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s):

1. IESNA LM-64, "Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas."

2. IESNA LM-72, "Directional Positioning of Photometric Data."

I. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and

interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate

compliance with standards.





THIS PAGE INTENETIONALLY LEFT BLANK